*. 
2 2 


«* 


Jer. M4 vwung Rx 


Fa 
— 1 


* 


ee will be Poskisnzyp 
: x * | e 


VG LISH- EX ER 


— 


9. 4 


\ 4 N 
} , = 


A COLLECTI 


ox 
> 


” 


* 
« 


> 


—_—_— — 


% 


— = > l p C hh, 
P ; „ IE Ce ne, >. 
(VA * © SID * Cats mY 1 3 * 7 * 1 
. — N * 5 £ pa? Fs WH 7.4 8 F ＋ * n = 
a 2 FEY DR x N . EX N n WT 
" 2 * : * 1 * * — 7 * N 3 x - LY 
: 2 18 — * * EE 4 * . py * 
rs: 150 1 > „ 
* : 
3 
* 22 


4 . - 
x 2 * FJ 
3 * y 
. Shox . 
8 
1 


* * * q 
* . 4 » . 4 * ny 4 : f * * * 
8 2 bf 5 ; & i A 40 wy — : a 7 3 7 
. 1 E. , 4 * 8 0 5 3 * . 4 > 1 1 
it N N ry » " {4 


sur a 1 ͥ9 ru. 
3 Dauhten ef en 


4 


i ” 
F ky ; F 


16 8 UVUTTLEWORTH, Ef 


| ADAM; 


— —· 


HE uninterrupted 1 intimate 
Connection that I have been ho- 
ed with in your. 


ns 6 - ax 


| public Acknowledgemen And, m_ 
, if my Obligations had, been leſs, I 
have had ſufficient Inducement _ 
fer the following Ti reatiſe to Tou, 8 

12 9 


% . 


* * * ? * 


If this Crammatical Compi 


ld, in any Degree, contribute Mbenn, 
our A muſement or Improvement ff 1 D . 5 


give me\the higheſt Satisfa, 2. 4 
written Inſtrufiins of any hind, in 
preſent Situation, , almoſt un- 
ſary, Example! is ſuperior to a 
eps; and it is your grau e 
"x 8 to 


; * 
= # ” * 
— — 
* po - 
* 
; 7 . 
7 * 
\ * 4 4 
* — o 
S x 
* : 
o * «> 
* 2-3 . 
- * * 4 $2. 
pp ys — - * — * 
5 * 


valification daily 
e 0” may 2 enje 


— 18 


7 and 
great. a. 14 


aur ever obliged, 2 61 


W oe 24 , [nat N 1 


N 3 


is «kN to hi credit of Yhe F 5 
Ave, that the Study of ENGLISGdad 85 
MMA has en profecured. win, ; 
ane Succeſs, and carried to- e 
pheſt Degree of critical. Perfection. 
Egregious Miſtakes. have been pointed 1 
t in the Writings of Engliſh: Authors of _ 
higheſt Reputarios ; ; and the ver 
t Writers ia our Language. have 5 6 
enfound to offend-macerially and in ma- 5 1 | 
Initances. in ſome Rules of Engin 


rammar, Which are now made plain bas 4 


ſy, and pretty generally underſtood.” _—_ 
Although the Names of Pop t, Swi 4 3 f 
»DISoN, and fome ef their ( otemport7 "A 1 | 
s muſt be for ever held in the bigheit E. 8 
m, and their Writings moſt deſervedly |: = 
mired, yet it would-hepaying even vita 

o high a Compliment, taloo Upon them 55 
infallible. aad Standards of Perfection 


2 
8 


25 


ſome of the minute Niceties of a Science, 4 2 
ich in their Days were little ſtudied, and 3 
aſequently not thoroughly. underitge 5 1 


It was undoubredly an Undertaking wür = 
quired both Lal our and Genius, to * 1 A 


N 


374 "4 
. 4 7 
] 1 Won Ws 
. 4 * «. * + * 
, 127 * : 
. x a 
3 « x * ” Fl & 
1 3 
3 ' 2 
1 7 
. * 
* 


82 
— 


—— —— 
n r 
AY. 


| _— ; 
Wert 
** 


"EY 
" . 
A * * 
"ROM 1 
* * 


E 2 our Ctheir Solecifias i in our. « Liognage," vid is, - 


- Accuracy. and Preciſion.: It was :an ati ure 


ous Taſk and reſerved for a# Right Rere bus 1 


end Father, and eminent_Dignirary: pfad fr 
Church; who, by his profound, claſſnlhy di 
| Knowledge i in other Languages, ſeemed rds 
be the ableſt and fitteſt for ſuch an In veſlig 0 


2 tion in his own, The Grammatical TreaniWn wt 


which be publiſhed ſome Years. dern x out 
| Fuperſede any, future Attempr for the er u. 
ſtruction, of Adults, in; the En lith Li ges, 
8 5 fay Adults, for his ordſhip oran 
ammar ifose may beallowed dea heit 
ſion, is too perfect, that is, too ſcientific he 
Children. It was never intended as the ful ly 1 
= for Beginners, who. are. by aorce 
eans able to carry on a Chain. of 9 „ e. 1 
ing in Jengchened Periods, and long dere i! 
tions; but ought to have all their Tala Wn | 
7 reduced into the Form of Rules, res 
0. tached, and ſhort. as pofſible 
e follwieg Compilation is intended ſal 

” the Uſe ef ſuch. Beginners, and as an. ln 
troduction to, his Lordſhip's Grammar, and 
if it anſwers that End, it will ap ea in ſud 
2 3 the Aber 5 vilhes... 1 


LY 7 * 
1 Wa, 
1 Fs 3 * Bio - 48 * i __ 


— 


* 


0 | 


* Dr. Lowr 15 Biſhop, of Oxford. 


* . 
De EW 2 8 5 
8 . 
' . 
N 
"65 ” 
— 


is, ad has long. been Matter of: great 
ure to me, at Jeaſt, to obſerve thejnn- 7 
ous Puplicarions, of this Sort, that have - 
d from the Preſs and appeared) in ſo 
7 different Parts of the in dom; ASL =. 
üs a Proot that the Englif: Language 
o generally | taught Grammatiealſy _ 
n which. it may be reaſanably. expected; "EX 4 
t our- Youths will not, for the Future 
er upon the Study of the ancient, Lan- 2 
ges, ſuch entire Notices, and ſo tatallfx 
orant ,of the Grammatical Coaſtruction 1 
their own. | -- 
Ine ſeveral Engliſh Grammars, that bag = 
ly made their , Appearance, in ſomes. 
pree, moſt "probably, have all had the, 
Lam the rather inclined to think, Ane 
de chat this may be the Caſe, than, enter 4 

pn the inyidious Province, Which te: 
er both 1 and Malignity, , 
neo out 70 EXP ag the Befes, of. 2 
pe, T . 

0 mg 


Frota fo many 

ound, in thi wh 
vt any very great cgr ee 

hh that: 88 ew e 


#5, 

$2 r 

. . — 45815 
* W AF» os 


—— — A A. 


: wat perhaps” the beſt that can be 0 
Favonr of this, is its Brevity and Cond 
"ues (1 hope'F may venture to add; irs | 
ſpicuity) and the . Plan puff 
Arche h the whole of it 
The Definition of "Ks Se 
3 will be found to be fawiliar 3 
1 and new in feveral. Taſtances; 
Rules“ and 4.xamples are digeſted in fi 
4 Manner as to be intelligible to Cbidg 
by nd the Parſing Index annexed to the Gra 
mar kiules, and explaining, 1 the t.xamyl 
Will, 5 am perſuaded, be of ſingular. 
vice I have uſed it with great Succeſs 
1 Sears, 2 and have conſtant] found 
3 very beſt Festes ie both or Undg 
e the Conſtruction of the Eoglif 
aud making Children more readily appt 
. 5 hend the Syntax of other Languages: II 
; 3 1 75 arly acquainted with the irue Pry 
2 Sag 7 les. of- Concord and Government, 4 
"can the more eaſily, if Occaſion. be, app 
. dhe Terms, which they have been long! 
N to in their own Tongue, to 
plain the Conſtruction of the * Gree | 
any other „ W 


4. _ — er 2 0 22 — — 5 — _ — 8 
9 - q 8 n I IE? 
Bs 8 * b 2 a” 


9 
— 


— — N r —_—_—y 
— — 


. 


—— — 
© 


3 8 
* 


* ——— r 
'F * 


en 


* 


af y Introduction to 


d | | : 
, | | N 8 
h. _- Grammar. . 


8 ; 5 — 4 > 5 7 


RAMMAR is the Art of, Spe 
y or Writing a Language, Drape 
ngliſh Grammar is the, Art of | 
"or Writing the, 


perl. he 
rammar treats of 
eral 1 | 


> 


x6." 
e 


N 1 L ” WS : Wh 1s. ; WY + "34 

1 er e 3 F 2 beat» * A 5 * 

— * 1 . + 44 : 5 * 8 > EY * % = 
#72 * 


71 


lick 


'T 
Ita 


1 
2 
— 
Q 


GIIS 


— 1 LL, 


—— — — —  — —— — 


* 


lYewek is a Letter char ma Et 
pleat Sound by itſelf, „ 
here are fix Vowels 4 e, , 0, 1, | 


either a Vowel or a Diphthong. 
\ Conſenant is a letter that canfiot:f ſound | 


— + 


bout a Vowel. ä 

There are nineteen Conſonants. 5 6 
rhjkImnpqrſtvaxz. 

mſomants are divided into Mutes, 

utes are Conſonants that cannot be found- 

without the help of a Vowel as, bee, cee. 


Half-Vowels or Semi-Vowels are . 5 
ts which have an imperfect Sound will- IS 
a Vel; as, Im nr... 
mur are called Liquids from che eaſ 
nner in which they paſs on after a Male . 
-r ſame Syllable; as in e eren TY 


: 
1 
Ka; of 


All Mutes have their Names b inn 
th a Conſonant; as, bet cer e. 


All La ee * ag their Nami: 


Obe e on the "LETT 


22 pro 


9 2 R 
a ies 22 
* W * 7 - Wa L £5 2 3 4 
. > n 2 * . a 
) 1 & th 


E 81 A 


bort Sound in Words or Syllables that 
with a Conſonant; and a long Sound 
Words or yllables that end with a Vouf 
_ Hat, hate; hér, here; _blt, 7 7 röb, Ra 
- Tun, Tüne, Martyr, er : 
The Vowel a Rds. like. au bling 
or I, and any other Conſonant; as, 
bald, half, walk, Pſalm; Salt: Ju 
the End of a Word has a Sound beni he m 
and 4, av Nea, 5.5 5 
The Vowel e is filent at the en of Wa 
ad before n final; as, froze, frozen: 
ant the End, when 7 and another Can 
$ 0  Dant goes before it, is ſounded befor 
42 as Acre meagre.” ſound Alter, weager: \ 
The Vowel : before another 0 
"IF, genere, ſounds like 5; as Bullion, Chi 
. tran,” Poniard: And a few Words ir 
25 iche French, like e long; 5 as Machine] Ma 
1 | dsine. e 4 
3 The Vowel | 0 ſounds like Saks 00, 
Ae Words of one Syllable; as Ta 
| I Womb, move, prove: And ſometimes: 


B che loft ſhort. u, as come ome Kingden. | 
B The Vowel z has no other Sound A 
| "the long and ſhort above mentioned. ese 
The Vowel y is in ſound the fame as ble. 
Fa uted inſtead of iat the End of Wor _ 1 
B Das cry, Ay, it is uſed like wife before i b * 


1 "4 I ?y 

"= 8 pO ; | 
{ 10 1 9 3 PP *, mid * of a 0 as. "£7 in 
1 £2 He 3 59 
EEE F 

3+ | p 1 * 3 
* "I o 0 5 
#/ * 


2 5 ; "2 : 
5 
A * 8 


Enerien Rophtknre. 


W is cither a "Vowel, or 4 Denen 
ing two us's united, it is ſounded near- 1 
2s 00: After the Vowel o it is ſometimes 8 3 
vt ſoun ed at all; as know, mow, fow': 7 
omet! nes it 18 founded like A: fingle Us as, 8 1 
WES 5 3 J ; A n 
The Der b c is ſounded: like 45 befor 
5 u, and like s before e iy: And. "for. 
he moſt part follows the ſame Rule: 

His only an Aſpiration or harſh Breath: 
1g; as Horſe ; ſometimes 1 it is not ſounded 
tall; as an Hour: But at the End or 
ords i it is ſounded, as much Hacb, 1 

Jis a ſofter. & and a diſtin Lertef rot 
he Vowel: 7. . IS = 

Visa coarſer 7 and A diſtin Letrer 65 N 3 I 
he Vowel G „„ LED >; 2 

X is a double Confonant made of . of +: 
ub. „ 
Zi Is a thicker or a 6. . 


* <L ys * 
v © * 
} "Ty n * 
- - 4 


birnrnones. 


5 Diptithong i is two Vowels provomiced | 


together,” and making one Sounder n 
ble. N 3 


Diphthongs' are aber proper” er f im. 
proper Ps j 


Diphrhongs are proper, whenBoth Von 135 E 


25 
{wp < P II 
Kaz 
4d 


. 
LE 
9 


- +; 


| that | 


* 


*I 
Ws. 


"= $9: 


* 
| Bo * ty 
-4, 2 f A a 
e 1 2 
n * n 8, 5 
* — \ »Th 
_ 7 + 2 . 0 — 


oy 


near 6 are, 


. EY; rs © hy, eu, 21 e ö + 1 


* 


| Fraud TOY 


They are fond w 
{wing Words. cou in Boouly, ein 
e im Lie, iow in Views wlll 
ail, ues in Ryean, wee in Sn, 


+ 


4 


5 2 
$4 If 


SYLLABLES. 


„able is a diſtin& 8 
more Letters at one Bre 


: ling is 191 Art. of 3 
ng the Letters ſingly and dividing! 
operly into their Syllables, 
In Spelling- there can be. no 8 
ichout a Vowel; but a Vowel 0 
ake a Syllable. 
In Spelling, a Conſon: | 
o Vowls, is joined to thi 
bove: But x between two 255 
the former, as Oæ-en. 
| Two of the ove 


+ 
. K vo, 
3 5 % 


5 join! Fae, in. 
r-dent, urg 


Tuxer en Ropiczye: | | 
OY . con 1 100 :\ Bur a Mute is genera 
Joi ping to a Liquid following, as 7 
0 Creature... Tees Ti 1 BY 

1 * Except in e W rords, For .th 
1 they are e Parted, as, e 22 e 


preſſing our Meaning Ir” Notid 
= -TIn the 55 l Tongue are mie Parts 
4 Fopeeck „or di Fent ſorts of EY ORs A 
i" * 2 ig 2 15 , In. ö Neun. 1 1 Pronit 
45. Aa, 5. Verb. 6. Atorr 
* Ts Hon 8 Preps tion. '9 #1 


* Ws 


᷑ ArTIC LE „ 
= N Article is aPart of Speech 155 ho 
N force a Noun to point it out, and | 1 
5 " 9 ts upcertain Significationn. N 
1 In Engliſh there are two Ai 4,1 
| . . - the, A becomes an before a Vowel; i 
. it alen no. ee before 95 Wen 
5 ed in an Weettain Senſe, to o poif 
it a ng Linn vie the Kind; and 
 Galled the melee Arzides. as, 4 Me 
zone of that Kind of Creature call'd Mali 
Fs _ Þ likewiſe uſed. befoge theſe Plug pet 
i . Jeu, * 1 05 a cor 


. 2 
dh ct tg rt 3 
* 


red, and; as, 4 4 PRs great. 

Men, a dozen Shillings, a ſcore . 
rp, 4 hundred Years, a thouſand Pounds 
he is uſed in a more confine@ Senſe, 8 
t out the particular Thing, g 
he Kind, and is called the definitive 
cle; as, the Man, tbe Men, the par- 
ar one, Or more. of that Kind of Crea: 
called Ma. 4 at of. 
he, is likewiſe uſed! before gon 
ſuperlative ducnb,ro mai 

2 more ſtrongly: 3 8 To "Heme 

the feꝛveſt the bes a 

Sub ſtantive without any Art 148 — 
it, is taken in its largeſt Senſe; 2 % 
u, the — 85 Race c | 1 


1 Mun 18 the Word Iau — 1 
ne of any Perſons. ane or Things "IJ 1 


e. Noun | is called a 8 / tantive, Mnauſa, 
 thes Subject of * | ourle,” or 2 5 8 


* 


Noun 3 are 20 wy. : 5 F 
and e a 


#: — f 
E 
3 1 * & N 


2 
4 
2 * y 
- I "if 3 
* oy 48 \ 
E 14 
b lac 2 1 
1 


Excite RupieNTss 5 


. 'A Muß Subſtantive. common, is a Na 
N common to A whole Kind or Sort of Thin 


as, an Animal, a Man. be 
Accidents are the Changes, that a * _ + 
undergoes.” ie. 4 31 * 

The Accidents & the Now; A e e ; en 


g Cafe, and Gender... ON 
5 NUMBER. 


5 . N nber is the Diſtinction ofo one F mi 
Non ouns have two Numbers, Singular 1 
5 Plural. | 
'q The Sin ular Ne- ſpeaketh only4 a 
I one; as a Bock: the Plural Number * 
. . th of more than one; as Bo | 
I' be Plural Number is generally fornd 
i | by adding to the Singular; as Book, Bot 1 


1 | But when the Singular ends. in /s x oy i 


2 the Plural is formed by adding 25, 4 

* Croſs, Crofes 3 Fox Foxes, Church, Church, 
7 5% Fiſhes, If the Singular end.i TW. Wa 
| l 23 = e, the Plural is formed by changing / or / Dee 
| m ves, as half, halves; Wife, Wives. P, 
ue e Words endin 8 in 5 and Us ol = 

re 


4s 5 I 


tw. "ER "Mr * 
3 "a 6 ” . 

* „ \ 
=: ura 


were. SY eg 3 — 9m 
1 9 
* a N 


5 rho Kinds contain many N as. at it, 
Animal, includes Man, Horſe, Sheep, &c. Auen 
© theſe Sorte contain many Individuals under then bilo 

. as there are many. of che Creature called Ma i | 


ve, . iy | n of e * $3; e 


e 
hs” 2 


g 1 1 6 $ ft - iu 4 
: * Ea * 5 


0 . 2 = *y * * 
is * | , 
+77 ” N e 4 
: Fo. RE 4 
q = ak $5 * 
3 5 


= N ö Bar ne e 5 * A 2 
8 1 . c S "Ie [3 MS. 
© : 9 PP! 2 "3-4 e n n Me * 7 "1 - 9 N. 5 4 : 
* e 2 ” 1 GD FS A F * n a 3 — 4 * 
. * 8 S- 5 . x I 2 5 > LOSE 0 n VER — * 4 
* * 4 Ty o . Th RT x 8 0 - Fog tes 
. 2 2 R GO. FLW a : ; x ? 8 4 6 * * we > 


2 Dans 


e to make them Plural z; as 2 be 
arfs ; Roof, Roofs x Mi» Mug. 


Fi. 


The Plural in Tome War s ends in n. as 1 
n Men, Ox: Oxen, Child Children, Bro- 
2 Nouns in y make the Plural 
changing y into ies. as Army Armies. i 
But Penny makes Pence, Mouſe Mice; - 
uſe Lice, Tooth, Teeth, Gooſe Geeſe. © \ © 
The Hebrew Words Cherub and Seraph 
m the Plural by adding im, as Cherubim 
abhim: But Phenomenon makes Pha» | 
ena from the Greeks, and Radius makes = 
di; Magus, Magi, from the Latin. - 
Some Nouns are * only in the 8 55 3 N 
h as cannot be multiplied into many, as 
me lience, Temperance, Wheat, Gold, Silber j 
er, Wormwood 3 others are uſed only in A qF 
ai Plural, as Aſbes, Snuffers, Tongs: An i 
ne are che fame in both Numbers; as: 
er, Sheep, Stine; which laſt. bong, a 
iglar by adding the Article 4 1 55 2 q f 
Deer, a Sheep, a Sine e 
Proper Names being the Names 
ular Perſons or Places ha reno Plu 
Yet ſometimes proper Ni ee 
ural, on three Accouns . 5 
it, As it would be almoſt; i nnpetmble to A 
rent a new, Name fer every ren born - 
bild, a are called alter the N _ 
Cn; | JE W Names 4 15 


3 "oe. 22 be It 
: OS . : 6 . N oe T's 
8 — * 
1 * AG . n 6 — 
| * > Wn 1 « 1 - a 
4 - $4 x; 0 
> ; * 23 7 ” Parte ted .. kx .& 
2 R a . 
. . - # 2 
” + . oa 


- To 
r 
o * * * * 3 
ww K * 
3 Fx 
* 
* * | 
2 . * * 


11 2 — el 


\ 2 Name, hence we have the Johns, 2 


ad. As Family Names in Engl 5 297 er 


= to all the Kindred ;: hence the 
tbe Percies, and che Darcies-. 17 7 


zd. As ſome particular RN of j 


W  tinguiſhed Merit have appeared in 


W orld, their Names became. commoſy! 
"denote all thoſe who excelled gs |; 
Way; ; hence Conquerors, Oratort, 

virtuous Women, are called Alexa Ti. 


| V hog Nrceras, and "one! we | 2 


on 4 * * 


EO ASES a are e the aeg Facing | 
Com 
here are three Caſes, che Nominal | 


54 5 


+ the Genitive, the Accuſative. 
The Nominative Cale is the Name id 
it 'cometh, before the Verd, and anſwett 

to the a who or what ? . as the lM 


$.! S / * 
_ "= | Te "CAC Et 
© 1 ö 2 7 * x” ; 
4 4 
» ©, 


. A 1 8 . Who teacheth? ry oa 105 | 

5 -L Die rr. 
*The Genitive Gaſe i is that from 

_ loms 

£ — When cb Ce is el 45 s Tt goß 
jefore the other e but when x 1 fol y 


* ? 22 15 F 
5 r 0 
4 q 8 8 
E 
ty = 4 n £4 
| f 24M . 
Ho. eth; 3 as the / 

j in A N 2 

en 5 ab F 2. e 

2! : N BB 

5 N 4a} et. | 
: „ x S © \ - y * 
tA * * . pa > 
* 4 5 * pF: 

"y ' 38 v * 
pet 4 . ; 275 
7 . * 5 
N n 2 


Even 16% Reprents | 1 + 
ething proceedeth, or to mil ſome- 
ng belongeth; it is formed from the . 
minatiue by the Addition of , and 
ſwereth to the N . a8 the | 
ifer'SLearning. ea, 


* 
* 


Mphoſe Learning? 75 = Ss = =P W VA : 2 | 5 


Fa The Maſter's. © 55. 
This Cafe may be refed by 7. as 
e Learning of the Mafter. * = | 


The" Accuſalive Caſe Sollowch 4 the Falk, > 


d has its Ending the *ſame as the N, 


ative: it anſwereth to the Queſtion. ww! 
what © as, I love the ee 5 
2 7 Whom do you loves 21 


280 a : ox" Ix 8 

* A < FR 7 * C ; 7 8 2 
0 p - Oat 5 2 - = e - 

13 b 7 2 - £7 „ 

28 8 ay 4 „ - - 

** - * oY 2 > —+# 
* * 5 * 
. % ' * * Ty 


* 


A other bas ciiönsz 211 dener, 


hat Nouns have to other Words ey 


refſed in En glifh, by Prepoſitions, fuck as 


; to, in, by, 405, at, &c one of the l 1 


9 4 . 


f 1 bien bog * a =P 


ale nor male. „„ Ee 


* 
* 
* 7 
4 2 
54 


* Alto the Nomrmee 750 aalen 2 ir TY 


Kee always the ſame in Nouns, y 
Mrally different in n 
ary to zam three Caſes. 


2 l, or ee or . 1 | 


_- N 


e G 


1 . 2 Py 
& 9 N * n 8 3 * 
7 1 9 12 * * 5 enn r 8 * . * 
* N r ** 8 R * F , a 4 
4 +» = HORN INS 4 e * * 448 . 
. 7 2 e oF Ws EA ITE of 5 - EI; 
ad 5 mY T%# J 4 7 
< 75 8 1 wy CE | 1 
* 0 . 8 5 202 Os 1 % 
«1 1 Ss 
_ F 8 


"Ris RvpneITy 


1133 ede are three Genders, | Maſe 
I Feminine, and Neuter. pol ph ES 
= hs The Maſculine denotes the. a ind ) 1] 
= "ThetFeminine denotes the 80 2 Hind M 
= a Won. ? 3 Th 
I) be Neuter dee Things chararey 
 __ ther Male, nor male; as a Stone. 
WW  - Neuter Noons are ſometimes «legal 
14 : = as Perſons, by the Poets and Ora 
2B Fe and are made either He's or She's; ah] 
| Of a Ship She rides at Anchor, -- 
—— r She's under Sail. 
Of the Sun—hHn his Eaſt the 4 
4 1 Lan war ſeen n. 
I A Of the Moon With full Face bortini 
S * Her Light from bim; for other Lizht d 
ij 7 name. | Milton. 
„When the Male and the Female har 
| very materia! Difference either in DA 
* Sixt, Shap -; or Colour, we have differ 
3 Names to expreſs the Gender; as Man, Wi 10 
ö man. Ram, Exe, | Buck, Do Fe 
KB Duck, Ms 
| When \hic Mal ad Female ate not call; 
= rn by their outward Appearance K. 
= - have a compound Word to e . 
1 Gender, as, "© | = 
. Goof, {a Peg Far, | a 2 Cock-S, ain 
= X: * oo zb. a B e a | Hen 76" 


Bo Ie 7M TA 
928 


4 ; fs. * 


me 7 

: \ 
* . © 
y 


| EnG1188: RUDIMENTS 5 
"me e are alſo diſtingn | 
their. Gender, 9” their Tan ; 


& . 2 


* — 6a 4 
* N * 7 N 


| Baroneſs | 
Lioneſs ee. 
Miſtreſs _ 
 Propheteſy = | 


erome 


* 


7 


o 


SE od 


Executri N IJ: | 


aa „ 


Arti cle. a. 


Enel zan 1Rvp 1 MENTS | 


2 5 4 Noun with the Article _ 
| + ul N Plural 


0 5 . the Prince, 5 22 - Mm the Print 


Gen. the Princes, . _ Gen. *the Prind 


of the Prince, 1 ef the. ru 
Accu. the Prince. 9 LK. che Pri 


3d. A Noun without an Article. 
Singular Plural 3 


r | | 

Non. MC: Nom. Men, 
f 4 ö . 7 4 i d. 1 
Sen. Man's of 1 Man. Gen. Men of Ma | 
1 Accus. Man. Y Accus. Men. 
SS. _ . 

At Is _ 


5 All Engli iſh Mens are declined_v i 
7 theſe Examples. Wn 


'PRONOUN | 
1 Keb is a Word uſed Ah 0 


. 8 WMoun, to avoid repeating the Noun i 
often; as when J am ſpeaking of . 
= to avoid repeating Ss own Name 12 1 1 


Ry 


; * Nouns ending in s in the Plural cortiil 
. An a Genitive in that Number, without 


| 1 Help of the Prepoſition of + 2s Kings" Fall 


z Prinses Appartments, Men's H appineſs. H N 


j . ever in this wore it . * o all | 


3 


. i 
P 5 7 1 
S 4 M4, * 
2 f 


. 
: n 5 
* — > o 73 * 4 
* I p 1 Ks 4 . 2+ 
: . „ 
4 EY 9. * * 
3 * 3 * . OL * 
* 2 3 1 * 
, . — 8 
: . y N 
# 


fncuine Rub nents | _ EY 
J: when I am f peaking of FE per 
o whom I addreſs Empel, inſtead of 
ling bis Name, I ſay fps And when 
rid ſpeaking of ſome other Perſon, or © ů 
o, inſtead of Heu "their Names,:: va -4 
He, She, or Th + 1 
ne Accidents of the P are Fer. 
Number. Fe and Genre. Fs 


— bc. * : 
-% 5 


TE 
ww 


P E R 8 0 N. e * i 
HERE are three Perſons expreſſed ws 
the Pronouns, J, Thou, He. I. the - 
Thou, the ſecond; He the third Perſon. 
he Firſt. 1 19 when the Perſon die 
Speaker is ſpeaking of himſelf; ; as, 7. 
a Book; I write a Leiter; 117 dy Bar 3 P 
he Second i is when you are peaking of Þ | 
er ſon with whom you are. coe 9 
hou readeſt a Book ; Thou Wielt a . — | 
Thon adieſt Bard. | £8 +, 7 
he Third is when you! ah ſpe tin 8 2 „ 
e other Perſon, or Thing. 1 1 8 17 - 3 vx 
; as He readeth; She woriteth ;_ It oe” | 
He a Man, bea Moman; 14 U.. 1 
Il Nouns, and Pronouns of: the third > Py 4 YH 
ſon, except: 1, Thou; * or Yo 04% - _ 


N. 
when 5g are feking ton Perſon, 
ame is of the N he BE 8 33 


Fa . 
- 
R 


N UMBER. | 


NUMBER. 


1 E Pronoun of each Peri 

I Number. I has the plural We, be 
= © "the Speakers may be many, Thou hi 
8 i Ye or You, becatiſe à Speech 
e ſpoken to many, as well as to o 

_ She, and It, have the plural 7 hey, ben 

the e or 1 17 of af 
N Sal 


* 
3 
7 "I 


E 0 'A 8 F. 


RON ov N 8 have Ft: l 


Nominative, che rok”. EY 
Live, like Ne ouns. c 


% 


ay; * 3 
*% s x 
| » 


"HE r and econd P- 17 5 

ra or 0 have 1 Gender 
| cauſe the Perſons ſpeaking, and thoſe 
are ſpoken to being in Company togel 
their Sex are eaſily known by their I 
or Manner. 
The third Perſon or 7 hing ſpoken i 
ng. Severely 5 ent, or Fe enti 


f ſh ; Fs 
SS 4 


0 [IS 
; a - 4 WH 
: 5 
A 4 1 # : 
4 | 
e 


*erfoi | 


Ve, be et 
bou ha 
2 
one. 

, beq 
of maj 


8 : 
DS. i 
1 - wh 
Y.,1 . 

* 


Sf...” 


"afes 
e 41 


ti 


* 
f "RX 4 6 
1 5 
Pu 3 * 
8 * 


"ag * 


wn, it is eee that © Pe 

a Diſtinction of Sex; accordifgly this oy 
oun hath three Genders... He the 
uline. She the Feminine. n the 
r, tho! other Adhectives in ae 
no Genders. at all. 19; „ 
Lramples for. aeclining Pronouns| * 


"ai ' Perſon. 3d 
Nom. II Py CN We: —_ 
6. Mine, of me, | f 36. Ours, of us, 
Accus. Me: | Z. ( 4. Us. RE 
ad. Perſon . . 
Mm. Thou CN. ve or You | 
G Thine of Thee | & - G Yoursof vou 
Ac. The. 4. Lou 1 
3d, Perſon Maſculine. , 
Nom. He, Nom. They,  _ 
6. His of Him G. Theirs of Them, | = 
. Him Ac. N | 7 -- 


Nom. She, #57 V. p Sis 8 "ot 5 2 ; 
> Gen, Hers: ot Ha. 1, G Theirs of chem. 1 


. Her Ac. N "=, 


2d Perſon Nuter. = A 
Nom. hs » FJ Nom. They, F 

1 Gen, Its of the * 3 Gen, Theirs of Them, 
Ac, It. 5 Accus. . * MN 5 


FT 


2 Fo 4 2 Pheſe' G Mine, Tbins ( 
= Tur, His, Hers, Its, and Theirg 
= uſed like Adjefives, and t the Noun thej 
long to is underſtood; as, whoſe By 
this? Mine, or my Book. 3 Hog 
this? Ours, or aur Houſe, Re. 
I, Thou, He, We, Te, You, 120 
. a Prenous Sub/antives, becauſe they ff 
ſent, or ſtand for the * of Peg 
5 * 885 Thin 7 7 9 | 
== „ Her; Our, Your, Their, 1 


1 e 4 00 1 An 1 4 Some, One, Non 
Pieonoun Ad Jjectives: The laſt \ ſeven, 
= called Beier, becauft they define 
| =” limit the Signification of the Noun toni 


. they belong. 

DOouec is fonteriuies iiſed indefinitely bd 
Ra Verb, much like the indefinite Artic 
= before 2 Noun; as, one A i. e. an 
| 1 5 fees. © = 
De, That, Other, have neither 0 
wr Aer nor Caſe, drt are declined 10 exp 
Wi A 58 Number. . 385 : 13 4 


This Sy "| | 150% f 
That. X TY Thoſe. 
F (Other e q 
W WE - Which laſt is only pluralmben us. 
| 5 5 | Bane 45 ufiderſtood, S308 * 


Fg 


ho, which, that, 2 are. © culled: 1 
auſe they relate to a Subſtantive. gating... 
n the ore, which an that Account is called ch 
ecedent: They belong: to all the three | 
rſons. 
Who, which, hat yu they "os a” 
leſtion are called Interrogattves. - 
Who and its > Ms e are. 
s declined. | Dr 0 N 
Sing 1 981 2% 8374 15 8 5 4 
Nom. be rss... 
Gen. Whoſe whon—fovers; 7 LIN = 
Acc. N Eee ae 
Nom. WW e - dE. _ Bi 
Gen. Whoſe—of whom—ſeene?s. 3 
Ac. Nandi en. e 1755 1 


5 


85 


SB. 


n 1 L r 


N eee a, 


* 


Which, and what, do not aler either in 
aſe, or Number. 3 
Own, which is properly. an Ade „ 
id /elf, which in the plugal makes ſelves, _ 
aturally join to the nr, my, thy, 
r, your, his, her, their: they 6 
mphaſis; as, my on Book; or Oppoſi. 
On; as, 'E Wrote. this way own Jef 7 and 


ot another Perſons, r 


F 


N and 7 aufe, wn now r Ener, 1 
Jͤqͤ 1 = 


mn. | 
RS. Fa? N32 


E 
* 


W - 7 Es... elfen Ropizxrs. $ a 

all 0 ke im properly uſed in the Nomi 
ie Caſe, for Higſelf and Theirſelves; 4 
Hs . they e did! it. 


S N - on 2 1 * « * a£; 2 * — * 0 
"oe & 2 1 ; NS F : * 
7 \ +1 4 7 1 4 — 
'' * 1 4 8 
14 5 5 
#7. pi y 1 I " 4, 
* 4%, 1 » * N. 3 
47's * . 4 +. IM 
1 . MW * "% K 
t 1 
: 5; 2A. E. 
| 11 ws. 


N Aa; ive i is the . has erh 
es the Quality or Sort of airy Perſi 
=” Jace, or Thing; as, good, great, hear) 
4 ” a good Man; a great Gays a heavy vtond 

The Adjedtive i known by, anſweril 


; £4 to the Queſtion, what Sort? HG Pol | 


. the Word Thing after it, as, 
22. What ſort of a Man, City, or 8 ton 
A. a good Man; a great City; a heal 

Sen; or a good Ti bing; a great Thing, 

| Beavy Thing. | f 
"Engliſh Adjectives neee neither Gend 

e nor Caſe. The only Accident 


: Chen they We of is 1 2. 


| Compariſon of Adjectives. | 


Compariſon i is the increaſing 97 fe 
8 Signification of the Adjective: Sol 
Adjectives whoſe Signification may be i 


3 8 or r ee, admit nn 15 
— There | 


Txerien RODIMENTS. | 


There are two Degrees of gene, | 
Comparative, and the Superlative. 
he Comparative increaſeth or lefleverh 
 Signification of the Adjectire toa great 
. ; as, long ane ſhort fog ters 75 
e wier. 3 | 
Adjectives ending with a Ginfonont form _ 
Comparative by adding er; aud ſuch as 
d with the Vowel e, by the Ade won of 
as, long, longer; wile os 
The Superlative iners Seth, or lelene 
Signification of the Adiective to the 
be. or loweſt 1 hn it will, admit of; 
long, longeft's: ort, e 1 wie, 
22 | "i fl 
The Superlative is formed fü che 4. 2 1 
ve by adding ef}, if it end with a Conſe» © 1 cf 
ant, or only ft, if it end in e; as. dene, 5 
weſÞ ; wile, wiſeſt. =. l 
Theſe Degrees of Comparis are 'oten 
rmed by the Adverbs more, or leſs in the 
Mmparative, and moſ?, uery, or leaſt in 
e Superlative; as, wiſe, more wiſe, mf 
r very wiſe; enten, . eee 
gf common. v1 


7 
> 1 
4 . > * 5 
* 


# Put i in hide Prafes as 2 * e 
borter than the ſboreft, the Comparative has a2 4 3 f 
dignification that exceedeth the Superlative. 9 5 
ea is an abbreviation contracted from a * 


22 rr — 
— — — 
— age 


* 
_—— 
«4 4449 

ne 352 ens 


—_ 5 


1 £8, FW 
* 14-8 
1 
n 


N 
+> 
* 58 RIS 
) : * 


l FEY % 
5 


; N . ; 
| 1 p Some have no 1 tive fates 7 1 
e . | » 


is 
2 
** 9 . N 
5 
g 3 . 44-2 


gt of one  Sjllable are "ok 

| compared DF: r, and et; as, long, lag 
1 e. 3 4 
" Adject wes of Fe or more Syllabler a 

| generally compared by more, and moſt ;1 
learned more learned, moſt learned, ple 
he more plentiful, moſt plentiful. 1 
But if they end in) or have the Acc 
he left Syllable ey eaſily form ui 


r 3 

k ; It 1 65 We. 5 4 a 
TS 

*Þ 1.4 IRR * 

y 44 "IS ES” 8 

TE Com ariſon B „ and E/ a8, ha N 
' r 

TY. . NY, : P. 5 3 „5 

1 icy K , * 


pier, happieſt; polite, politer, poll 
ec of three or more Sy]labl 
are always compared by more, or moſt. 
Some few Adſectives are n, 

; bach Compariſons ; US; goed, better,” b 
bad; worſe, e ; much, "Ye in uf 

Kl. leſs, lea 

me are irregular = "5p in tes Sup 
-A8; near, nearer, next. 


s 2 55 4 


And W which end in muſt. are uk 
only in the Superlative; a8, en 


eee, under moſt. utmoſt. 
Adjectives that can neither be f 


„ nor leſs, have ep Caper: 


% 

— v Rr y 
5 * 7 N 37 

UDIM urs „ 
Exer lin Ro DIME . „ö 
5 - 4 n & 99 

. „„ 
E + Me ee 4 
V R B. | 1 POD. . 8 
. . : E 6 y 7 7 oy 


e 


Fer is 2 x Word that bead, or 8 * 
ſomething of the Noun, whether Pere. 
Place, or Thing; as, King. GEORGE 
get h, London ee, Goodneſs err i 
tb, „ 
4 are 757 Kinds of Verbs; ; Aﬀtive, "oY 
Foe, and Nenter..” PS. 
Verb Active e e an 8 ua 
have ſomething to ſpeak of, which t 
d is called its Agent or Noyminative Y | 
> 36, John readeth. _ 
he Verb Active is alſo called Tranſits tive, | 
uſe the Action paſſeth on to another 
al, which is called the Object or Ae 
ve Caſe; as, ,F Fohn eters Books, 
erb Pa Wenke h expreſſeth Paſſion, or 9 
g; or ſpeaks of fomerbing that ĩs done 
nit; as, Books are read by John. 8 
berefore, when the Agent, or Noni. | 
— WE Cafe Jobn goeth before the Verb 
re Et, it is an Active Verb: But when the 
ect, or Accuſative Caſe Books takes the 
, are read is a Paſſive N... 55 . 9 
erb Neuter expreſſes the being, State, 9 1 f 
ondition ot a Perſon, Place, or 5 OR _— 
am; London flouriſheth; Marble faveats. = 
he Verb n, is 2 called Intrauſi- 
8 Hive. 8 9 


. 
4 


as, hn Rupnazxrs 
live, becauſe it doth not paſs on to ang 
Word, unleſs it be a Word nearly rel 
to the Verb; as, I live a T 
' Race ; 5 I walk a Mile. J 
Many Verbs have both : an- Mine 
Neuter Signification, which will bee 
determined by the Senſe, of the Sent 1 
Which they ſtand.” Þ 

The Accidents a the verb are Po 
5 1 2 8 Tenſe, and Mood. 6 


PRS ON and NUMBER. 


en hath three. Perſons, and 
* Numbers. an 
ER Verb i in the Singular Nuiber 
its ts Ending to agree with the Perſonall 
- nouns, [, Thou, He; as; 1 love, 
f He loveth, or loves; but in 


Wi 2 IF Plural, the Verb never alters its e 


e wich che Fe Pronow, | 


3; Ws. 1 5 . 
2. Ne, or . 35 . 
3. The 14 


TENS E or TIME. 


| ' ; TENSE: is the Time that the « 
4 8 in. TT Bp. 
; ſa 


EME än Rvpruzvrs hk Ta 1 
ne is divided into Paſt, Preſent, and 
re, or Time to come. 
ach of theſe Times is divided intel e. 
or Time finiſhed, and imperſect or Tr 
niſbed: Thus we Hare fix Times, or 

. 

WG he Preſent imperfect, the Preſent \ Per- 

; the Paſt or Preeter imperfect, the 
or Preeter perfect; the Future imper- I 2 
„and the Future perfect. | I 1 5 4 
The Preſent imperfett Tenſe ſpeakudy of —_ 
Time that is now doing but unfiniſhed"; = | I i 
Sign do; as I teach, Ido teach; or am 
h the Participle i in ing; as, I am dene 9 
1. e. | am teaching a Claſs, and — 1 
er 8c not finiſhed their Leſſons. ij 
be Preſent perfect Tenſe ſpeaketh t [ 
Time that is now done and finiſhed 3 5 if 
Sign have; as, I have taught: 7. Be "of AF i 
ave done teaching the Etaſs, © © os 4 1 
The Preter or paſt amperfect £ we | 
aketh of the Time paj When Tome- -* .- 
ng was begun” bur nat 2 5 28 1 8 
E: 8 ien lb 
„ 5 „ 


his Tenſelikewif e agniltes waar! is 0 ang? = 
= 7 mary to be done; as, I was teaching implies 4 I iq 
1c "Mat it was an e 1 Was nes 9 
aged! Hh. 2 a 


—— '3 
7 Kd 5 -& - 
» 4, 
* „ 

8 2 . * 


— 


© us Evel eee 9 
Sign ao; as, I taught or did reach} 
0 with the Participle in ing; as, I. 


1 teaching: i. e. I was teaching a Claſs 
q 


Time ſince, but did not then finiſh. 
The Preter or paſt perfect Tenſe i 
£ eth of the Time paſt, when that Which 
then been doing, was compleated anda 
ed; ; It's Sign. Had; as, I had taught: 
I finiſhed teaching the Claſs, wh ich 
ng their Leſſons, ſometime ſince. 
The Fature Imperſect Tenſe ſpeakeh 
dhe Time to come, when a thing is to be 
ing; but not then to be finiſhed; its 
Hall, or will ; as, I ſhall or wil teu 
1. e 1 ſhall or will be teaching, ſome I. 
Hereaſter, but ſhall not then finiſh 17 j 
 Aineſs, cM 
The Future Perſedt Tenſe ſpeaketh | 
Time to come, when a thing is comphid 
Aud finiſhed ; it's Sign ſhall have; 1 
all have taught: i. e. I ſhall have d 
teaching the Claſs, that will ſay their ll 
ſons Tomorrow, or at any Future Tine: 
| NorTE.*+ There are Two Tenſes or Ti 
| expreſſed by the Verb itſelf, without! 
- aſſiſtance of any belping Verb; (viz) 
ee as, I love: The Pro 


iiber 73 as laued. | 
3 Nec 5.5 RL, 1100 


* RS N " * 
, 4 4 
« J 
MY | | fl 
” * C 


Ber ISH aebi kurs 


| 00D is hs Manner that the verb 
| ſpeaks ie. ©; 

here are Five Moods Which include all 

diferent Manners, in which the Verb 
expreſs itſelf. 


The Indicative, the Imperative, 15 de 


7 tive Mood. 


The Indicative Mood fraply Arten wh 
rms a Thing; as, I love: or elſe aſk- 
a Queſtion ; as, loveſt thou? fs 4 
u love? 


doing a Thing; its Signs are the 2 
Verbæ, may, muſt, might, can, could, 


, could, would, or Joould love. 


has Dependence upon 


; EE 


— 


4 s n G ö 
8 8 5 3 


2 


nt 
n 
* — 13 — 
- 


ential, the Suyunctive, and ther Jon: ; 8 E 


he Inperative 1 Mood biddeth, forbiddeth ; | 
mandeth, ' permitteth, or requireth a2 
Ing to be done; as, love thou * ws ne, TE 
n, us, or them love. /.r - 4; _ 


he Potential Mood expreſſes the Pork by 
fulty, Liberty, Fitneſs, or Propriety ©» 


11d, Suonla,; as, I may, mult, . 27 


The Subjun@ioe Mead i by 19 to, 
nother Mood, 


Lis mentioned Oe as. a 5 Wks 2 


9 : . a 5 * e e R 4 5 28 e 1 R r read! | 
F „ M ¶% fwd nts atone ] “ i.. !? ꝛꝛÄ or a 5 4% ths * %%% ˙ 1» 
» ” . - ” \ : 4 Ws”; 92 . 35 8 1 9 5 * e * *. by 
- * th Tr ONES Km * # R 8 A „ N A e , 
FI 2 5 0 * * 7 5 95 4 * k AF. 4; 8 E 7 * . 
* * %z . 1 s 
5 5 
* . 
{3.4 323 
# 1 8 
* 


F 0 — * * * 
CAP SE 8; 8 1 F 


* 
2 

4 

2 i 
P 

** c 4 k 
* FS: 7 


_ , — „WWW „ W ann ET EI * 
* 4 44s . 4 Fe e 8 [4 r 1 SR 9 * % i” % s - s. ** n 4 
* 85 5 r R N 9 
5 


30 Ererns Ron tenz. 5 
Y that my or may not happen; it has ah 
2uConjunction before it; as, i 14 0 
* 4 thou love. a HH : 
Ihe Infinitive Mord ape the > 75 
3 nification of the Verb without any Lin, ar 
tion of Number or Fe z its . 10; Lang 
i 26 love. 805 = | 
me Preſent ie . endein 
and may be joined to a Noun as its 2 
; as, loving, a loving Friend. 
There are three Moods ex preſſed byi 
verb itſelf : The Indicative, the Inn 
Five, and the Inſinitive; as, T7 lere, . 


OS. to love. 


HELPING VERBS. 


> 

Py 

* ; 4 
X's 

: 


1 E Helpin 20 Verbs are do, kn ſon 
Shall, or well Mey may, muſt, U 
"hep or am- 


Do, "Fave, Gall or will, with 0 
en expreſs the different Perſons 
Nimes of the Active Verb, in the Indiuat 


. Mood. | 
= May, can, ſhould, and en, with Vi. ha 
Variations are uſed in the Potential u 

but muſt admits of no Variation. : 
$ Am with its Variations, and the Al Lon 
ance of the other Helping Ven 1 — 
em 


* 


Exer sn Rup1MgNTS 
or will, may, muſt, can, nds 3 
d and would, expreſs. the different 
ng and Times of the Paſfroe Verb. _ 
ie elding Verbs declined, only fo far. as 
Fare uſed to expreſs the different Per- 
and Times of their Principal Verbs. 


0. 


Indicative n ; 
4 reſent emper fect lt E K 
Singular. 
5 1 Tu INN 
on. . *Thou doſt, or You a ce. 
2 ; He doth, or dos. 1 855 

| 5 | Plural. by EO, 
. 

Jon. C 2. Ye or You, 
) 3: IEF © il 


Paſt imperfedt Tenſe. Ve 

Singular. * 1 f he 1 XAT. a — 
. Thou tial, or Tor Ia, = 1 
3. He did. = 104 Ty Fl f 


\ . * _ 2 

4 1 : : by 
3 

— — C 

q * 

— bw 


we 
* 4 


* * = 

* the Pra. Thou is diſuſed almoſlgener-/ _- 
| now and inſtead of Thou de, 7 „ 
thy mu do; You 128 . but * 
more Loa —_— 


-- 


** 


” 


SHALL o or - WILL. + F £5 55 


* > : ? * 


Future : impe fect 7 enſe. be” 


= 4 2 bs, . — 


6 ; Singula 


1. I ſhall, = SEL 
2. Thou ſhalt, or wi = 2 
3. He ſhall, or will. r 


* * 


3 yp Find. „ 


@ © 
. 


Future Perfect Tenſe. r 
Singular. £17 oy 2 8 8 


. 1. I hall, er will ..- 4.8 
; 2. Thou ſhalt, or wilt : 


vo 3. He ſhalt or will 2 Fo En 


. a % - 
* a » 
, IF x FL TS 4% 8 e 
CEO oe 4 $30.58 RN 8 n $5, 0 \ Ae: ks 
” 


it "A . Wo". 


Tus 


2. Thon LG or beau, 
+ He may, or can. 


Plural. 
us We 5 


as the Imperitive Mopd includeth l. 
I and We as well as rand; it ſeem 
cllavy to admit a firſt Perſon | in ow Nun 


1 


Poſt imperfedt Tea... 
TI. os He 5 i ] A Foes pt A $4 3 5 Y 

f Singular. K. by * Si FN er $4 ** Fr "= 

8 Ky . . , ö Ei. 22 54% > 

z. Thou might, or couldſt, 
5 . 2 * ; : ; - _ KF} 3 8 1 
3. He might, or coul. 


4 
F * 


9 


. Wwe 
2. T T might, or coul. 


' . #SHOULD or LIP). 

Singe ß, 
1. I ſhould, or would. + 
2. Thou ſhouldſt, or wouldſ "+ 8 
Frl. 


n 


8 * 8 & 
$54 _ n E $4 £ 11 © 1 
N ee e eee eee 


% 


1. We 
. 1 
3. They 


4 = as; 24 
1 1 3 - - m—_— 
4 4 "oy a ; ; 2 5 
4 4 y Ws | % WS, 2 F 
1 L * 4 gre . Xx 
* * * * £5 x b * 725 84 | 
1 — * 6. if 
4 * + % £ „ ůů IR 
4 * * 7 # a uf $9 K —— * 8 


* 8 * 
Fg . — AA 
4 L 


F * * 85 f + A. 3.8 55 . . + RES : 
; | 4 8 - 
ſhould, or would. 
5 7 * = £ „ 
3 7 Fl T5 - Z 1 15 * x" * * * 4 "3 
Pe j 4 1 2 Ex * * 
— * 854 
4 


* 
Lo 


* 
ig —— ů * — 


* Sid 
Po 


ould and Fould are Variations from” t 
ing Verbs /ball and will which belong to the * 
e imperfeF Tenſe Indicative, | Should t 
din this imperfect Potential expreſs. the Fus - 
Time unfiniſhed, and ſupply the Place of the ol 
r imperfet Tenſe which the Potential want” 


8 . $ . , 5 : 8 5 * 


— * 2 , 
he q FLOP a 


my x 


33 


* . 7 1 F * F * » 2 9 I 


IAA. Py Nn * "cc — 
Fd. n r * um 1 * 
„ : W r * * NF 6 _ = 
ns RRR FS EEE 9 N * N 
ns die) 11 1 Es, 9 . g 
Fx * a 7 . | . 2 8 I 8 * 2 , 2 1 — : 1 — IF 
5 — e SS wie Men * ; $1 & — 


1 . . 3 


15 
a 
* 


© - Ni 2 


5 DN two o Helping verb 
HAVE, and TO BE, are formed thig 
all their Perſons, Moods and Ta 


with the Aſſiſtance. of the other # Hy 
5 >» | | Verbs. . RF: hs 18 


” TO Hark. . 
Indicative Mood. 
1 Preſent imperfed# Tenſe, 


1 Singular. 
e, 
2. Thou haſt, or youl 
3. He hath, or has. + 
, © "bra: 
F hg DIE be 
. 75 have. 4 
3. Tü. 35 | 


== = Preſent priſe Tenſe, 
 — g I. I have had, "oe 3 
_— 2. Thou haſt bat ons 
6's Be hath; - or bas had. * 

. * When a "Hap " Verb! 18 Fa 145 
e the Helping Verb undergoes all 00 
© riations of, Seren ed Nukes.” and the 

* 8 continues -unchanged: But when to or! 
AM # 8 5 Help ping Verbs are joinéd to the Princip 
che e Verb dep: ages} V why 


7 


Plural. 4 


131 
\ 
4 


Paſt i = 
„ Singe: 
1. I had, e 30 | lol Fa" 


B+ 


2. Thou hadſt, or you had, -2 
Wim 
: „ Plural Len 

5 1. We ** ＋ 


. Ye: , hade, 
3. They r 


Faſt perfeet Tenſe. 


1. 


4 Singular. * 55 5 5 
| 1. Thad had, e 
2. Thou hadſt h d, 71 . 
He had had. e e 
| Plural. e 


2 Ye T had bad. e 


Sa imperfect . IS 
2 Singular. e 
1. I ſhall, or Will Ray,, 
2. Thou ſhalr, or wilt have, . 
3. He ſhall, or will have. 1 2 5 


1 ; 5 N * 25 es 6 25 


* 
8 
n 


As 
* 
— 
* 


ns 
* 


— 


nf a . 
— — —— — 


2 


of will Gave had, 
1 ; Or willt hayc had | 


7 
— u 


5 — 


—— — — H 
” as 


— 


Phan or will have bad. 


1 


— 
—— 


L 
r 


1 
| 


Singular. 5 
1 me have 
2 Have thou, 
2 5 Let him have. 
Plural- 
' 1 Let us have, 
2 Have ye, | 
2 Let them Cave. 


Potential Mood © 
Preſent inperfect Tenſe 
E : =. Sing. 
. . 1 may or can have, 
2. Thou mayſt or canſt have 
; . He may or can have. 


* 


r 


3 98 


1 


ax oth. l ; af : 
EAT nh, * * 
* — 
* 2 * 2 8 


U 


a : ;  * 9 ; RS 7 
BE. Singular „ 
, S 8 2 


1 1 may have ha. 
2 Thou eee had, 


— 


: l 
7 53 
. BY 
- 
* _- 


ct 


e » 

* * 
r 3 3 * 
FS txt.” £54 
7 * - * 


i 


Singular. 


[ might, could, wa 
Thou mightſt, ; 

| ſhouldſt have, 

? 2 might, could, 


2. 1 > 


+ They F- OT > 


41 might, cob would or mould a 
i Rs had, „ 

2 Thou mightſt, couldſt, wouldf 

. ___ - ſthouldſt have had, 

3 He mitht; could, would or ſhould If 

Ihe 3h \ 9 had, Is 17 | 15 #386 


| Eura! 


K « . 
* 
r * 
1 


wie coul 


298 P 


* = f = 
4 


Singular | 


| 5 1 ſhall have had, 
: 1K, Thou ſhalt have had, 
i He ſhall have had, 


* 5 


r —— 


— 
— eos 


Plural 


7 * 


ſhall have had. 


7 * . 7 2 ” 4 x > "hg 
ENGLISH 
NU TSR 


1 Subjunttive Mood with: IF. ä 


* 


Preſent imperfe@ Tenſe” - 1 2 8 Þ 7 
Singular. . * „ 
* 11 have, ee th X47 : FL, 


. . he, 
þ? 5 % % 4 of 


2. If thou have, „ 
Jo If he have. 3 | 3; 


1. If we | „ e : 
2* If ye or you | have. ic 


* 


3. If they ä 


* 
- 
—— — 


1h 


—=. 


Paſt imperfect Ten 3 


Singula 


1. If I might have, _ 


2. 17 thou, mg hae, \. 
3 If he might ha ye. 


4 | 1 # — 7 ; F 4 io 4 1 7 1 
Plural. „ 
EEE 
4 


* . 


1. If we 


2. If ye "might b Hane 1 5 = RET 


VO I I —ͤ — ; 


3. If they 


5 — 3 * 1 193 


\nd thus through. the ſerecpl 
Potential ad. PEER 21897 


n 


. 
»4 
"LE . 
— 
* 4A * 


3 


— 


— 
12 
4 


$5 Ie 


( Paſt perfect Tenſe. 
1 To have had, 1 


ö Future imperfect Tenſe. 
75 About 0 have 


Hare perfect Tenſe. 
About to have bal: 


| Participle. | 

| Preſent. 

„ Having. 
Paſt Porfett „ 


. _— 
2 » 99 5 n 4 
Y 1 * % * {% % 5 
N „ * — 
1 $ = 5 — | 
. 4 A * ; : 
4 8 Ss. : , 4 
" F . J 5 L A "y a 
- 4 * * * 
" 7 — 5 £8 5 1 P ; 
. ? $3 ; % p : 
. - * 1 - # 
a 4 * , - i f 
A Ls 7 * ” 
, +} ö p * 1 . 2 | ? 
, * x 3 >. s 4 » A 5 
* * ” F — 
8 * 


— 


by 
N 
N = * 4 = I _ — — = = - - + _ _= 
— = —_ — 2 peck . — — — — — = — on - 
ces rn ors + ene es ares eb —_— — — 3 - ——— — —— — 1 — — — r 2 , - — 2 — 
ä Se 4 ww 2 Sus — 2 en a * LP Fa — — ——— — — — 2 — — — = == vx —— r — 2 — — 2 — 2 — 
* — ” — of —- _ * * — — 2 — -2 ms 2 Jn - be 0 * — — — — — — — — WS — — * — —_— Pry 
- cons. onthe OO In tn - — = 2 = 2 — = —_ — — . —ů = — 2. nn em —_ 2 2 — — = = - => 3 
l « == 9 — —ͤ : - - OE INS WY; _ 7 $I - — 8 —— == * 
*. —2 - r - A + - — 4 r —— 85 -_ _ — — — — —— — , - : . — 8 — — ys 

: RA N , 2 Y —b g * * 44 ka NN EN wg _ q - n g 1 K-47 , by « 7 0 * a 

. 2 . r ö A * os * 2322 FO. 8 4 N N 8 . 3 2 . * r n - 5 
— » N 4 * — 4 * 4 * \ a - % * 

* , 1 - * 0 * es 0 ou 4 EIA 1 : - : 

« „ RR; on & 32 1 4 0 LY 8 J o * *2 ; 

4 x 1 > * * . o * 9 

8 he} . * 7 *. - " 
+. : * 0 * 5 £ 4 9 
- 13 1 8 Tat; 
7 


"= 2 his P aft pe effect Participle, with N 
ing before it, forms the Paſt pe ed Tenſes,ul 
= 5 to be be ore it makes the erb Paffpes 
1 Taue loved: " o be ues, ;. 


n 


1 


* 1 2 ** 5 My 4 * 26 Lt * 2 
2 JED 27 T TY *; RY 220 25 f 2 9 
+ * 4 * — Wo * * 4 a ; — 
4 7 % * £ * 4 P 7 — 0 as „ 
4 ' [4 * 
- % 2 : — 
* — 2 ( 2 


* 


U i . 


Nellen RUDIMENTS = WY I 


4 * 


Preſent imperfect Tenſe e. 


Singular. LL SRIFD 


£5 N N » — th 


2. Thou art, or you a are, : 


Plurl SPP 
1 We 5 
2 Ye, or you, 
3 They 


Preſent perfet Tenſe. ; 8 TY 8 1 


are. 


— — — 
1\ 
* 
% 
= I 


Singular. „ 5 __ 


1. I have beeng r 


2. Thou haſt beet, . 
3. He hath, beet) L 
” Plural. 1a © x £2 
1. "We 57 _ 


nk Saks: * 


ect Tenſe 3 


7 


Paſt i imper 


! 


| Singular. iy 
1. I was, _ Ne > {mh 
3. He was, „ 62 


; XY Dy LS: 
F s * 5 5 "4 + 
| 8 8 : : 
: 2a 8 1 þ 
is ; 25 1 Fi . As 


 Indlitative Mood, . „„ I 


3. nen. 8 0 1 


3. Ib = x - "oY 


— 
" 


4 Tenſe.” 


A 


* 


"Sin gular. 


TT cal, elbo,. *cl 
AY Thou ſhalt, or willt be, 
3. He ſhall or will be. 


o x 
* 


Ca” 
. . 


1 I ſhall have been, 


2 Thou ſhalt have been, 
He ſhall have been. 


— T7 * 
_—_— 


LI 


- 
3 


4 


7 © ; 


1 
8 


Inperative 


we 


— 


Singular. 

1. Let me be, 
2. Be thou, 
3. Let him be, 


* 
1 1 
. » © 


-. Pl 
1. Let us be, 


* * 


Potential Moo. 
Preſent imperfect 


7 
1 


C 
1. I may, Or can be, 995 . 
2. Thou mayſt, or canſt be, 
He may, or can be. 


+6 


* 


— * 
FW. 


— C2 6.0 p 


th 


* 


„ 


. bh: 
| 1 ay 


vert 161 Kup: re 

5 e 4 | Plural. | * 
* 4 We 5 | 
„ fe may, 0 or can be 
3. They 1 


1 


Pireſent perfet | Tenſe. 
Singular. 


SW: I may, or.can have been, 
2. Thou mayſt, or canſt have bee 
3. He may, or can have . | 


| Plural. 
1. We Nah, 
a: Ye. a or can haveh 
3 TOY | e 


U 


5 # 
„ 


Paſt imperfed? Tenſe... 
Singular. 7 C 
iat! could, would, or ſhould be. 


5 4 iy abu mighrſt, could, woulſt or ſhou 


35 He IgG cou well ot c ſhook, 


Plural | 
I We might, could; ol 
2 Ye . 
il They: i 4 bod be. 
nf 


25 n at 3 4 18 4 4 2 * e 7 * * 
9 2 8 * ann . ͤT—J2ñ;ʃ.Frñ—˙—ä 2 i CG e 
OY ts > ts * e ea TE IG Fs * * N 2 7 * $5 IF 
n r n 14 3 
> Lo N 55 { Ks. 
„ "ab \ 
i hal” 4, 
4731 


ENGLISH, RupN . e 


Paſt perſect Tenſe 


Singuiar | SD 0 

ght, could, would e bees. iS 0 

ou mightſt, couldſt, wouldſt, oz _ 

ſnouldſt have been "Y 

en could, would or 5 5 77 have 
been. 1 

| FHN 7 EMIT . 

Soy | might, could, would, — 

They | ſhould have 9 5 


Future Perfect Tenſe. "Wn 
Singular. —A 

1. I ſhall have been, | 
2. Thou ſhalt have been, 
z. He ſhall have been. dn 
i, We 
KL Te --- 5 mall have been. 9 
3. They 


dubjunctive Mood with. 1 F. 85 „ 
Preſent. imperfect 7 1 
„Singular. . . 11 2 Be ; 
2, If thou bet © ond 
3 If he be. 9 Vl 


be 


* 


e 


— 


1 4 
11 » 
3 


, aA 
* Y R _ *** 8 
— 


thou beef hey Vie Otow fallen! ee, 


e 12774 aa 
| »; If Marg, 
2. If thou wert, 
3. If he were. 
| Plural. 


— 22 
> 


27 If we 
2. HFye were, 
— they 1. 
5 43 Ada thus rhro* the ſeveral Tenſe 2. 
dhe Potential Mood. 
IX... Inſi nitive M 2 0 Di 


Preſent Tenſe. 
. To be. 


Paſt perſect. 
To _ been. 


— Ava: 
© 22 
— — 


2 r 
— — 


—.— 


— 


— —— 


— 


7 = 8 
— —— 
5 * — — — 


» - 
A for 


| . perfeft. 
To be about to have | been. 


Participle. Ws 1 0 
. "Profit, * . 


* 


1 Active Feb 
Moods, and Tenſes. ai? 


1 


Singular. 


1. Llove, or do loye, 8 FH 
2. Thou loveſt, or doſt love, 1 
3: He loveth, -loves, or doth loye. FEA.” 


* 


* 


* 


fd 


plural. 


8 49 ww + 


2. Ye 


x 
| * 


— 8 * 7 - 
e 


n 


r 


1. Ihave loved; : 
2. W ae 


8 9's 


K 


39 
art 


25 » 


þ 4 22 

2 al, 1, : g 
2. 2, a 

r * 


— 


. 
KA 
18 
5 


1250 


. Ex6L18 b 
| Paſt imperfet? Tenſe. 


Singular. 


EE loved, or did love, 
2. Thou lovedſt, or didſt thee 
3» He loved, or "did rs 
„ Feral 8 

. We 15 85 
2. Ye loved « or did 4 low 
They Se EV 


Fee poret. 

| _ + Sipgular. 

= . I had loved, 

2. Thou hadſt loved. l 

—_ TR 1 
283. Ye had loved. 

3: They i 


0 
” 


4 


I, 
2, 


Future gelte. 
. Singular. 1 


1. 1 mall, or will Ice . : 
2. Thou ſhalt, or wilt te” * 
3. He ſhall, or will 1888 1 Phe 


——— > rw RI N 
—— —•— —_—— ES — — 
© IG Inns 2 os 7 EEC 8 
64 — * ä 
ee : — — 


1 


2 


— 
2 
——— H — 
— 8 
—— — 
— — : 
_ — 


* 


15 * . 
£ * « : 
3 1 
5 8 0 * 
88 * 5 
, . 
: . 


—— 


Plural 
. WWW + 


z. They 


Flure Tela. 
Singular. 


by, 1 ſhall have loved, 


z. He ſhall have loved, 
LY "oy 
1. We © 


3 They | 


Singular. 


1. Let me love, 

2. Love thou 

3. Let him love. 
Plural. 

1: Let us love, 

2. Love ye, 


3. Let them love. 
H 2 


1 * Ay of Iam EA . N +; der * re * m " * % 
* * 9 5 4 + n 3 9 * 9 N W F 3 9 4 
F 3% VB #67 4 þ * + of 4 5 2 * 
** 4 RY. 0 
> Fs SI 2 i » $ ? 7 > 
SA SES. : F * 4 


Tuer 8H nupkurvre 
. 1e watt WON love. 
2. Thou ſhalt have loved, 


„ | tall have loved, 


nan Mood. 


” * . 
” 1 y 4 

4 9 6 
5 "= - 


— 


* 2 2 1 * - * 

» " 4 a « : 

1 a W 2 8 

. q * N „ 

* 

7 £ 14 

. 1 : 

, 1 & >: 
WERE. 


„ - Tu@iain Rename 
| Potential Mood 
Prei imperfect Te 2 


Singular. 

1. I may, or can love, 
2. Thou mayſt, or cankt love, 
2. He may, or can 575 

„ Plural. 

We 
Ye. Jo aan eren! on 
They | 


Preſent perfect Tenſe. 


| Singular. ”— 
1. I may, or can have loved, 
2. Thou mayſt, or canſt have lord 
He Ws or FAD haye loved, | 
lural. 


. 


= „ eme OF cay haj * 


Paſt imperfect 7, eſe. 

= Singular. 
. 18 could, would, or ſhould lor 
2. Thou mightſt, couldſt, wouldſt, 
| ſhouldſt Dre: 

8. He might, 1 would, or Thouldl 


Ful 


lone 


Plval. >." 
1 We - 
2 Ye 


] They 


F 2 Gould wo 
Paſt wund 2 


Singular 

night, _ would or ſuiould have loved 
hou mightſt, couldſt, wouldit, or 
ſhouldſt have loved, 


a 


; They 4 Wauld have loved. 


imperfect. 


" o 


Singular. 


might, could, would or ſhould ove 
Thou mighſt, couldſt, wouldſt, 
holt los, „ Te 


Plural. | 
1. We 13 might, could, would | 


2. Ye | 
3. They mould lore.” . 


— 1 2 , $ 4 85 2 6 
X 5 1 
A 7 4 g Ny, rl, Io 
1 Mey 1 e : 2 - * 
' 4 7 * 
5 — a b 1 : n a * 2 L 


PF auc could, would, | 


* could, would or ſhould have 


loved. , 
| Plural 
+ 5 6 might, could, would, or 


ure imperfect Tenſe the lame: a8 Paſt 


: 15 r A 158 HY 
4 A 1 8 
7 ; . Es 2 ; 8 1 % * : « . 
i, os „ 2 | 
14 AS TY rer 32 
NGL Nun: : 33 


He might, could, would or + thauld love. 5 


'# 


e R 


54 Exel ren RuptmenTs 


5 Future perfect Tenſe. : 
_ Singular. 


1. ſhall have W. | 
2. Thou ſhalt have loved, 
He ſhall have loved. 


Plural. 


+ ſhall. have lon | 


| Subjunctive Mood with I F. | 
Preſent imperfect Tenſe 
Singular. | 


Wi love, 
2. If thou love, 
3 = he love. 


Plural. 
1. HU 
2. If 7e lo. 


neren RuptuexTs 
Paſt inperfict Tenſe. 
Singular. 


1. If I did love, 

2, If thou did love, 

2. If he did love. 
Plural. 

1. If we 


2. If ye FT: did an 


oe . If 3 


Potential Moor. 


— MROd-.. | 
Preſent Tenſe. XX OD 
- 9 "ues E +1 02 1 


To have loved. 


Poſt ,, ae, 


K — — 4 
rt SY 


Future imperfett 1 
To be about to love. 


[aches 
* þ f 


% Yang 


. Future bene. 


\nd thus thro' the fereral Tenſes of 


To be about to have loved. Tar. 


"Hwa nn W 
Fartitiple. Pe, 
| Preſent imperfed. 
Lo ring. 
Fa felid. 
| Having loyed. 


WE OBSERVATIONS. 
'R A | HERE are three Ways of exprel 


Eg the Preſent and Paſt e 
e of Active Verbs. 


t. By the Verb it ſelf ; as 1 Pay: In 


AF 20 2. By the Helping verbs do, and d 
. Neg I do love; I did love. 


3. By the Helping Verbs am and u 
2 T am loving 3 3 T was loving. 


Note, Am with its Variations, and | 


. . Participle | in ing exprefs any” Tenſe of 
nn Adtive Verb. 


The Helping Verbs d aud did arc j 


8 al to their Poines pal: Verbs; to point | 
the Action, or the Time of the Action, 3 
+3 greater Force and Diſtinction + 661 do d . 


i NT 1 15 not And 247 


/ 


= 5 „* I 
* — : 4 
5 g „ 
. ; { 6 
x 
7 
* © 
4 


** Go md 
0 „ f % 
| e 99 ; 
\ 


Y 


0 Eucrisk Abpnrrw rü. ; 


and did are particularly uſeful in Sen- 
s, when a Qeſtion is aſked, or a Thing : 
ed; as, do you deny that? did you not 
hat ] do deny that. I did not fay any 
Thing. Do 220 did are uſed for any 
to ſave the Repetition of it; as, I do 
that, and fo do J; i. e. deny that. I did 
ay any ſuch Ting, neither did I, 
ſay any ſuch Thing. : 1 6 
oft of the Helping Verbs may be uf TY 2 4 3 
18 Manner, but not with equal Pro- | 1 4 

fl, | 
® and had form the preſent perfes 1 
= paſt perfect T enſes; ; AS, 7 have = 4 | 


bal and will, and Gall and ie 8 
n the future imperfect and future per- 2, Wh 
Tenſes, as I Hall or will love; r. 10 2 1115 
ill have loved. _— 
Vall in the firſt Perfon end foretelſß =, 
he ſecond and third, promiſes,” com- nll 
dds, or threatens ; = uit; F 85 go, 7 hou 4: 
2 ſhall a 
Will in the firſt Perſon promiſes; or. _=— 
atens ; in the Fen and third, only .. 
tells; as, I will go; We will go; Thou _— oy 
He will go: But a Queſtion be aſk® "3 ha 
the contrary to this generally takes 
ce, I N Z 
ILILet _—_— 


Wer A LY 140 * 1 - 2 Je 3 W . . * my 
4 - TY; * + 1 1 3 7. z A Wes 4 . 8 * * & * . 
. - 3 Fa < a . 2 Mews C7 4x 8 1 Fs — * 
* q a > 2 . 9 N 6 OE „ , 
5 F . I 4 1 > "6's 8 : We = 3 5 * of 
Z 4 . 1 1 £ 
. * * 


; 1 d ere N 


Lot. which has no pa i 
; ee expreſſes Permiſſiog, Pray 
exhorting, and cOMMANURY, þ; 0% . | 
go 3 go thou. 4 1 
May and nig bt, in the preſent and} 
imperfect Potential, expreſs the Poſtli 
and Liberty of doing a e 5 LY 
e; i might go. 3 
Mu, which admits of no Varia 
„being of all. Perſons, expreſſes Neceli b 
7 3 1 muſt g We muſt go. 
3 2 Can and: could expreſs. the abi 
. "the & Power of. doing, a. Thing; Tr 8870 
WAY F could, an. F 
Van is uſed of the Perfon Si the Wi 
Active, where may. is uſed. of, the I 
with the Verb Paſſive; 5 28, I ban di | 
1 it may be done. But in Poetry they, 
BY frequently uſed for each, other. 
S bould and would imply Enturitp i 
1 the former likewiſe expreſſes Duty, 4 
me latter, Deſire; a8, 1 fhould 4 
bat Kindneſs, i. e. it is my Duty. I 
1 dm that Rindneſs:1.-e. 25 18 7 D 
Jug bt ſignifies and expreſſes Obige 
1 And uty, and is only uſed before 
1 1 nfinitive Mood; as 1 ought to learn. 


„he Infinitive, Mood is expreſſed by Wrici 
5 reren to Velos W Yer: ; 55 | =p 


Frets Rob ENTE 


lor betbre the Helping verb and. 1 
& as: hs to ou. loved. * 2 3 


; OP; 32 
294 15 ; * Te * 2 „ w. 0 


Paſſo 5k is 75 Ke . Vers: ns. 
„through all its: Variations, . RY 
g perfect Participle; as, I am boved; 135 =: 
p loved; 1 have Bell loved. : 2 8 


5 _— 
A Paſſive Verb formed ibrough all i its TP 1 
ons Mode, and Tenſes. W 


Indicative Mood. | 2 
Preſent imperfect 7 Tenſes 2 E OR 
Singular. e * > + 
; + ar loved, | ; | N 5 | 3 Ba 8 5 "= | 
2 Thou art loved, r 
3 1. Lo be "PRE 8 


Mor * 


ran 


© -_ ” 
I 
5 


1 mA >Y 


1 4 . 
( ' 4 £ 2 
* Is *.. — — 2 
Li Cc 2 2 . * 
* - = — 
. s $ r 8 > 8 - 8 al —_ A 
- — * => - <> + k w * — 2 * — 
at” E — — 2 
1 — r n r 8 . 28 Hs FEM 
3 pats.” . e >& 5; . — CIO 3 = of 
Ha i 2 3 
MTU Tor e Ji? » 
=_ Li * = a FT E 4 Ms 
7 * . jt Lt _ 67) N63 ef: £3 Go = 


— 


Ls 
= : — 
hr — ̃ — 1 
5 , 


1 0 „ p 
E 3 . 
_ 2 r 


he Preſent Participle is Doned _ addi 18 oY 43 
to the Verb; as, teach, teaching : But it 

tb end in e the e is omiunitri: as love, bog by 
Verbs of one Syllable, or if of more than 4 
c, accented on the laſt, ending with a ſingle» 
mſonant, and having a ſingle Vowel before * S 
m, double their Conſonant in the preſent +908 
ticiple, and in every other Variation, in = 5 A Bl: 
37 2 8yllable is added; agg*/it, Hitting 7 . Hes 
ö bs for g ” . forgetting, ; Ter 


"aſl 


A Q 8 2 * FS 2 — A 
n = N * 9 un ir W Y * boy 
a r PCI RYAN HT IT CO 1 : S 
* * p : 1 7 . \ * 


bs 
2 
5 
CY 
7 


60%  Enoziom RoDIMENTS | 
1% Sal 75 


- Singular. 


* 
x 


1. L have been loved, 
"19 Thou haſt been W 


wo 0 


3. He hath, or has been loved. 
Plural. 


42. Ye "om been loved; 


4 FA 
[ 


Poſt imperfect Tenſe. 


8 2 Singular. 


16 


Fu F * 


gy 1. I was loved, 
2 2 2. Thou waſt lored, 


— 7 


4 
* 


[ - 3. He was loved. 


* 


3 r X * 4 * 


Ex&t15h:RvUDiMEnTs 
Paſt perfect Tenſe oo” 
Singular. „„ 


1. J bad been loved, * 
2. Thou hadſt been loved, 


Plural 


1: We 8 | 
2, Ye bad been lorad '. $9 
3. They | ; e 81 


—_— 


3 1 * 52 - 9 

5 A 8 

. — — I I org — 3 
ME L.A DRE OY — - 


— 
2 20 
2 
3 * 


1 9 2 


Ov: Rp IF IE oe egy ONSET ERIE r 
P > <3 C00 N _ ne IE hn! = SE EE 
__——— 7 5 en — * - Es 8 f - 


F 


Future inperfes —_— 2 
Singular. ä 
1. I ſhall, or will be iid, 3 2 
2. Thou thalr, or wilt be loved, _— 
. He ſhall, or will be loved, 1 
. % alt or will be loved. 
3. They © VVV 


9 oa 


Fi Fa. - 
n 


FS 


„ Tone ' 
— pen egen 
p Fl 
Ve 
* 


— mY 


! £ 
; 


Future Perfet. I 

' ing oular: "BG 
1. 1ſhall have been oy ed; — 
2. Thou ſhalt have deln To \. 


3. He ſhall have been Joveal, <=: 
Ply = 


a . — va 
. = b * 5 * K 8 | . 
=>, — 9 25 


= 
8 
1 wt x * 


* 


* 


ry ys * 2 9 
r 


=—_ 
x 


* 
"+ i! —_ 
KT r 


= _ = "i 2 X . 2 
* 8 I * —. 
pa * N (- 
n 
8 8 


9 W544 +; e 
8 Sd 
& ; . 


1 of * Det we PET" "ie a N 
Ro = * HE x 
25 * N * * bs 6 *%% - 


ExOL TSH RUDrM ENTE 
1. We | 4 
2, Ye, | 


5 They | 


ſhall _ been Jon 


deer Mood. 
„ JSingular. 


1. PW me be loved, 
2. Be thou loved 
3. Let him be loved. 


Plural. 
I* Let us be loved, 
2. Be ye loved, | 
3. Let them be loved. 


Is 
2. 


q . Potential Mood 
3 Prejent imperfect Tenſe 


by Singular. He 
1. I may, or can be loved, ws 
I! 2. Thou mayſt, or canſt be loved 
2. He may, or can be loved. 


Plural. 


E „ may, or can be loved 


1 Le 
4 3. They 3 e 
F \ by 7 . i 
3 } : n 8 Paſt 
- Hol 5 5 ? 3 
2 y 2 5 ; 


ENGLISH Rvupt MENTS 


Preſent perfect Tenſe: „ ; f 1 
Singular. Te - — 5 
1 may or have been loved 39 

2. Thou mayſt or canſt have been 


loved, 
3- He may or can have been loved. 


Plural. 


may or can 
have ':-. 1 
"+. Ideen loved. 


1 


1. We 
2. Ve 
3. They 


Paſt i perfect Tenſe. 4A 


Singular. : 


[ might, could, would, or . 
loved, | 
Thou mightſt, conldſt, wouldſ, or 
ſhouldſt be loved, ; 
He might, could, would, or ſhould be 
loved. : 
ed⸗ . | 
Plural 20 
might, n would 


4 0 
Ft | ſhould b be loved, 


* 
5 « ye” ag 
. j ; 
. * - 
* N / 4 rk Se I 
4 28 2 5 
2 AS; N 8 — 
9 


Tel perfect Tenſe | 
Singular 


2 Imi icht, could would or loud haril 
loved, Ee 
2 Thou mightſt, Este ſt, ” would 
ſhouldſt have been loved: 
2 He 8 8 could, would or ſhoul 
been loved. 


Plural 


5 1 We 
2 Ye 
5 They 1 


mi 1 could, woul 
or ſhould os been! 


Future imperſett Cas the ſame 28 
| 2 7 impet fect. 
Singular. 
I. I might, could, would, or ſoul 

5 os loved, 

2. Thot mighſt, couldſt, rouldh, 
3 1 . ſhouldſt be loved, i 
= 3. He might, could, would or ſhould 
3 3 ; | 

Plural. 1 

We 11 25 could, 
bak + : 5 WE „„ 
3 17 * » - ſhould be le 


Evernan RvUDIMENTS 1 
Future perfett Tenſe. , „ 
| Singular. | | 


f. I ſhall have been love; © 
2. Thou ſhalt haye been loved, 4 
3 He mall have been loved. 4 


Plural. e * 
2. Ye {hall baye been loved 
3. They | 2 


3 
8 


— ĩ — — 


= 22 po we'd 
rc nt er ns TS ang FR —— 
8 * * 8 BAg \ == l D 
= Dez * = _— JR. = = \ = 
% — 


-F Jo # As 2 4 r — 
BT Wen! HY <a GLA ps 


— * 


2 


\ 


Subjun@ive Mood. — 
Preſent inperfeer 2 ä 
Singular. : 
1 If I be loved, 2 +} oe 
. If thou be el. Z 
ud 3. If he be loved. EE 
ak Phra. 
. It We Go MLS OE 


I T } » be loved, <p 9 
zo * 2907 8 1 


— — 
FS 


E of 


4 * 


— 


— 
. 


9 > 


3 


p N 
wr oe 


Fay 
SE 


f „ Fo 76:3” 28 
, 2 e 
— >>; © 2 


4 


nd thus thro? the ſeveral reale of | 9 
moe Mood. . OA A 1 


= — 


* 3 Go 
1 mW n 
* =» | . 4 4 
* A PR ab 
Ng Fe 
ANTICS: 


eas 1 


Exo L1SH Rp 
1 Mocd. 


Preſent Tenſe. 
To be loved. 


Paſt perfect Tenſe. 
To have or had been loved. 


| Future imperfect Tenſe 
To be about to be loved. 


5 * Neuter VE R B. 
The Nuetur Verb i is formed like th 
tive ; sb. 


See: 5 

1. I come, = 

2. Thou comeſt, . 
He cometh or cues; | 


Plural. 


. We 
Ye ox You 
They 


And fo through all the Moods and! 


ſes of the Active Voice. 


The Ae Verb likewiſe nn 


Eucli sn uhr 1 


e Form in many lnſtances, haring 
ing of the Nature of the Verb 


; AS, 


© IN 
1 
$ 2 
* LU 
, 


Singular. e 
Jam come, ET Tn 
Thou art come, 85 
He is come, e e 


Plural. 


ed. 


d We N a . 
„ 5 are come. 
They 1 


n 


& 1 22 3 OO 
r 
r 


r Pg. 
. yo 3 D ay 
C 


9 Singular. 


I. I was come, 
2. Thou waſ come, 
z. He was come. 


Plural 1 = 


—_ 
line Bhs $9" ap 
l 2 


— , — — ——— — * — — — - —— — a — 
— AL — IT he — r 3 „ ES ES n= EA, TIAL 9 — nee TVS 1 — — 2 I __ 7 0 5 
1 3 — „ 3 8 75 . * 4 n G = r 
„ rs es eo 5 ot 3 PF WYATT TL e 
K — — 4 WG — N 1 = 
Po." . 


. We Y - 
L Ye were come, 

3. They | 35 

theſe Examples the Helping vert 
nd was only determine the Time, that 
erb ſpeaks in, without altering * 
uhication of it. - — 1 
n and was before a Neuter verb ex : 
ing the ſame Time as have and had be- 
an Active Verb, K2 Con- 


a A ** "FREY * . 
* RR a 
mY . * a 
CR N \ 
4 1 ? 's I * (Y 
”" 1 . * 
* * 4 2 7 
8 E 0 — 
” o 
1 


\ 15 


Fa 8 


68 | Exozaen: Rebinmxrs 
CONTRACTION of VE," 


YONTRACTION is the Drau, 
t Syllables together ſo as öl * 
come one Syllable. A Contra@oy uy 
been introduced inour regular Verbsk q 0 
the natural Quickneſs of our Pronuy * 
tion which throws the Accent as far up 
das poſſible, and cauſes the laſt Syllabl | 8 
'a Word to be pronounced ph 5 
inarticulately: 
In Contradction of Verbs the. Vomels 
Frequently loſt, and the Conſonant ch 
- ed; as, loved, lov'd ; {onedeſt, level 
loveth loves. 
Verbs ending in 4 55 p, , contra 
into ? in the paſt Time Adive and P1 
_ Ciple paſſive; as, fnatch, ſnatched, aui 
Eo pluck, plucked. pluckt; wrap, ure 
5 apt; mix, mixed, init. 
Verbs ending in F; Il, fl, admit 
. ſame Change, dropping alſo one oft a 
double Letters; as, tuff; ſtuffed, u 
0 be  doell, devellett, dwelt; pas; paſſed, p rre 
| LVerbs ending in L, in, u, p, afte 
* Diphthong follow the ſame Rule; i 
ber, either ſnorten the Diphtho 
or change it into a ſingle ſhort Vowel; 


Tel Heelta, N dream, p N Urea 1 
2 nen i {| af 


4 " 
— _ 4 — — — 
« N ER — — ——_ — * —— = m 
— — — — — *D = —— — — 
- — 


* 
__ + . 
Be >, 
* 

* 
Ts 
12 
Js 
Fd * 
8 
T 
N. * 
Eh 
Ag 


” 
"a 
4, 
F F 


WD —_ — 
— ML) 


— a— 


A 


- pal 
— - — 


* 

b 

ö 

= 

'''$ 

{ 

j + 

— 

* 

1 

x 

£ 

3 

* 

1 

. 
uw! 

1i..c® 


a.» 
* 
1 
: . 
* 
4 
PE © 
* 3 
2 4 
1 q * > 
; 1 
22 
j n 
USES 


P 
7 : F 
£ 


I.. 


awing 
As 00 
con 
Tbsh 
nu [i 
far li 
lab] / 
idly 


| ole that end in ve. beſides ſhortening” 


ed, left ; + bereave. bereaved, bereft. 


preferable. 


. | IRREGULAR VE R B 8. 
els 

t che 
loved 


if the Verb end in e ; as, turn, turned; 
e. loved. 


e called Irregulars. 1 


; as, fo Jpeat, to Sabel; to bid, to * 
. 


rreaulars by CO NTR A cT10 N. 


ect Participle alike, on Account of the 


ſagreeable Sound ot the real Ending 
0 Alter dor r. EO 9 Fre- 


8 
, neaned, cant; ep, fs ped, Apt. 


Diphthong, change allov into f, which 
deed only a ſmoother v; as, leave, 


heſe are to be conſidered not as ir- 
lar, but contracted only, as the regular 
mined is in Uſe, and in moſt Inſtan- 5 


All Verbs are Regular when the paſt 
me and the perfect Participle are for- 
d by adding ed to the Verb; or onyx 


all Verbs that do nor follow this Rule 


All Irregular Verbs in Engliſh are of © 
le Syllable, except they be compound- 


The following Verde ending in q or PRE 
are the preſent, paſt Time, and ety . 


— 


4 "i -4 * 
8 2 2 92 
— I — 
4 * CE EET bo __# A = — * 
q =Y - q \ hs - = ** ©, i of — 7 
- 5 jy 2 r tans, \ E be; Ah = 
6 > * 2 "Fay Rog : 64 7 „ a E hr — IG —_ 
xtra I E ] 3 = $7 To 
— — 4 | Fay \ 
r n 1 * — 
. Fi us 7 


Po ns 
— 22 N 
e 


þ 2 ſ 


n 2 BE Ar 
of hc oa 2 2 
S ASSES; 

. e 9 n 


— . 


— 
do 
Bot 


— 


** . o 6 ; q , 3 * * > 
i oy . by * * y . 
4 * 1 » * 6 vo 4 * Fond 7 AC" * + "MP. 
' ; 0 . _ p 22 v 
4 * . W 8 2 5 1 44 | "0 ot ; 
: * — 1 2 5 K SE, ** 1 . 
8 2 Kr 8 g 1 4 
Wa a6 ad 8 888 4 
— > , 4 1 
— ; = — — —— 
/ ee oe aces wo neem ee DHA . ; 
- 8 P — i — — c yl, : SO ? > ba r - 
ha Las DI 3 wo : N 3 


* 
5 * 
2. by ou 


TTT 


LIT 7 


22 
3 


—— ogg 
— 


— — 5 = . — — 
e 827 5 
PR Et oe Eo 
1 NA. 3 11 2 2 
* — * 


W 


edn 33 oe 
e 
* ww Sera. YEW 


— 4 [ — 


3 ; 
. * 
* * * 
45 1 7 
« 


Exer ien Rur nine 


Pat  Pattici 
burſt. 85 burſt 15 
: 5 caſt call 
0 
cut. 
hit, 
hurt. 
knit. 
ler. 
put. 
rent. 
rid. 
: ſet. - 
ſhed. 37 
ſhred 
ſhut 
| Mit. 1 
nit End 
ſpread © ſpread. 
thruſt 7 thruſt. 


= Theſe Les both the Regis 11 
1 regular Form. 
FPegſen. 5 Pa | * Parking | 

" Laft. 1. - ok lifted | lift lifted, 
quit, quitted quit, quitt 

wet, . ig wet, Wetten 


GS > 
S* , N \ — 2 
= 


1 


1 


Thee are e obſolc te or rarely wy 


dan tte. th 8 


t 
ted 


d 


I od 


2nd 


l 


ent. 


ed 


* 


nd 


Paſt 


beat 
bled 
bred 
fed 


led 


lent 
loſt - 
met 
read 
rent 
ſold 
ſent 
ſped 
- ſpent 


* 


tolii 


gelded gelt 
Se gi, 


©, ted. 


ſtood 


Euel inn Ropmegnts 


thers of this Claſs form the paſt 0 
ge and Participle, either by ſhorten- 
or altering the Diphthong and Vow- | 
or changing the d into 4. | 
6 Participle. 
beat, beaten. 
bleed. 


bred. 


led. 
lent. 


loſt. 


met. 


read. 
rent, 
; ſold. 
ent.“ 
ſped. 

bee 


ſtood. 
told. 


YA. 


Of theſe the following have 805 the | 
gular and | Irregular Form. 


bended bent dended bent, 
builded built builded built. 
gelded * 9 
Sided: gilt. 


> — 
p = 
7 — 
3 
r 

+ Fa 


— 
— 
- 


F IR 
2 i” a bh 
r — 
— * 

— —— = 


— 
= — 
- — 


"> — r — 
* - - == > 
as 2 — . 


— ——_ 


nd». 6 
f 
*} . 7 
N 
ji 
. 
14 
N 
= ifs 1 
4 . 
n - 
9 
. 54 
1. 1 
15 ; 
1 
N - 
. # 
Wt 
* * 
al 7 2 4 
. A 4 
C1 \ 
. : 
41 
i i) : 
p i | 
12 
. 
„ F 
iy 
* 4 » 
. 4 [2 
I; 
. 1 3 
ht * 
Wl 20 
„ 


f ” 
wil 
16 564 
oo , . 
tk 2 

_ 


ag - — — 
8 * f 2106. 24 AS F 
. * 5 * 
* 7 ; . 
. 


— et <5 


X. 


"Th * Exoragu Rvprurnty' 


Se e WS; TH Pon 
-Gird' girded girt girded g 


Light _ lighted light lighted l 
OW | ſeated ſwet ſweatenh 


Serge not' ending i in 4 or k, are e lk 


contracted; as, ou 


Preſent Paſt RS Particph 
Dare dt _- 
Clothe clad clad for 


durſt for 
Flee fled. fled for 


Have - tad did for:; 


Lay...  Jaid - laid for 


Make made made for 
Say my -- Mw. tr 
Shoe ſhod ſnod for 


© Irregulars i in ght. 5 


darch 
cloat 


fle. 


havd 
layed 
make 
ſ:y4 
ſhot 


The paſt Time and Participle end 


Catch caught caught. 
Fight fought 


227 and the Vowel or Diphthong 
the preſent is changed into au, or ci 


Preſent Paſs Partitiple 
Bring brought brought 
Bay bought bought. 


fought foughie I 


Freight freighted nee 2 


1 
aa ww 


A 
. 
1 — 
D 
? * x 


Ni 


K N of A R R a n » — at p 

— —— * r os RL fates Pe I IE * 
2 8 4 > * + „ a EY yz - > 

A , p , 8 - N 

2 i FEI hes ( a 8 3 : 4 . T 

” p 4 * . 2 | 

1 5 — 1 . 

” * * bs 7 . * 1 


Exel! SH ; Rovnaners | 72 

„ F FE Patticiple. 7 
ſought 955 ſought. wy, 2 l 

h taught TY taught. 

k thought 'S thoughgk 

R „„ = . 


1 rregulars i m en, 


he paſt Time and Participle in theſe 
's are different: the paſt Time ü 
ges the Vowel or Diphthong of tze 
nt Tenſe; and the Participle ends inn 
rn, when a Vowel or Liquid goes 
e, and ſometimes alſo changes the = 
el or g 5 
nt Fa Participls'i = 
le abode | 3 
bare or born born. 
base Die} 
ie | ditte. iy 
2 blew _ blown. '' 
Tr brake or broke broken. 
He chi chidden. i —_— 
ole ; choſe  - + . choſen, +; nl 
"7 done, 85 
1 e Fr. ; 
tel w | | THE « & 7 

Wine is uſed for then, according to "he: 
r of e 


HEE 


= 
wo 3 2 * * * - 8 = 
SANE 1 1 * 2 2 5 
S n CRY «4 : - PR > — 
＋ 8 = _— * E _—_— A Ns 
l 23 Lo Sh þ = RE „KKK 
1 n 2 Wo =O 


- wm — 
* 13 1 * 
= 3 


[ 1 
. % * 
' 
J 8 *. 
» = l 
j 
AD, "7 on ; 
1 n 0 , 
U 


. N. 


Projent * 


Draw 


Drive © 
Lac: 
Fall 
Fly 
Forſake 
Freeze 
Get 
_ Give 
Gro 
Hide 
Hold 
Know 
Lie 
Ride 
7 * Riſe 
See 
Scethe | 
Shake 
Shear 


\ 8 
i . 
139 » - 
= FE | 
1 1 * 0 8 ® 1 f 
4 . £ 
5 Strire 
5: * FS " . 9 
! 5 P-3 * 
AT 


Sit 
Slide 


Smite 


* 


Y — 


Paſt 


drew 


drove 


ew. 
forſook 
-\ raze  - 
gat or got 


gave 


„ grew 
hid 


held 
knew 
lay 
rode 


roſe 
ſaw 


ſod 


| ſhook 


ſhore 


ſtrove. 


fat. 
flew 
flid - 
ſmote 


ſpake or 9555 | ſpoken. 


N ö TORE 
A v * N i * 
p PEN "FEM 
* 9 
Las 


3 i 


| Evarier Rost, Mare 


Parti 
drawl 


| x driven. 


Caten. 
falle. 
gon 
forſake 
frozen, 
- Fotten, | 
given. 
grown. 
hidden. 
holden. 
known. 


Iain or ii 


ridden 
riſen. 
ſeenz 
ſodden 
| thaken al 
ſhorn. 
ſtriven. 
ſitten + 
_ flayn, 
' flidden. 
ſmitten. 


Pre 


| The two Participles are uſed impropt 


2 5 „ 
bg 
by, © 


ENGLISH Rvp MENTS Die 75 
7 % 5 Participhe | 


ſpat ſpitten | 
ſtole fiolen or ſtolo, | 
ſtrode ſtridden. 
ſtruck eien 
ſware or ſwore ſworn N 
took TS 1 
tare or tore torn. | 
w threw thrown 
öde - "Mode. 
r Ware or wore worn. 
ve wove Woven. 
e wrote or writ Written. 


me of theſe have the e Form in 
aſt Time or Participle ; and others, bY 
th paſt Time and Participle. | 


„% N ; 
ke awoke, or awaked awaked. 


ve clave or cleaved cloven. 5 
b clomb - climbed. 
PÞ crope or creeped creeped crept. 


"4 Fes 


crew + -crowed. 
dug or digged | digged. + 6 x 
Ye hove or heaved hoven heaved,” _ 
) helped ' 'holpen-heljy 8 
melted molten melt * 


3; 5 : 
* 
* * 


Ic ſhone or. ſhined ſhined. 
Ln e Pre- Wo 


70 3 * F 
1 1 
: * . ; 


. * = * » 44 * 1 * "ou * 4 9 
* "= FY 2 R 2 * $” 8 * * 
= * * Pp - I, 2 
? 2 A * : 0 


. he ; 5 . : -  . N 33 : N , , * * ** * ; 9 
1 ; 4 13 22 # 
a a , 15 


= 42 3 Rupharwre 
8 Preſent Pat Particii : 
| Strive ſtrove or ſtrived ſtriveu fie 
J Swell ſwelled _ ſwollen ys 
= Thrive throve or . thriven. e) 
| The following are only Irregulars i 4 
Participle, ju, have moſtly the r K 
Form alſo. 1 
Preſent Paſt 1 articiple 
Bake baked. baken baks 
Grave graved graven gui 
Hew hewed hewen hen, 
Lade laded laden. 
Load loaded loaden loa 
Mow mowed mown mon "mn 
nie rived ' riven 
1 Saw ſfſawed ſawn ſawel 
Shave ſhaved ſhaven ſhah | 4 
Sher ſhewed ſhewn ſhe pa, 
C 9 8 
Shoõẽ-w-w © ſhowed | ſhown. 5 
Sow ſlowed ſo n ſon 
Straw ſtrawed - ftrown 
Strew ſtrewed roy 0 
3 or or. „ e ! 
= Strow ſtrowed raid ſtr ; 
N 5 Wax Wake d | waxen wat 
= Wreath wreathed wreathen. * 
Writhe | _writhed writhen wreath 
| | In 
5 . 7 hrived carey uſed. | 85 85 


*. JEL TY 0188 * boy 4; * 4 . * 7 2" * 
3 "I * . 7 2 
a 2 
- K's * 
1 * 


C4 »Y 


ici 
{trin 
{yl 
n. 


ExelLIsH RUDtMERTS 77 
Irregulars caſting away en. 
te paſt Time and Participle in theſe i 
bs are nearly the ſame. — 
ey change i ſhort in the preſent into. 
in the paſt Time, but into * only i 
je Participle; and they change i long 9 
2 5 85 «| 
he few Verbs of this Claſs that have 
, change their Vowel for another. 
ſent aft Participle 
in began begun. 
d bound bound or * bounden ü 
g  clang clung clung. 
ne came come. TOs 
nk drank drunk or drunken 
found .._ found. | 7 
ir ang ung 
ad oronnd .. © geo, 
bs hung 2 
rang rung rung. 8 
ran fun!. 
Dot ſhot . ſhot or Xſhotten. _ 
nd unk ſhrank ſhrunk ſhrunk, + © 
ſang ſung. ſung. =-' 
ſank ſu x funk, _ 
ve flang lung lung. 


277 U 
C rel | 
il 
bake 


on 
hew 


load 


1wed 
ſhay 
ewt 


n. 
n ſol 


5 ; \ L * 


* Theſe three Participles in en ſhew plainly _ 

Wall Verbs of this Claſs had originally that ĩ 

mination.1 FFF 
[4 Is . : ; 5 N Y þ +" 6 


— 3 
0 1 


7 Fxeriem Rupturwrä 


Preſent - Rar . Taro 


5 Slink , Münk lunk. 
Spin pan or re” ſpun. 1. 
| Spring, 1} pPrang or fprung mos. | B 


Sx 0 Truck” 4 ſtuck. 3. | 
„ EY ank funk ſtunk. 
Steg + ltrung | ſtrung, 
; 5 i Bt am. or bh” ſwum. I 1 
3 SN Wung ſwung. 
i 8 Von. | 3 
| wound, — 
| wrung. 


0 
= 

: 
| | ** 


1 


i 
Wit 
it 
Wit 
Wn 
N 


— by = — 
” „ 
4 


— 


ZE : ROTH 2 Verb formed through I. 
= ite Moods an „„ 2. 
1 Tadiclitive Mood. — 
P reſent imperfeet 2 „ I. 

Singular. c 599 


. "Tow 
2. Thou giveſt, 
He sireth. 


I, 
2. 


ExnGLISH RUDIMENTS | 
Preſent perfect Terje. ; 
Singular 0 


. 1 have given, | 
« WH-. Ihou haſt given, 
3. He hath given. 
Plural 
1 We 1 2 
2 Ye C have given. 
hey N 


Paſt imperfee Tenſe · 
Singular. | 


gb. 1 gave, 
= :. Thou gaveſt, | -....—- 


Plorat k Ron 


* 
WT, 


{FA age 
—_ 


- 


8 


I. We 
2 ve 
3. They 


a 
* * 1 
n A * # £ « 


Fr 
HEE 
* 


Paſt perfect Tenſe. 


4 


Singular 


. I had given, 
. Thou hadſt « eiren, 
P ; B He had given. 


FI Y Ws 
Rm et 


288 
Acne 


33 
i 


Ss 


— 
60 


— — 


— 


Cs LEW 
r 


= 


Exel iH RUDIME urs 
4. We 3.” 
2. Ye & had given. x 
Future imperyect Tenſe. T 
Singular. - 1 


1. I ſhall or will e give, 
2. Thou ſhalt or Vile give, 
He ſuall or will give. 


9 


. x i 
PS: . «1 Shy £ 
ISL IF 5 
J p Joy. 1 C 5 
0 A t A. 4 p * 2 


« : ; y * F3 
*. 13 * 7 
1. e | | 


Ye dall er vi zw 


Future perfect Tenſe. 
Singular : 


I ſhall have given, 2 oy 3 
Thou ſhalt have given. 9 0 
He ſhall have giren. 


Plural 


1. We 1 
„ 2 ſhalt h ve given 


OI 


3. They 


- 


$ 


* 


. Let me give, 
2, Give thou, 
Let e 5 


Singular. © 


5 


Plural 


. Let us give, 
2. Give ye, 
3. Let them give. 


Petential Mood. 


* 


* 


Singular. 
1. I may or can give, 
2. Thou mayſt or canſt give, 
3 He may or can give. | 


Plural 


VC * - * 


I. 14 2 Pi, 
2. Thou mayſt or gan 


 ExcLren RUDIAEATSGC 
Imperative Maod. 


4. 


: 1 M1 
Preſent imperfect Tenſe, 


may or can g 


* 7 


* CIA + 


1 


3. He may or can have git 


— x 
? 
: * 
- 
£4 


2 1 ® *; 

4 1 wh 

1 1. 

[ 9 
* 1 
P f 1 
« N 
. 
* 1 
1 . 
1 1 
wo»  o 2 

* 


9 
—— 


- 
PR 
* 
* 
— 
\ 
- 
- 
-» * 
— 
3 05 8 ** 1 
* gs a — 8 8 
—U— — . — es A mas. 


My « 2 . 
2% 4 
s 5 1 
* 4 
oe 308 
| T5 
>» 2 wy mo 
- * A 74 
„ l 3 
7 * k 12 
WA 
KL 
& Þ 
1 7 *,.<V+ 2 wy 
„ _ g 7 
% r Ac 
2 * — 1 ix HY 
Yo ; 1 
7 9 
; { ST F he 
i a * - 
2 3 
i 
b 1 
7 5 2 
= 
y 2 8 
* 1 
3 1 
929 SE 
5 <5 Fi, 0H 
* _ _ el 
* < i 


8 
w_ r 


a V 
. 
£ 
» 3 & 


n * 4 


EC 
42 


"nl. 
165 
2 
7% 
. 
1 
1 


1 6— 66 ata * 4 
* d 7 * 4 N * 
- 25 * N X * , 7 
2 F 1 
8 
* * *% . ” 


* Enos _ „nun, 
? 


| 5 b | Plural. Sith N. 
0 „ | 1. We „ Ys | 
2. Ye. may or can have gia 
; Zo They _ | i 7 


OE Paſt imperfelt Tenſe 1 


Singular. ä 


1. I might, could, would, or haul 
2. Thou migheſt, couldit, - would 

_ _ ſhouldſt give. 
1 might, could, would, or ſhoull 


2 * i 


N Plural. "ORs 
bY We might; could, wopld; or 
. give. DOE 

. 'Y 2+: Ye might, could, would, or þ 
_ ES | give. Wan 
1 They might, could, would, ork 
VVV 


o 


Fat _ 5 5 
nt mu! = uM 
FAY ; 2» 
r a " 
THEY | 
. iba 8 "er . ' ” 
= : | af per 2 Ten 5 
þ 4 . 
15 a * o 
4 * +8 ? . [1 
1 1 4 - 
WA!) 


We. 
. 


— 
— 
, (> 
VI 1 
-» 


5 LE " Singular) 5 
1. Lmight, N would, or bail 
wa = 2. Thou mightſt, couldit; wou, 
| = -* - - ſhouldſt have given. 
3: He _ could, "would, or 
| have e ar 


— 
_— OE. 
ws 7 ; 
3 
1 5 


Exerrsn = Roher - > 


lakh coals? would, or ſhould | - 


„„ have given. 77,4. 
uture imperfect Tenſe of this Mood: = 
& the ſame as-the Pa/t regen. 


1 


n 


3 
= 


3 
— 
1 


23 


. 
3 
n 
5 E bl 
RO "I ES 


Future perfect Tenſe. 85 
Singular. „ 


Iihall „„ 
Thou fhalt + have given. 


k 
r 


OT 1 2 | | —_—— 
1, We ä fol 
2. Ye 25 


8 


— 
n 
— e 


"6 
wy 


- 
4 


3. They 


5 CS 
Rr. 1 2 


4 
* 


4, 
* 


gene imperfeet Ten 3 


li 


* 
1% 


a] 
4 * 
$ 

4 * 
* Y 
7 
* 
— 


fe 
2] Mood, 


7 


E 
vi 1 
© 
1 
* 


8 + 
8 
© 


— 


"© 
7s} 


mpe 


1 
5 


h all the 


« 


HF. 


3 


bs, though 


+ 
Ll 
* 
+ 
4 


* 


= 


ia 
Mood. 


5 
Preſent Tenſe. 
perfe 


ret 


2 
i 


4 


t to 


EN 
* 5 * 
* * 
I 
Ly 
1 


* 


1 
. 


bout 


4; 
* 


nit 


Potent 
7 


4 


ug 


F. uture 
A 
3 


— 


ro be about to gi C 


1 


Time and Paſſive Part 
7 Ver 


r reg! 


I 


Tutu 


„ 
os 


1 
ent 
' 
E 
411 


0 be 
ti 
1 
aft | 
ou 


* 


And thus 4hro 


of the. 


. 
| : ' 8 
| : 43 
„ * * * oy Pr 1 | | : 
* „ * a 1 J | 
4 7 p * o * 28 ö 6 k 
| | ; 2 * x 
* a: : þ 
. | | 
n * N ' 3, : 
* 4 i 
b 2 c J 
* . .. * pa #0 4 a ” , ; | 4 
- * : ow | It f 
we / 9 * * — - * ' ; | | 
- | 
| g ** 
* 2 | 
* 


— 


— — — 0 


Fri HUD ENTS | 3 ö | 1 
Defectire VERBS, , Ge, 4 | 


11 e Dol 8 
ive Ferbs. are ſuch as want i 
their Moods and Tenſes. > Fs." I 


BS £4, 


following being moſtly e or 
helping Verbs, are Defedtives.” -. 


n 


_ 


_—_ 6 
a ov ww y * * 2 — _ > * 2 . * 
pn 1 2 * \ — —_— - L k . 
J : Wo, n X wot 3 — ; 
: _ 1 > . *** y by C xe ©: 
a Bo : r 
N 


2 


EE 


3 


= 
„ * 
3 


nt in many — has introduced * 
arbarous Idiom of Speeth,: viz, wing the 
Tome and Paryiciple For cach other, even 5 3 
a they are quite c 3 88. 1 2 
I have written ; 7 55 TW 5 4 5 
en; T begun, for 
m: Children 
guith in this Cake 
e lengusge may be th 
ally preventeds, 


2 . 7er * 


13 N Adverb is a Word EET 454 
| , Adjedtive, or another Adverb, 

re increaſe, or qualify their Signifi 4 
tion; as, He ſpeaks properly, a ver gl 

b 1 an, very excellently... _ 0 

. Adverbs denote Time, Place, Nunig 


3 Order, SHuantity and Quality; the pri 10 
i; 3 1 22 al of which are the following. 
3 dverbs of Time.  Afore, Devin, win 5 
1 5 dy, aknays, any while, any y longer, at an 


eme, before, by and by, daily, ever, hena 

71 3 e eee, herea 564 heretofor 
bourhj, immediately, inſtantly, lately, lon 
I 4, long fince, never, noto, often, $ 


tin or ſometimes, ther. to day, to morrew 
5 of % ot Teas any tel 

= e ther, any furt her, apart, Ne 
15 ”, $elow, downward, elſewhere, everywhen 

3 * ; 3 ; brward, hence, here, hither, hitherwarly 
- Zowa 2 ja YUPTWA: rds., 45 w henc z, Kn, wi 
her eons > ID +l; 


* * * n 5 , 15 «£2 8 3 N 2 
* 72 7 8 oF; * ä . «46 * 4 
= 4 2 8 1 ST, . ” ME * 3} . * 22 W * * er TT 12 27 25 
3 9 S 3 10 "7 "YM y as 949 oy 7 * Ws 9 e * 5... 
+. a Ef : — * : * $69 4 9 I 
— 5 9 - 4 
* N 5 2 "4 * * 7% Fl \ L * n 1 
* 8 4 . FS, - 0 — by 
* = ” * W. * 0 + i * 1 ö 28 . o 8 12 * 
, 
p 1 * ? $% 
* > E : . 
f x 


0 605 OT BI 


Ad rde of Number. Frequently, | how, Ci 
1% nany times, often, oftentimes, ny 
rely, ſeldom, together, *wrce, thrices. 
kdverbs of Order. At firſt, firſt of alt * 
h, furthermorb, daſtly,. bead, thirds. 
25 Ge. . APD 
Allverbs of Quantity. Any more, enough; © 
little, how great, how much, Ane. 
ing, ſomewhat, ſufficient, . _ 1 
Adverbs of Quality. Bravely, alien. 2 2 
WE Glen), Jh, wif, G. 
inal And all other Adverbs Pts in th, _ 
uch are derived from Ad Jectives! fall n = 

r this laſt Diviſion. | _ 
Adverbs ending in derived' from a- "i 1 
tives expreſs.the Force of 2. Prepeſi Mien þ 
f a Noon; as, bravely, i. e. with * 
7 wiſely i. e. with Wisdom. © ©*. 4 9 
Adverbs which cannot properly be cdaf. 4 1 | 1 6 
gane, under the following Heads. 1 _ 
eu Adverbs of affirming; Certainly, indeed. 1 
, undoubtedly, e ' Deril 5 
here % yea, ger. — . 

ph Adrerbs of Co npariſon 3. Alike, almoſt, _ 
ſo, ar, as it were, Fur other: 5 1 won 
oft, more, otherwif rather Hun. _— 
Adverbs of Den) 5 ” mea 
WY wad *y any Means. 


— — 
1 


88 * n = I 2 3 Cx: — W 
C CRE v2 
— _ — * BY, = % 4 = 9 x L N 
7 = ————a * r =S =>. - 13 
= - = a ct , = 
b_— aa = 


——— 


EE 
— 


. SIS 
— — 
5 CR 


— 


„ 5 — if * \ 
PT xs ng of * 
Fas 2 9 
* * IE N 
# y en” a Ss 


Ex les of deciinthe? RON Wiliar 
| e Werbe Wen 3 8 N 0 * 0 


NA l is a Word jene wa 174 
Adjective, or another Adverb 

re lnshenſe, or qualify their Sign : 
Fun . as, He EN peaks de a ven gi 


me, P Jace, Nun 
en . the pri nd 
3 IS Pi of which are the following. 
+ > "Few of Time. ore, gain, | plea 
of 'S ly, akvays, any while, anz longer, at ai 
Ane, before, by and by, daily, ever, hend 
E 3 — brth, henceforeward, hereafter, heretofory 
SA immediately, inſtantly, lately, lm 
ago, {ong Acts. never, now, often, LS 
„ quickly, Jeldom,., 
f emeti mes, N to day, to aur e 
boo erda „ wear. | 
Aderbs of Rab eee any — * 
EF hare ther, any further, apart, backwari 
”, Selow, downward, elſewhere, everywher 
4 E: i forward, hence, here, hither, hitherwark, 
FToꝛoa rds, upwards, whencs, Hane a 
ther, a poll ql: 


— — 9 — ͥ — . ——„—V—¼ — 
* m"_ W 1 * 4 
WAS; 4 : j 
. 24 » 2 1 . 


— 


f * mw 
- 


| Beouaen — 


mW, man y * + cal 1 mes, "once, 
rely, ſeldom, together, *wite, thrites - 


c. Ge. 
Adverbs of Quantity. Any more, ca 


2 ng, ſomewhat, ſufficient, 


| diligently, juſtly, wiſely, exc... 


r this laſtDiviſion. 


** Adverbs ending in 5 derived from 48. = 
LW expreſs the Force of 3 4 Prepeſi 2 A 1 


Nee Noon; as, bravely, i. e. 465 Bras .. 
Ty; wiſely i. e. with Wisdom.. 
Adverbs which cannot propecly be claf. 
d, under the following Heads. 


den Adrerbs of ami Certainly n 1 


uly, undoubtedly, —— © er 15 
ell, yea, Jes. n N 14 


2 as, as it were, 433 4 
oſt, more, otherwiſe rather 2525. 
Adverbs of Denyingz* By f means, ' 
4d not 5 IP Means. 7 | 


_ » R R . 51 | 

9 * p C K L " : 3 8 . 2 5 * > © * * ien . bs L . « TY * ; i 
* 3 83 N * ; * 18 8 FE * EN N N "os. + * $ 55 2 9 * 3 — a 

. * £2 7. "my 7 : 9 Z 4 8 by f 


adverbs of Order. At firſt, firſt of all "ID 3 
* e 97e ee thir, 4 2 * 1 


little, how great, how much, 2 8 


Adverbs of Quality. Brave , con , | 


* : 5 = — EE. * 
"4 ns N « 5 » 


vard Adverbs of Compariſon ; ; 4 li te, a ne 6. Es 
„ te 7. 5 


rina And all other Adverbs ending in tf 3 =_ 
uch are derived f rom Ad Jeftives| fall unt = 


1 PI i 7 
1 25 Ne. bs 7 25 
a 5 * 4a SM 1 v, I 
* BP il 


abe of Alg Has . 
3 ber end, whether, heroes. 57 
1 Adverbs of Deny. By chance 
1 peradventurt, pert. thaps.* wh 
3 N of Exp lining; Namely tou 
„ Adverbs of Beine 
5 Je here, ſee there. 
| Moſt Adverbs ending in Ty admit! of ca 
| pariſon with more and moſt ; as, eil 
more cafily, moſf eaſily. -  learnedly,. . 
bene moſt learnedly. 
e admit Compariſon with era 
et; as, often, tener, oſteneſt. 
2 e are irregular i in their Contparil 
/ tee the irregular Adjectives from wh 
they are derived; as, N ob f 
w 4 better, beſt.” | 


co , oN 


IF E > : ' ConjunGion i is a Word chat 5oing! 
1 tences together, ſo as out of we 
more to make one > Senrende; as, Georg 20 
Ss Sentence ade up of three, by the 0 | 
junction and 1wice repeated, .. 2255 h 
I 5 5 pains, W yoo! Le, Matthew 
1 5 4 88 ks "ICDL NPB 45% 


ting out; Be bull. 


INC; 


925 * Ps 955 0 K TOE 1 » 5 Ea. Lora he * 8 O 9 a —— | | = 
* ets nes n P 5 PIES EATS — £0 _ 

4s * , > : 0 K * 5 / 4 : EA. 
* Fi : ? : * * 4 4 Ma b- F { 

1 7 . * . 34 & 
: f N 2 A 
- 2 _-_ 2 
n 5 L N : * CE 1 


— are eicher aral * oh 
unctive. [ae 1 15 oh 5 „ ö 1 


yulative Canjunttions 3 Bente es a & 
ber without expreſſing any Oppoſiti? 1 
70 08 meaning ; as, George, and Matthew, .., 
Jonathan took pains 7 And, jorns«the - ..... i 
ences together without expreſipg 5 
0 tion, _ 
ynnctive Conjuntfians. join Sentence _ 
ther, but at the ſame. Time, express al 
)ppoſition of meaning; as, „ 1 
Matthew took pains, hut Jonathan tris 
—The Conjunction but, joins the Sen- 
es, and alſo bo A an ee . 


. 
* 
3 
{ + 5 
bs... 14 1 e 
en wo, 2 2 1 2 
0 i » EI 2 r Kr 15 o : LA '"Y 
hs "29 r 1 2 
* m +, __ * 7 7 1 95 8 

- A * . „ * 
= * * * F . AY $1 1 : 
7 , r 
> * 


wia Conjunttions expreſs, | 3 ch 3 Y 3 


Addition; as, and, alſo, both. ENF v7, =_ 
Condition or Suppoſition ; ; Is 1. 65 5 Pp 
n.. 3 
Cauſe or Reaſon; ; as, becauſe Fn thee It _ 
Motive or Inducement; as, hat. 1 
Interence 3 a8, therefore, then. 1». 
isjuo8ive ConjunRions only expreſs. 9 1 
polition of Meaning, 77 in different 
Ws; as, alfo, bur; er, ne e an 
* I Ky AN ET 5 3 Mm 


rnErOST ION. 


1 Ao tion is a word ſet bel 

4 ther Parts of Speech, aud ſhes 
elation that Words have to each oth 
as, John ſtands above James; 3 che ford 
is before the latter, in every Reſped 


Prepoſitions chat are put before N 


1 and Pronouns, and ſometimes àftet . 


are theſe, above, about, after, aganf 


mung or amongſt, amidft.: at, ben, 
bind, below, beneath, beſide or beſide, 


__  fwween or betudiot 20 beyond, by Ar 
. from, in, into, megh or near, of, of, 
dots out of over, through'or thorough, 

or until, to, toward or towards, un 
| underacath, upan, with, within, with 


Prepoſitions that are joined. to Work 


X <4 As to become a Part of them are of . 
= fe ih, 1 > and Greek SEAN: 


- 1 | = 
873 % + CE 4s 0 * 


be . 
* "Mont Pre A FER: had ee Rick 


20 e and 88 thence their other Relat 
ee hoes börrowedz thus out, in, through, un 


q F 5 , to, from, 22 Ge. of is much the ſame 


rom, and for in its primary Senſe is uſedin 
- ſtead or place of another. Les De: N 


e P. 73 


Sgnifications. - ee "hn. 
lin. 2 ition. | Sign ation. _ 


oh. os n 


DA . i 
SE # ON £4 


o +1 


1 | abide. continuance —— 
"© beſp eak. ee * 
. } beſprinkle .. over. e 
L be tim .. 


4 : * p * 
% T beſides ear e 
Ws * n 
4 # F f . 4 £ & 4 od, Xe. WE 
5 > * o 7 8 
; L ) \ N * * F * 2 Wy £1 F * 
„ forbid mot. 
: , 8 z y 0 4 ® £7 XS ; a 2 i 


foretell before. : "3H 0 
(overlook _ «eminence. —_ 
 Qoverjoy _ exceſs, ,: 
* oma victory. we 
nit an g unjuſt d not. 5102" "i 
fiber 0 unweave 2 undoing: | | ' 
| Cuphold 61 9 5 5 


uplands Wd high - be e 3 
\ withſtand Foppoſition 5 = 
withold keeping from = 


ain Prepoſitions i in Co 
I „ Og 


Ado 


©. 


Fat _ * Ow F IJ » 


py 
i 2 


_—_— YT IRR 


OF 


es 
val Sg 
an OI 


„ 


Teer RSI T SC 


ambiguous Abbt 
antedate Wa 
e x e 
convene 
coadjutor 1 
3 bee 
commerce: 15 
5 . * 
Knelcend down, 
depart _ 44 


„ 


dilate extent 

diſagree -  ſeperat 

| 8 beyonc 

1 01th 2 1 ille- ) 


Acer. gal, immoral 1 90 


n;; with a q incloſe 
7 im) Verb 1 | 
„ aepote>©-1-- betweet 
intro introduce Within. 
ob or op obſtacle, tas againſt, 
Permanent through 
poſtſeript after. 
: reſcience before. 
5 e 1 very 
er C provide for 
repeat again 
2 repulſe 5155 back 
revoſpen” backwa 


ff Tas 
1 


AY” DF 
ee T 2 0 * 


. 


Trenker ee 93 
boſtion. |  Compyſttions | | bebe _— 


ſecede 7 
ſubmit 
ſupplicate 


WET. waa wins on 
— _—_ = 1 7 


— ——— 1 
5 PIT A 8 ” -a& yo Dy 7 
1 8 Ss Rs r - l 8 


— 


or I 


ter ſubreran cows | 
er Cl uperfluous 
16 transfer 


ye have che few following from the. 
ch. „ 2 


re 7. 2. a e i 
ner can £0) contrary. | 
encorage m 

rei. enter entertainment among. 
ſurcingle 3 55 abe, 


4 
* 


= a - * 
2 r 
n 


3 


— 4 = * j 


Is 


* 
Is 


» WF 4.4; Pi erent, 
F 
2 28 — I 

— 2 


= *. 
1 
Wy” Ws. 


IR a 3 E vs — — St 
n 
ere. 


* 


Greek Prepoſitions in  Compalion 4 1 5 
th their Signification. 8 I 
repoſition. Compoſation. Sage 


anonymous without. 
phi . amphibious both. 
It antichriſt against 5 
per hyperbole above. 
Ipo : by pocrite under. >] _ — 25 
5 1 change. =. 
5 1 - - 


U 


PF 


g l * 3 2 — * DS, 
+  In> * : Ne 4 * "Ta b 
I * 3 & LIFE = & 4 lt 3 Fo 
BEAT ae —— ra.” ne En 


* 
EI » _ rr . 322 
. n 8 
N nn LP lens, 5 
. . 1 n 5 * 
1 I 2 * 
wed © 


„* 
8 
— 
Tr . 
yy 


2 * * * 
” — 0 ers -4 
Sf Ne ng a ig 
IE 3 8 22 
8 e 225,=he 
rang” ee 


; Wegen 


2 8 2 3 
K 


— 
— — — 
by 


— — — 
x — —— . — * — - be 
EEC 
. 1 — . . 
— — — — . — 
* - „ * a ES) 9 +. oy 
5 2 . : . wa 9 " 
1 4 > 
0 > 4 E\ : = 


Tust Rudi 
 INTERJECTION. 
2 4K nterjectiun is a Word that © 
FN ſes 5.3 ſudden Paſhon of the i fin 
as, alas! Hey. day! 

An Interjection is fo. called fra 
being thrown in between the Parts of. 
= Sentence, on which it has no Dependend 
Z "2s The Idleneſs of Boys, alas! brings N 
il 4 

rom to theit Backs. 
The Different Paſſions ba dien 
| Inerjecions to expreſs the. 
nan Expreis. 
Tk  Udmiration; as, Hei, ! Heyday! mY 
. 2 Addreſt; as, O!. Park ve! 1 
3. Conſideration; as, Hough, 2 bun / 
9 2 Clamour ; 5. as, Helle! Harl bark! 
5. Diſdain; as, Piſh! Phaw! Pugh! 
8 Greif ad. 28, lov.” ah me! " BY 
Heig 5 50 | 
7. Laughter & 39; a8, Ha ha 557 
| - brave! - Huzza / 2 
8. Salutation ; ;. as, Hail 7 
9. Silence; as, Huth . 2 870 1 CL EL 
0. Surprize ; as, Aha! hab! - | 
i Z 1 There are many more Interjections, av 
© cording to the different Ways that 05 
have of expreſſing their differ erent Paſſions 
l * Which need not t be . enua a 


— SR 4. Ee 6 
—_— - _—_— 


— 


2 


3 


he be Paſſions are ſometimes exprefſed - 
ther words, which by chat means, be- 


e lnterjections, as, Vers Shame? A Hr, 
on b r ES a bh N 


ot or DER IVA 'FION - 


7 ymolog y or . the Art oft ra”, 
j cing Wordsfrom:1 their true Ori iginal. | 


* 
5 

* 
2 


* 


n 
Ws oF 


—— 
- 


© 


<< 


— 


1 


te 
We 


9 


OE Lb 


2 
Nr 


raced from rin Ie or ori inal Words 
Kingdom, Earldom, Biſbopric. en, 
Derivative Words are of 1 0 ts. 

Words derived trom Engliſs Orig nals i 
Words derived from Frex 4 Latin, and 1 
et Originals. PTZ = 


R 


7 


X «A 8 a 
K«ö*.ʒ - „ 
* | 
7 4 4%. x4 
* * L 7 


. - 
4. & 7 * 2 of 


——__ 
NA 2 


8 


NGLISH DERIVATIVES. ' 
from Engliſh Originals „ Oi 


&# _ 


„ £6. + WT 
. 2 * 
- 5 


* 


, T. " 
* 991 


laſectives in n, i, ful, leſs, hy, ame, 
7 From Sub/Nantivesr 23 — 


— = 
—— 
p- — 
— 


2 1 
oY "= 
” = 4 


—— 


— A ee Y 
— Are — * 
, * : 
1 * 4 ls 


. ectives derived Mom N 
* ing, Signification, and Deriratu 


ADJECTIVES.. 


Ending i in en. Signification., Deriva 


1 golden I he Matter f „ C0 
ſillken Subſtance from fro - Silk 
wooden which a Thing rom. W 


— 


— — „ 
— ——— — — 2 


ö woolen me 0 
Aadjegives ending i in 1506. 


cif 4 Thekeſemblance the Den 
ih Cf or Likeneſs Ja Mule. 


Wc - Ja Rogue. 
5K : Thing 5 da TON | 
Adj Jj edives i in ful. ; 


denote what their - a 


Fadibe, implies; Y Joy. 
, VIZ. | Mercy, 


fulneſs. Hop * | Pie a 


4 


/ 


s. L. Adjefires ending in eſs.” 
Xx 3 I denote alſo what Care. 
| fearleſs ( their ORE: I Fear. | 

= fruitleſs Sa: or Witte 77 on 3 1 
| 922 9 7 0440 Ef 


„ 


1 


Father. 
God. 
Raben 


Siqnifiation. . 


denote the 
Likeneſs or 
Similitude 
of a Thing * 


fr. om 


Adjeftives! in ſome 


e 
lenſome denote what Burden. 
leſome 
ſme KC implies /ome or 


@bleſome Jome Addition. 


Adjedtives in 9. 


denote fal-. 
nefs of 07 
8 8 


Participles in ing and ed, When they 
© no expreſs Relation to a become 


dives, and are joined to Sub 
ch, 0 


their Ending Mettle. 5 +? 
Toll. 
55 ouble, | 


* 
/ ö 
* 
7 i 4 * 
1 * — 
* x7 : SIE. 
x No - 

* Ty 3&4 „ 3 
£ | 2 * 4 1 7 ; os 2 


2 * a +4 
29 . 
_ 4 7 4 
d ct 4 " 8 * 5 
Adjecives f Verbs. N 
5 W SZ I 7 
] rom > es 1 9 - 8 +8 
1 


* 7 WW 
* - 4 a ! | 
2 HH 
_ 3 
TC * 
* - „ 
4 
1 
7 oo 
_ "#5 


n 


— 


r 


n 
n 
5 2 


Li Th, 2 3 


vs, ER es 
Res of, wa Br 
Er - 4 r 


8 2 bono, . N. 
— br N "= : e 
Ds 5 . W : 
A I In AF 

75 4 5 — * 

\ % * ff 5 * 
* i * bl 

. 
x 
2 4 


7 ! 1 
9. + 


998 | EnGL en RoDMENTs 
WIR OTTER. in ing, te 
35 from Verbs. ap 
| Derinaing 
Fs A crowing 18 
A barking Dog 

A fighting Man 
A loving Friend Ws lore, | 


- from 


 Adjedtives ined derived from 2 


An advanced Scholar to advance 


An affronted Friend from do affront, 
A drowned Man to drown 
| . laboured Treatiſe to labour, 


2 | Adjedtives a from aaa, ik 
end in 2/þ, | 
Ending. Signißcation. Derivat 
> blackiſh » „ eſen the Sig- „ bla 
' browniſh 0 nification of the i brom 


ſouriſůn Words they are 
1 iweetiſh derived from. 8 


ſour. 
ſuee 


Ad, tour of this 3 are princip! 
alities of Colour, Taſte, or ſome 


1 Qn 
1 ES Senſes, and may be mulciplied 


far as mole reach, 5 
a 


*. 


6 * 5 
* N EA” LS * 8 * - ID , IN * Ts 5 Fane 
2 7 e 5 4 
N } EZ 'S lb 3 » W N * a * 
. £44 PL $ pr 
* . N 


Fvelren Roptuzwrz | 


Ferbs from Subſtantives, Lc. 5 


from Subſtantives without any. - ? 
Change. Ty 1 


fiſh „ Fiſh. > 25 
plow _ a Plow. e 

plant from „ A la 
doe a Shoe. 


5 


ation, 
row 
Ik 
Tt 
ve. 


bs from gab panier: ſounding | the | 
owel or Diphthong long; and foften- ' | 
ng or hangings the Conſonant. 


braze . Braſ. 
breathe f 88 Breath. 4 : : 1 I | uw 
graze OM Graſs, © £0 

d houſe 2 Houſe. 


\ 


rbs 18 Adlijectives by adding e en or only . 
u, if the Adjective end in ſilent . 


0 blacken | | | black. 
bloften © =; foft. 
0 ſweeten from ſweet 


0 Whiten White. 


1 * 


2 


Wa + A 22 * ue Ber R x, W ” * OT. 2 22 * — 9 
W * red at, * l * "oP . N ht ; A W vo 
F „ * * . - " * "= : * - 
0 $$; 5 a i 7 8 5 * 
% 4 4 


0 Euerm Ruvexcenta] | 
l N . ge Sul ame, from Perbs, de, 


Subſentiver derived from Verbs, 0 
ding er or only * of Te Verb a 
ſilent e. 


| : =, 
| 1 
: SubPantiver. VV; Oe 7d 


an Admirer dio admie. 
a Bleacher to bleach. 
2 Teacher from to teach. 
2 Preacher „ee 
WL Weaver V yeare. 


y * 


= Sub flentiver d derived om Parks by ad 
or changing the laſt Conſonant into 
and either changing or ſhortening 
Denen. | 
Bim do bear. 
SGSirth to gird 
en en eee 

= Stealth „ bal ſheal.,. 


$ e "RR Adjeftived 57 5 add 


h to the final Confonant, and changl 
07 Wee the Vowel or Diphtba 


X 


ExGr1S8 RupmMentTs 
ive, Adjectivet 


xdth | broad. ; 
[th 1 8 Sep- z 

rb allot fra long. | 
wgth _ Krong 


Verhy, bbſantives derived from 4d Gives 
e. ng in /, or le eſs by adding noſe. 


fulneſs | ++ ave” 
nen 2 careful. 


b. bttulne ſs rom doubtfuh i 
ö eleſsneſs | careleſs _ ; 
enn ns ne, So 
ad 8 | 
into WW /0nt:ves deriva From er Sabian. 


e ee in 
hs.” Sign , : 


nbkin ) Leſſen or dimi- 
Kin 5 niſh the Sign | 


| ; | &ling 9 fication of the {_ 4 | 5 
{0s 5 Word Ges are? + A" 
ha e and Te ore. 

ws ol 


bs called Di- C 


rel | hinutiver. 


: 3 . Biſhop ric Office wig a Biſko 


N . RR 
* re n 5 "BY x * 
R ; 
* - 
* \ 3 * 


Ever 18H RopiuenTs 


SubNantiver derived from eine Gui 
* - t#rves, ending i in alty, . 
Ending. Signiſcation. ' Dirind 


Moyoralty ? Office with C a Mayor, 
Ds K Dignity. L a Sheiff 


8 ubſtantives in cy. 


Agency EmiploymentC an Agen 
Enſigney Fand Subor- J an Enit 


Cornecy 2? dinate Com- 8 Cornelf 


Lieutenancy 5 mand a Liuetel 


Subſtantives ending in dom. 
Dukedom Power with (a Duke 
Earldom Command and ? an Earl 


Kingdom ) Dominion 2 King 
Popedom y a Pope. 


1 


— 


 Subſtantives ending i in ric, and wit 


7 Bailwick Power } a Bal 


Sul 


EXGLISH RopmienTs | 10 ũ k 
Subſtantives in head or hood, W ol 
Ng  Signification Derivation, © 


head | State and | Gon = 
hood Quality, | Man 


if ij 
=  Subſtaritives ending i in PER 


Lip a Fell. 
ſhip 1 State and a King. = 
ſhip J Office 2 a Lord Y 
=. aa 


—= y Low 
5 WOT 
— — > 


5 
1 4 


— 


— 


gerivatiors from French Originals. 


Os ES. Eton Eons 31 
— ee — P 9 , 


* x 
4. F.. _— = 
AM = 
£ 5 A Sx 
= 5 N — — — YE 


n 


J Engliſh Words ending in age are 
riyed from French Words of the ſ ame 
ermination. | | 


| Age, 2 wes 
age . e 6 
age. Mariage, 
w ee Pillage, 
nage | | Plumage, 
ge Village, 
ge  _ - Viſage, |; 10  R__ 
de Voyage nm 


| , Afflictive | <> Afflictif, 


n " Y 2 N N „ Oe * 
7. a) oo ea r N * 7 * 4 
8 * 5 N 
e ** N . 
„ 


e LN „% 3, * " £2 


104 Engin Rophiazvrs 


i 


Many allo Econ in ble. 


Engliſh French 
agreeable „ agreable, 


capable capable, 

deſireable =} deſireable, 

1 imaginable  _- imaginable, 
impregnable - impregnable, 


vegetable e 


; Many alſo in wn are derived fron} 
French Words of the lame ending 


5 Engliſh 5 French 
Abridgement Abregement, 
Compliment Compliment, 
Commencement Com mencement, 
Judgement Jugement, 
Government Gouvernment, 
e Menagement, 


Many i in ive from French Words: in| 
| Engliſh 5 I French 


1 -a1 Ml cel, 
Ee. Expreſſif, 


* 


* 


2 — — 


pa. 


in on, from the ſame Terminati 
in the French. e 


nohſo if, French ' 

elon Caveſſon or Cavegon 
mpion Champion 

Ipanion Compagnion, 

plexion Complexion, 

don Pardon, 

ton. Mouton. 


y Engliſh Words are derived from the 
* dropping the final e mute. 


whſh dene, 
| Affaire, 
Brar che, 
Chaine, 
Chagrine, 
Domaine, 
Fountaine, 
5 Poſte, 1 
Sorte, i 
8 Troupe. 


* 


£ 


1 » J "7 
: 1 0 F 2 * * 
- (0 
1 a 8 4198 - 3 
” \ 1 % « * 


= \ 206 | Exon Rush 


% Many on the contrary adopt the fl 
mute, which the French omit, \ 


Engliſh 95 French 
Ta» OO NR Climax, ER 
Diſcourſe Diſcours, 
„%% 8 
line Fal. 
F "Emxal, 
Fine 3 Fin, 
Knife. Foy 7 3 Cui. 


nk 


Many. again are ved from the Fre 
3 the Sana of the 


mute e. 


Engliſ "Mind 
Dunz. ber „ chambre, 5 
Center Centre 
Coffer a e 
Diſaſter Diſaſtre, 
Diſorder Diſordre, 
= Tender. Ro Tendre. 


1 u Engliſh Words are derived f 
= the French by oe Pg the fu 
. g oute e into the Wing. 3 


. f 3 e : n N © * « y n n 1 
. 1 " , - * . » i 
. ” ; ' * 8 
N ' 5 L 
* , I bo A l 
f 1 1 * = 
: . 4 , 7 - y L ? 1 ; 
! : |; * 
| : p 1 N 
wi . 5 # \ eo. 4 
, 1 —＋ 4 . „ J F : 
r 
o 


* 


7 . Habilete, 
7 . 
ity Capacite, 
| Gaiete, 
58 Moitie. 


[ 
4 


1 ks « 
Y * 


to theſe that moſt Engliſh Words in 
ich Diphthongs and Triphthongs 
ur, are originally of French Ex, 
ops, ſuch as theſe. N 


fk 


| 0 
Lr, 1 1 
Lee, 5 
ge Money, þ 
RES 4 PER, 


=. 2 
I” - 


crivatives from Latin Ociginals. 


re have adopted many Words from 
rench Originals, ſo have we alſo ta- 
n moſt of our Words from Latin 
erivation from the French. 


4 
$ 
"0 LI 1 %4 4 
Pp. kbar. 
* 
* > 33 
. £ & 


final 


c _ 
. 4 Y a l VI? 
" 2 IF — rn „ 

as N Y * * 

g 7% 5 ; 
. 

- 1 A * 

. 


BY Sabo e Reba ENT & 
; Eogliſh and. Erench Words w 
55 formed from . Words e 
in alis. e | 


F  Fngliſh and French L Latin 

5 e Toller, 
Conditional Conditionalis, 
Libera! Liberalis, 
Literal Literalis, 
Origins Originalis, 
Subſtantial. © Subſtantialis, 


1 Engliſh: and $rendh Words . 114 
br ent, ate derived from Latin bl 
ending i in ans or ens. 


. Engliſh and French atis - 

| done . Abundans, 
Conſident Confidens, 
Differen Ditfferens, 
Excellent Excellens, 
Prudent Prudens, 
Vigilant. 1 Vigilans. 


n and Wend Words ending ind 

r ence are derived from Latin Wa 
©* = 5 and French Lad; 
0 ee | Abundanis 


, X 


9 3 2 ä 
+ 9 


- * * 5 4 % K 1 : , . ; 
. F. a ah 3. — . ” * % 5 7 
* — 1 1 2 I * 
N 7 I * : 0 5 * þ * 
Lo r k i "$170 * i 
1 1 n " 2 Ut 2 
ff 4 2 3 1 * As” \ 22 * ? 24 
* 5 ; . < RA | 2 7 . c 2 * 1 
4 1 n #3 * "4 s 
EF : 9 * 
1 : 7 1 2 - . 
vs % BY L q 
" FS 
1 
4 


62nd French Len „ 
ence 1 iti, 
ce Patientia, 

e * 


Ii ad French Words ending in , 
d ide are derived from Latin Words Th 


us, 
. French I 
d Candide Candidus, 
Humide Humidus 
d Lueide fees 
ndid Splendide ' Splend 


— 


liſh and French Words ending | in ion 4 7 


re formed from Latin Words in: io 5 


lh and French Latin 
on | _ Ao. - 
ection. Directio, 
'ortation Exhortatio, 
ation. | Vexado. RES 


liſh Words in ry and "French"? | 

ire are derived from Latin 

U us 0 - * 

wh French 2 | 
bitrary Abitraire Athina, 


" — OE 
Imy 4 


0 Exotarn Rvpnicn Ts * 
is French Latin | 
'Dilatory. ©. Dilatoire ' Dilatoring 


Mercinary | Mercinaire Mercinar 
| Fei. ate Plagiariu 


Engliſh Wank 5 in ty and Trench Wa 
in te, are derived from Latin Wo 


in tas. 


Engliſh _ Sos 1 
Antiquity Antiquite Antiquitay 
Benignity Benignite Benigni, 
ConfanguinityConſanguiniteConfanguun 
_ Humility Humilice FHumilitas, 
Dd | Simplicite. Simplicita 


There are many other Termination 
Engliſn Words which ſhew that th 
are derived from the Latin," they 4 
= briefly theſe, 
=_— Termination En li 1 1 — 
* Affable Affablis 
Fingal . Inte ae 
Tranſact Tranſactus, 
ſecede ? ſecedo ; 
ſucceed : ſuccedo | 
Circle Circulus, 
Neglect Neglectus, 
Serere Beperts | 


W. 


Fxcrien Ropiants Og 
nation Engliſh Latin 2 Re | 


War 
Wo 


utas 
nitaz 


ita 


Expreſs 


Signify 
deiciibe 
Audible 


Edict 
Docile 
extinct 
Preſide 
Sign 
Divine 
Reviſe 


Remiſs 
commit 


active 


Exp reſſus N 
1 Significa 88 


Deſcribo, 


Extinctus 
Prœſideo 
Signum 

Divinus, 


Re viſo 


Remiſſus 


committo 


acti vus, 


Audibilis, 
Edictum 
Docilis 


E. 
8 +: * . ; 


ont 
2t [ik 


Omen 
Senſus̃ Ml 
Jocoſus? YG 
Generoſus 4 | 
Honor 
; expello, -  ,. -” il 
Productus , Ml 
Refugiuſm, 
conſumo, "MF 9 
jejunus, 9 
obſcurus 


Omen 
Senſe 
Jocoſe 

ö 1 Generous 
Honour 
expel 
 Produe 
Produce 
Refuge 

conſume 
jejune 
obſcure 


„ * 


% - 
— 1 N 


** walks 


* = UE I. Ss r N , YL 
4 * wy * 2 by 


. LF 


2 112 Euer 3 J 
Termination © Engliſh \ Latin 
uſe © abuſe | Abuſy 


ute inſtitute Nr ns, 


R Ä 5 affaus | 


1 * 
. * 


_ Derivatives from Greek Original, 


| Groek may be known by'their Begin 
— Middle, and Termination, or Enduy 


Engliſh Words beginning p29 (t 
Prepoſitions are derived from (1 


Originals, viz. Le anti, il 


© hypo, meta, pert, . 


Engliſh Words that begin with hi 
3 Pn, PFs rh, are of Ae Org 


a Phial - Phiale * 
Phraſe Phrraſs, 
Phthifick © Phthiſs, 
Pneumatic Pneumail 
Pſalm Plſalmos, 
Rhethoric | Rhenorike 


j 735 85 * 'For Eames to the Prepoſitions of i 
Fr — ke he OO ſec 88 R 


* 


0 
17 


- ENGLISH. Avon 425 TS. 5 1 13 
u Words that have FA hard, ee, E. 


| th, either in the Beginning or 
ale are likewiſe of Greet b 


Euchariſt Euchariſtia 
Eunuch '/Eunonkos 
Symphony Sumphonia 
Enthuſiaſt r 


n Words ending in ical or ic, are 
ved from Greek Words "GEE in 


hatical 1 
E. hatike 8 

hatic an de. 

2 e 
73% Clerikos "i 

ematical | | 1 4730 al 2 

j 

dematie bs Mathematikos,.- on 


- 


3 


ih Words ending. 15 are e 


from Greek Words ending in dia IN 


R ws HO. 


£ £5 " « 5 
„„ 

23 p 

; 24 
AS 4 

PF 
* 
A; 5 

Wy 
— 17 bg 


lanical 3 
hanic | Mechanikos. | 175 nts _— 


A a 4 3 
4 
3 


L 2 * 
„ A 
n * 5 * * 
Jed 2. Ne dia \ £5 r ; 
; a 5 4 * » * 
: 2 r 
a . | I 
| Proſe TY 22 
3 PRONE 
f ! A ; 5 : "7 \ 


* 


* nn : * 5 5 5 ws ST? : WE 8 b 1 ; 9 3 3 4 
ii by 4 - * * n - . ; * N . ; 0 N q x * Wa £2 6 ' * % mr EP 
o 4 ; * * - . , - » | 1 US, s * 
* U — * * * & 7 
— 1 x 
4, ; 1 C « p . : 
vt \ 88 a 7 1 . a 1 4 #1 4 \ 0 "oO - a F 9 * 
Ci. f $5 * | yz. i 
| | | : | 1 1 Ext 51 H | } | 
SL * 0 4 
F 1 1 A £ * A : * 
1 f 2 4 . . 
11 N \ ent 
1 2 0 
— * a ft 5 0 
1 1 * * 
- * 1 „ * 
* 
; | Fain a 


Engliſh Words IR | 
| Greet en end in gia | | 


koi 5 Apologia 
Chrono 1 Chronologia 
Doxology Doxologia 
Etymolog y Etumologia. 
Genealogy - Gemnealogia 


Tamology 5 e 


Engliſh Words ending in my are te 
from Grevs Words ending in mu; 


| Bigamy | \ Bigamia | 

| Metonymy e 
Monogamy _  Monoegamia | 
Phyſiognomy 5 Fu. 


_*T Engliſh Words wndivg 5 in ogue are da 


from Greek Words ending in 1 


7 FR Apologne AApolog %% 
0 — . C atalogue b 1 Chialopes | 


5 5 Demagogos ; © 


415 ; © mA d 
4 [ — 7 % «4 
by * - 
os 6 1 : 1 
1 4 * - k = f 1 "0 
11 4 F 7 — 2 < 
N e ; « N R 
m * 
i * 
4 . » 
7 i 
10) t'1'Y 
TRE - 


5 Pedagogos 
4 From 5 . 5 


, we a Ss by a * „* | 
VE IE * 27 * — . * * 

2 CO" , EF VIS" 5 A — a * h 

. 3. det n oi * 5 N * a 
* * 8 "= } N "7 r SF 0 * 
7 1 55 Pg TR * i 65 N N * "A * 
; 
: 


ps bremse Ii 

n Words ending in pþy. come e, : 9 5 1 
Greek Wen ending in bb . 
- Arrophia 
enen 1 
Geographia . ONS 
| Philoſophia. . 


in Words 9 in ny come from 
Greek Words ending i in nie, 2 
phony Kakophonia ©... + 
lotony Monotonia 
22 wy a ons _ +. - 


liſh Words ending in is are the Jas L 
the Greek Words of that Teri | 


| _ 1 1 = 


liſh Words. dla in i/m are . derives =_ 
from Greek Words ending in z/mos ̃ ⁊ 
boriſm 1 | Sphoriſinos | 
bariſm , - Barbariſmos. _ 
ogiſm e Sullogiſmos NE = 
amatim Rheumatiſmos. "> 3 | 
delides theſe, moſt * our Engliſh tech- 1 
K die! = 


L me a "Teims' are derived: From «6 
in thoſe Sciences in which they ex 

From the Greek we borrow Ta 
Philoſophy, Mathematics, Logic, Th 

und Grammar. 2 

= And laftly ir muſt be obſerved thy 

Botanical Writers adopt Greek Ten 

| cage late T reatiſes and Publication, 


SENTENCES, 


Sentence is a Number of Work 
preſſed and placed in uch & Il 

as to make good Senſe. - 
8 are either ſimple or camp 
A Sentence is {imple or ſingle, 1 
it hath but one Noun or Subj el ok! 
courſe, and one Verb to Nr of it; 
Books edify. oy 1600 


_ *It aſh be obſeryed. here, WO n ry 
Sentence an Adjeftive may be joined to thel 
ſtantive; as, g Books edify.” And furl 
that when the Verb paſſes on to another 
ſantive to compleat the Senſe, the Sentend 
ſtill ſimple or ſingle; as, good Books 
. Boys,” which /atter Subſtantive may likes 
1 4 = in a ſimple Sentence, have another Adjedi 
=_ - „ it; as, good Books cdify diligent 90 
== ay woes chat an Adverb, © 2 nl 


A / 8 


1 verb nomen, 

he e Sentence is con 7 

ey eue imple Sentences are joined together 

W Words that connect Sentences; as, 

ic, M lügent Boys 2% are ſtudious of Praiſe 

- a certainly be ediſied by good Books, = 
ed that probably becgn 8 N gh 9, \ 5 | [7 
« Ten 8 Syntax. =_ 
ice . 

A, and che Sciitelite de nin aj ; as, Ml 
„Books certainly edify diligent Boys * 
Words ingly.” Laſtly, that a Subſtantive or Suan. 

h 0 4, with Prepeſi tions before them, adding 

a: Circumſtance to the Noun, Verb, or Ad- 
ape to which they relate, may be {til annex - 8 
le, and the Sentence continue ſimple; as, *dil- 


pt Boys udious of Praiſe are certainly edified 

2 Books of various Kings in di Herent Laws 
„ . | 
In this laſt example Fo 45 wh bbb a . 
ged that *fAudigus of Praiſe” is Elliptical Con- 
uction, and that the Relative uo and the 
Erb are being ſupplied the Sentencę becomes _—_ 
wpounded: By ſuch Mode e of-Befolution --M 
b may be very true, but, accords i 1 
ture of the  Engliſh...C ConftructioWthe e Sen- 
ce ſtanding as above is undouly * owe 1 


gl 3 
5 . b - 47 PIER: "Rt 5 e 


ok! 


Words that join n geber are TY 
er lelative "A" or a 


ao 2 * 
* ; 9 
55 . : . 
ö 4 „ 
** 7 
* * _ S 
9 


— 


— —— —— 
. 


DE SEE ne. 
1 7 \ : : 2 8 W's 
ö 505 — * 
'S Rey 


—— "om —— —— — — 
. * 1 * J a. 
A " 1 o x 
3 : Z ; : 
. 0 . * 1 ” 7 
k - 4 


"020 „ - 
0 of. V 


* vw 


Le Ae or Agreement is when two We 


ne 


2 e put 1 in the ſame G ſe, Nun h 


k 7? 
. 


four Concords, or War 


e are 
e t in the Engliſh Language. | 


1 The ö Caſe and the val 
4 « Thi Subſtantive and the Adjedive, 
Antecedenr and the Relative. 


with the 1 Noi 
TG Caſe, - 2 Phrafe, or 3 Sent 
2 for the Nominative Caſe, l 


enten Muth! 1 1 


od Boy ies ut ee 
| keep a * er over 2 r 


Ma | Hg 8 
ables a * 1 HE 


4 — 
5 
* 


Two or more Men Cale 
Ibrafes, and 2 Sentences / Singular, - 5 
led to gecher by a. Conjundtion require bw 
Verd to be of the Plural Number; as 1 
bn, thou, and T read and ſludy + 
% Boy and a bad Bey are 4 J ret '' 2 
ria ted by tbe Maſter, _ „ 
hep a proper Guard over ide P ons, 
the. Appetites, and bridle the age, 
wy a Man t0 be perfect 3 mai . A; | x 1 ö | 
wo Nominative Caſes - PLES be „ it 
liferent Perſons, the fir? Perion wes”, 1 
ſc: ot the. /econd, but the ferand i ig more 
ve- Bib) than the Third; as, 2” 
hou and I ftudy, aud 200. e bave Our 
ue dk. 1 
N fob and you uch. and vb 
ward. 8 E 2232 _ 
v Noun of 1 Number. or 2 Muli 9 = 
"+ Phraſe 3 is two or more Works properly = 
together, and making part. a Sentences... 5 i 
ſometimes making «whole Sentence. Ter N 
3 Explandtioh of theſe Phraſes, dee ie 
9 2520 80 Grammar, Page 76. 2 


* 5 " 
- 4 * 7 * + 7 = 
Sf > 8 * 2. Dh , 
2 85 - 46, R © So! ' + "= Log 
1 . / 1 
1 5 


« 
1 72 4 
* y : _ 
; 4 89 3 4 
2 £85 a ; 
Som 1 . 
i» P 4 * — "OY 
1 33 . K 
x1 — en * * MSL ? F: 
a N Une Y e * 2 * * 2 * * 
= wat q 2 


* 1 * 3 Li * ">, . 
» 37 + F * "© SR IVY * A. COTS, TO OE :: OS IE * 2 comm 
Ft - £ 4 * * * * 4 s * 8 N © 72 — l ** ö hs * * W 5 Y # - * 2 
* $ "4 N £ f Ws * . 0 8 . 2 K 7 e 2 19 
8 N 1 4 * £ . F 1 - » SS KS. #7 Bs = FY 38 7 4 2 
+ 5 d - G J ; Ss 5 
* 0 7 8 4 q 1 IF - - >» I * f 
f \ * FR 7 } * g * * 4 * * f 1 n Np — - mY = 4 oY a 
y 7-3 bd % , . 8 \ . 3 
id 5 | * - * 
„ * = 
* — 
> - 4 
„ ® 


| 1 126 i ts « Rubkurs 


5 3 a, apap er or 
ral Verb; a,, 536) 5 
e Fury i fs, or are impaneled. 
2 The Mob is, or are riotous. 
he Neminative Caſe being the Ni 
itſelf, and the Subject of Diſcourſe genie, 
5 ally veth before the Verb; as, p/atro 
N Rannibal a Carthageni an congueredò Ju 
pio the elder a Roman; but Scipio . 
younger conquered Hannibal. The 
If a Queſtion be aſked the Nominai 
Cafe follows the I Principal, or 2 Help [he 4 
1 = V. rb; 5 : in 
1 Was Hannibal a Carthagenian? diss 
2 Did Scipio rhe younger conquer 1, erally 
nibal? U. 1 
The Nonlnatius Caſe i is alſo placed The! 
ter the Verb in the Imperative Mord ; a6 ich in 
3 ITE Wn ti en ores 5 
Come you and repeat. 
If the Verb be Neuter the Meni 
is ue inen pied after it. 
The Troops were drawn out, Wbt 
- firſt app eaded the Ring to review ther 
on his right Hand ſ the Queen, Al 


le N 
rthe | 
Ire it; 
ea 
ameti 
noun 1 


Note 
bectiv' 
den it 1 
Adje 
ive w] 


as 

Next to Her ſat the Prince on Horſeback " 

*That Word, Phratc, | or Sentence. is a ent 

8 Nominative which e to abe be G ſoſpect 
| 1 who or what. eee 


2 Fuetin RuDIiMENTS. II 
ee Nominative Caſe is likewiſe placed © 


the Verb, it iit, 2there, or 3then go 

re it; as, 1? fignifieth little, 2There 
ea Man, 3 Then came a Woman. 
ometimes the Nominative Caſe of the 
un is placed after the Verb when the 
uſatrve comes before it; as, Him de- 
J / unto you. Her comme LT unto 


The Subſtantive and the Adjetive. 


[he 4djeive admitting no Change ei- 
rin Gender or Number, muſt agree 
hits Subſtantive in theſe Relpedts, and 

erally goes before it; as, *A good 
V. Diligent Boys. . : 
he Pronoun Adjectives this, and that, 1 
ich in the Plural make * and thoſe, __ = 
2 agree 


1 


— | 

Note here that the Article goes before the 1 
hectivez, except theſe, all, ſuch, and many z I 5 
ien it is placed betwixt the Subſtantive and wn 
Adjective; and it likewiſe follows the Ad- 
re when the Adverbs ſo, as, and how ſtand” * DE .— 
; 35, * Al] the World.” «Such a Wretch.” | 1 a 
ny a Man,” %o virtuous a Woman.” As. = . np 


ſa ligent a Boy yo. ever was.“ lou N a . 
le waz this 1s. : 


Vxouren Rophizurs 


t; as, The Book which (Book) you "A 


> MC. 


Reference to the Antecedent going be- 
it; as, The Gentleman was civil, 

 rifited here Yeſterday. 4 

ſhe Antecedent is found by adGilig Fg 


eſtion with the Relative; as, Who vi- 


| here Yeſterday ? The Gentleman. 


Nate, Every Relative has an Amen Fe 


ich it refers. 


The Relatives 1 09%, 2 which, 37 that 2 
fitting no Change either in Gender or 


be Relative is a Word that relates or 2 


uber, muſt agree with their Antece- 


ts in theſe Reſpects; as, 1 The Man : : 4 | 
vcame Yeſterday. The Woman ub; 
ne To-day. 2 The Stone which the 


ders refuſed. The Boot that py 
er bought for me. | 
Ihe Relative who is appropriated: to 
rlons, either Male or Female, and is 
th of the Maſculine and Feminine Gen- 
; 8, The Boy who truants. The Girl 
bo applies. 
The Relative * which cannot properly ./ 


* 
PSI 


The Relative wits: was u E 2 


fons as well as e as, Our Fachek which 
in Heaven, : 


ry 


r 


— 5 : . < C 
2 i 8 — A b . & . 888 — 4 — 2 1 N f —_— PR - 245 = _ k — — . E - == l 4 oh b — 2 _ 9 
- K — Ag — 3 * o = pI NAS REC! __. — — *. i — 3 %* — bw -- — GC — moat x oo - 3: — a 2. * — — = 1 — ö * N = 9 = : 
— 8 * x; - 7 — — — * — — —_— - — IT. — _ — — — c PERS "PF 2 = 8 a 2 — — 2 E N 5 8 * 
— — — - — _— - 2 5 9 A+ % 2 5 * = — 2 3 M — 8 5 r 1 8 \ 7 T7 i PIR r 
. — A 2 — * —— — - -— — - = 7h * — = = * = — + — —— 4 2 3 _— = 2 P 2 * 7 1 8 * 5 5 * r 5 * 4 
—= — 2 —— = = — 5 A 2 ts - 4. = Tl * wry oy, — 8 "= 4 * —_ 4 5 4 oh T3 ES . r A. r e =. = — = _ 8 
—— RED 8 . a: SEL * r * e 2 1 - is = — _—_ — 8 — — = 8 — ; — — 
- — 2 . * DI © + TLAS a = * — — Cue Ad.” amy co 2 e p = : ga WOODS, = < _ i. A. . - 4 
7 4 * v2 I l a 0 8 — — 5 2 A — 8 71 9 0 ho, * 2 * FTA « r TI 1 
- 5 =. n TY 0 8 — E Tab A RES "< - 
"Xt re Fs - ck ot pr? * g 
eee 


VS 3 I} 


| 124, Exe pf 


.  _ which was dug out of the Earth. 


N both of Perſons' and T, hinge, but is n 
props ly applied to Things; as; 


ble Thing. 


| = ne Subſtantive agreerh wich anoth 
1 Bunk Gag the ſame thing in Caſe; 


Gran. Virgil the o £88 


8 FO ; K n 4 
"ARE? Ns is r Nee 8 5 2 R 
1 Fo 4 1 ** 3 A 17 5 CR I. pb 
8 * F< . * *: oh 2, Day. 
N * 4 — 4 
. 
* 


8 


. a 


Besser 


be applied te Perſons, and is there 
of the Neyter Gender; as, The 


Fs © 7" * ; 
* Wo 17 


0 8 
k of 

in ( 
ce of 
lat 


The Relative that is uſed indifferet 


hoſe Boys that robbed che Ord 

al be beate. 
2: Theſe ate the Apples that were ne 8 
len by. the Boys 2who robbed the Orchi befo 
Ihe Relative alſo agreeth with the W's: 4 
ttecedent in Perſon cauſing the Verb foli hut v 
ing to be the ſame; as, I who n dy t 
IT Thou who writeſt He who cometh, WM Sul 


Sometimes a Sentence ſtands as an 4 
tecedent to the Relative; as, Tou niſed 
ly in the Morning, which i is a commend 


Subſtantive ad the Subſtantive, 


4 he City London. The River Thames. 
In this Caſe the Article may be plac 
petween the Subſtantives ; whe 5 TTY 


Exel 1s een as 
vo Subſtantives linked together by a2 
k of Conjunction agree with each o- 
in Caſe, the former fupplying we 
ce of an Adjective; as, ne . 
V- land. a ene 6 ore | 


Of SubPantives. I 
One Subſtantive governs, another ſtand- — = 
before it in the Genitive Caſe 1 a8, 5 
Anger is low. 2 
But when the Genitive Call is e 
by the Prepoſition of, it follows the o- 
r Subſtantive ; as, The Anger of God 
low. 9 
he Genitive Caſe ſignifying the Mat- : 
of which a Thing is made may be turn- 
into an Adjective, as, An Image 
id; or, A golden Image. A Iatns 7 
uf; or, A brazen e . 


; Ant RY + © A, 
* : 4 - 1 
o ö * 2 
8 : % Wy 


* 


5 What 
N 


32 e — — D _—— — — — — 4 42 CO ICI I. cr 5 a - — 
N S —— Bo hee P „ T = as — „F n 
77... ̃ ik. ̃¼ ̃—: % ͤ . ̃ ⁵˙—ↄ5— nn . F n * 
ET: « a : — W Sa * M1 2 has ns 5 x o T0 3 * 2 3 3 
2 - 1 2 ms 4» ®; ow 8 * 1 S * — a.” Gs 2 — — 4 
r - n F=S Go pen ee Dag == — — A — T - — - — | 2 — — 3 at 
— E * oy o . 7 a T 5 NT2. 8 
1 
> 
<5 2 


=o Re IE * 
— oe — - 


— —j6ä 


5 | OE 
< Wr 8 82 222 2 
—— Tq% SI Spar bt HI TY . — — b "7 © 
= 5 e IGE Cot IG 1 
x ern 8 q A 2 — * — 


27 
2 7 
2 * 
EE 
, * 


= 
r 


8 
FO 


* 


8 


a2 — 29 A 
A — — e . 
. 
S "3 
Sr =» C Ne Is 
— F of "4 * - M4 
n 8 


When there co) n . caſe _ 
een the Pronoun Relative and the. 1 , 
rb, the Relative is the* Nominitive 
ale; as, He is nor happy who DOR: 
the who doethj — 


8 


— 


- "I | Bvonzen Dramaett/ 
3 Ma when a Nominative Caſe ca 
; her nd the Relative and the ve erb. 
Relative is governed by the Verb orf 
| other Word in the Sentence; az, 
commonly hate thoſe whom we fear, 
d Man doeth good te whom he ca 

I Relatives and 2 Interrogatives, ; 

/ " Words that aſk Queſtions, © always 
before the Word that governs them, 
cept 3 ——— as, i He hon 
ſeek. 2Whatare you doing? 3 To ul 

Will he 989 5 
The Sueſtion and Anſwer: to.it nnd 
made by the ſame Caſe of the 1 Nom 
2 Pronoun, and the a Tenſe of 1 

arb; a, ö 

1 Whom ought we to worſhip? | 
. God. 

3 2. Whoſe Book i is chis? 
„ 
3 N What are they e in the Sch 
A. They are Studying. 5 


The Neuter Pronoun it hae 1astl 
| Nominative Caſe or Subject of Diſcourl 
it e 2 che OF. or r 1 


ef "A 


— ny — — — — = - 


. wü Wars. rn I ——_—_— 


— — 
_— 

S% * 

: 

25S 


F EE des os EE DOE = — 
A * *. * * 4 A 1 * 2 : "= * 
* PI 1 4 
W ; 5 5. 2 
: . 1 * > K 8 
0 — 4 4 : þ 


| 
4 
| 
i 
l 
4; 


" 
3 
” 


— 
n 
” C7 
ES 5 
ir P ry 


— 
— — — 
4 2 


— nn > — 2 — — — 
— — — — ͤ —s———— — 


FS FS, 2 


* gee Page 2 Ty 


Fe 
eG 
895 
7% 


1 Rur — - oF _ 
* erfon or Thing : or, 3 the Perſon 
5 ing that is the Cauſe of wy Tres 2 = 
* | hs 2 6 Res 47 
t were done, We tis Jones wen a 
„well if were done quickly. 0 : 5 
is i: with you now my Friend | 7 
ca not I that did it. 5 5 5 5 
we Owl that ſhriek'd, the tara” 


man which gives the ſtern'ſt good 
= 

WA 2 ſelves and 3 own, joined wick 
* Pronouns, are reciprocals, 1. e. 
reflect the Senſe back upon the Per · 
or Thing mentioned betore the Verb 3 


pleaſeth himſelf. 2 7 Joy always 45 
Ito themſelves. 3 Even Brutes love 
r 00n Offspring. 

hen 1 thts, and that, with de Plu- 2 
2 theſe and thoſe are Relatives, i. e. a 
te to fwwo Words in a Sentence going 2 i 
bre, this or theſe refers to the /atter _ 
wareſt Word; that or thoſe 'to the 
ter or fartheſt off; a, 

ins and Alexander were great Cap. | 


"I 3 _manders, 
[For the Parr ch uralt Join to 
a ee Page:? 9 


, N * 98 
— U 1 Ws 
1 1 
nne 
0 f 4 * 1 . 
ö 3 1 
0 de ' z . 
o : : [018 k 5; AN 
J 0 * p > : 2 Been 
„ A . . * — 4 63 it: by” 
g ; ns r 72. if i 85 
' — 5 eng 
d P TY 2 = » $ * 1 A ? [ 
— ( = Y 
. g 7725 , —_— f 
7 . - . \ 2 U $1 l 
* 1 £ 
% F - } ” by _—_ MA > U 
; 4 ; F , 
N \ + oF. ; 1 — „ 
1 » - 1 - - : ro I" »d * 4< * 4 „ « b” 
"TRE $4 3 , 1 — * BLN > * . - ; * wh 
2 . 6 as "6 1 . 5 "oe 2 I AY 22 : - "ia 
8 CE * r . c 1 N —_— 


1868 Wee Rutgers 
' manders, tho? in different Wan 
conquered his Enemies in the open Fi 
that by Stratagem and Cunning. 

2 Parents and Children have nu 
Obligations; tho/e ought to behares 
Tenderneſs and 4 = a theſe with, 

= — e and Obedience. 


Of Adjeftives 


XMoſt Adjeclives govern Subſtaui 
adding tome Circumſtance concerning tl 
Vith ſomeone of theſe Prepoſitions, ual 
2 for, 3 from, 4 in, 5 Fand 610; as, 

I Careful about Life. 2 Fit 2 B 

nels. 3 Free from Misfortunes. 4E 
in Age. 5 Defirous of Praiſe. 6 Agt 

ee. 

1 Partitive, 2 let 31 
meral, 4 Comparative, and 5 Superla 

1 AdjeRives govern. Subſtantives with 
_— Prepoſitions of, or among; as, 
II 1 None of (among) us are without Fal 
1 _ | 2 Which F ; Re Wy en? 3 One 
=_ (9 
1 5 or FE ”s Partitives are Laenes Eg T. 


j | 7 of the whole.  Interrogatives. alk. 9570 10 
= Vumerals are Adjæctives of Number. For G 0 


1 2 


- Paratives and Super ſee To * 


| ExGLISH Ropnaexts | = Rs 
| 7 you. 4 The younger of the x N 
is the detter Scholar. Pp The leaſt * - 
is are to be choſen. 4 1 2X Th 
i: Comparative Adjectives not put 5 Y 4 
rely govern, Subſtantives with 1 1 * = 
than before them; as, - = 
per by half. 2 :Dearerithan Life. 1 2 4 4 A 
ſhen the Prepoſition by is underſtood 86 
omparative Adj. ective ſtands laſt; as, 
uch better, ifs #71 better Tnuch 
greater, 7, e. greater by fa Y 
ljectixes govern Verbs after whe > in 
lufinitive Mood; as, as. %: 
willing to die. * ae to Jane... - == 
djettives: of Likeneſs and Unlikeneſs —_— 
ern Subſtantives in the Acculany = 
but a Prepoſition; as ; x 
hat Boy, i is like his Mother bur wn he 
abet l | 
ldjedives ſignifping N Mets 2 
ngth, 2 Breadth, 3 Thickneſs," "4 
bt, 5 Depth, likewite govern: Sub⸗ 3 3 ; ; 
tives going before them in the; Aceufa 1 
without à Prepoſition;; 3: A. i 
Three ' Yards ng. 2 Te Tard. 
ad. 3 Four Inches thick; 4 Ten: Bay; "=" 4 


8 


2 N 
LE 


323 = 
Wt . n 
——— — 2 
2 bs 
„ 


* : 
2 R 
= &. 9808 5 
EPPS DN DE 


: 7 

— ba - — * * — 
* 5 2 = N * > 2 - 

= ER I Q op EY A IA 

5 by * 1 5 2 * — — — — * EW 222 2 

r —— = Bo. apo 2 
"7 * 2 — a 4 =o Y 
. : . I a « 


5 17 2 5 Wo f To 


2 4 ASP 


4 
4 1 
; . 8 
a — - L 
* 


n 
= $a 


ery Es.” 9 3 * 
n _ 2” Tons. 1 
9 > J 2 0 * — + * 
— % P 


0 FR "— I * * enn 
. * - . 5 TY” —_ "af bh. x SY 8 *» 
\ > bed EK ta * 5 e * — 7 * 
' 7 n a : {FRY * 5 
- . 1 * v 
. 5 1 — 8 I * 


2 "IE * 17 2 5 N 


bete 1811 vb bann, 


1 Of Verbs.” as. 
| | he Verb am with it: Varia 
always a Nominative Caſe both bj 

after it; as, 
Tam he who fuld it. 1 v 

did! . 

But ben it Sovkfeth. Propeth or 
# fo ” it requireth a Genitive (aſe 
Its f 
his Horſe is my Father 4. Thu! | 
"as my Brother's 
In the Infinitive Mood to be, it | 
an Accuſative after it; as, 
Itake this be him. Took pa 
'to be her. 
All Verbs * 7 aun govern 1 
cuſative Caſe after them without a | 
tion; as, 
The Maſter reſpefteth him, who 
 Aieth; but puniſßeth them who are | 
Verbs 2 ranſitive alſo require a 
with a Prepoſition after the Acer 
Caſe of the object; as, 8 
A Wiſe Man des Phat u a 
Rate. I prefer Virtue 10 Sr op 
_ him of Idleneſs. "ag 
= = ee Page 25, "Line i, t Planet 
| eee Verbs. | = 


* * 


a * * 3 * a 19 OY , ON» 3 
By * . : 1 R R . 9 4 CEP * 9 Ws 
; F 5 4 5 7 9 : . 70 q 3 
1. 75 * ; Wl 4 * 0 „ — 
%%% ͤ ¼ N 
* 1 P © — 3 n 7 _ * 


of 
— me —__ 


rio to: or 25 aſh Vers 

3 eſoring, 3 boxing, afeling 
0 The are frequent! as. Mo 
J Father gave me (te me) a 2 del. TY bb | f 
N returned John to 70h 3 i 
2 My Mother bought me (fo) 2 
bs Iakhorn. 4 The -Pedlar. fall it 
u her ) tor Sixpence. Z 
ine how long, and tlie 2 Diſtance of _—_ 
are put after Verbs in the Accuſa-ũ—ẽ 
ichout a Prepoſition; and other. 3 "i 
er Verbs have an Aceuſative of the 4 7 
| expreſſing the ſame Notion. n. 2! 
abuſalah e Nine Hundred Si-. 1 


d Nine Tears. 2 London 7s diſtant 
York two Hundred Miles. 31 dreamt ll 
an. He ſerved a Service. _. > 
Wnoſt all other Verbs gavern the 

following with a Prepoſition goios - 
55 % —_ 
terer happens to 800d Men, they 1 
en ee ee _ 
who is accuſed of a a F Tack 3 is not ab _— 
E 'S 2 1 bit | —_— 
Nhenthe Verb is a Padiee, as in this Ex: 2 728 | ol. 
eee e AG CHOIR} "TOR 


Puniſhment are prepa paren 460 le w 
_ The: Sun. ſhinerh' on the T's and' 
1 Ha S unjuſt. 
8 Tares grow with the Wheat. . 
Men are caught oy TROY as | 
with a Hook. 
one Verb governs anechek in th 
. Mood, and to before the Vet 
We giga; ,,, 51 
The Boy, who defires to Trard; wil 
him, who neglects to ſtudy. 
The Inſinitive Mood | is often uſed 
Fey independently, and- Suppli 
Place of the Subjun@ive Mood Wi 
Conjunction that.; as, 
To confeſs the Truth, you are bt 
Fault: i. e. T; hat I may confel 
Jo begin: i. e. That I may begin. 
T6 conclude : „. e. Thet 7 may, conl 


— ; N 5 
9391 f N ; - 
} L 2 


I. 


- 4 aber the V bed 3 Pie "he Cal 
fore the Verb Active is ſet after the Vert 
* five witha Prepoſition and again the N 
ative of the Verb Paſſive i is the. Accuſati 
ſet atter the Verb Adv. An Examp 
make this plain. 
_ Many blame him. Here. tia Verbid: Adin 
he is Hamed by 18 Here the + cond is 


# = : TP — 7 * n 44 L LA » baked aide, : "0 ** * OY PT Wok 8 * 
* IS. TY : * > $f r ” ** "WW \ l 2 * 9 
3 NN 2 5 r FED * eg nas hs * „ e 
wy * 
* 


815 


ExoI AI Rüpnezur: ng” n 


> foe Mood i is pro perly 10 Pore 
[$ub/antive expreſſing the eee 
Verb, and does the Office of . 
re both in the Neminative 2 nd 
cuſative Caſe ;- AA „ 
miſtake 15 a human baby. 
re to play. ITE 


Of bre * 


A herb is called & Im perſonal, berg; 2 
does not admit of Paricly of Perſons, 
ut is confined to the third *erſon cy a8, 
happeneth 
ancerneth | . 
When the Neuter pronoun d it goat | 
fore a Verb, that Verb is called an in- 
r/onal ; and it repreſents the Nomin- 
uve Caſe; as, eee | 
t blows. e 
thunder s. 
rains. *. in <3. ee 


2 


= — .- — — — 4 _ * SET TRIS 
PS — wort nn, 2 pos, +. = — = x | 
4 4 v — 2 es 1 1 Ez EY 5 CEE LEGS 1 1 me 
a. Cn = r PA Lan 
__ =y —_— 3 Me; PY 4 * = * 
by "fn 3; * 27 A +. = = = La" Wu 
_ r 1 24 _— Dre Is 
r *: es — r 
— -— 1 k - 1 — 
* 


P_ 
yr oa, 


1 


ACER ES 


F * 


n 


1 
Ws © 
wa 
> Us LAS 
Wo 
n 
1 
e 
N 
* 
4 714 
i 
» U 2 
N [5 v4 
1 
e 
ig 
1 
| * 
1 vo 
4 [4 71 
, 9 


9 * 


Nothing can be: more: abſurd Pan to N 
bat Imperſonal Verbs have no Nominative*” 
aſe: for every Verb, being the Word that 
feats, muſt have ſomething. to ſpeak of, and 
latever that be, Word or Sentancey. it ande 
for the N ominative Caſe. A 


0 Sr . ä F 9 3 "I Fe * bel ed 
: * £ - 9 . = 9 212% o * 
DEL FEES A N i — - Z Ex” "24" 308 ny 
. N OY b : 8 a bat if F 3 7 : 
2 : . . 8 Rant. 2 * ve: 

* of ; ; To 2 L . 
* 2 5 © 2 = 
3.1: n 
11 . "7 
_ 
r 1 Ms, 
_.- 
19 N 
; 1 
IR: A 
UE . n 
8 a 
1 We 
"ms . 1 
l . 
. p 
* 


I, Verb. | 1 band no 1 i 
tive Caſe before it, except the Ne 
Pronoun it, but has always a Word 
Sentence expreſſed or underſtood, | 
ſwering to the Queſtion, and which tu 
eth for the Nominative Caſe; as, 
It concerneth Scholars f0 be ow. 
It blows Prong ; 1. e. the Wind 


«& 
FE. 4 
5. 


Of Parti ciplet. 


Participles in ing govern an Accuſat 
Caſe after tbem it bout a Prepoſition, 
the Verbs they : are derived from be Tr; 

Iltive; , 
er Sin, not hin who baue. 


— y 


== 115 the rf Example, pro concave it 
lars to be diligent,” aſk the Queſtion. 
2. What concerneth Scholars? 
4. 20 be diligent. 
I ᷑!Vbe Sentence % be diligent” therefore | 
= padoubiedly the Nominative Caſe to the Vert 
las the ſecond — . * ſirong, 
=. Ak che ueſtion. 4 
What ows ſtrong? | iT Ek 
4 ! of The Wind 
$ „ Word under fo od, but eel ys 


| Neuter yo it. 


* — a * * nen 9 & * 7 Tee, 
a * WAS 1 r . 88 
122 5 KN , , ” 3 * 7 4 * 0 e * g i 
; DG OR” ae. "4 e 
1 4 8 4 


: an following Pleafurerinj ures hi „ 
. ofervi 25 you will bene yolſel? | 
But Palle Participles go ver. the 


0g before, as do the Verbs they e 
2. 

ihrnent prepared for the Wicked. 

fires governed by Reaſon, — 

fe purchaſed at a K 


X 


ut abſolutely and independently; as, 


lock the Door. 


$ acquitted in his own Conſclence. 


chool, the Maſter entering, all are quiet 
But this Conſtruction may me reſolved” 
„e be Participles when, F., after, Wes. fot 
Ven * being then changed into e 
on z as, 
too late, when the Steed 45 unn, „ 5 
lock was Door. get py 1 


62145 13 - 
[a we for bref, ſee Page TY 


7 ” 


2 eee 3 235 8 


Jord following them 20rth a r I I 7 


The Participle with a Noun or Pac wy = 
in before it, in the Nominative Caſe, . - Ml 
| comma'd from the.reſt of the Sentence 


js tgo late, the Steed being fiouens, to. 


guilty Perſon, $ himſelf being Fudge, © 
tere be ever ſo great a Noiſe in the | 


Ne Te Perlen 17 he himſlf be * 
is acquirted in his own Conſcience; 
1 there be ever ſo'great a Noiſe in 
School, after the eee enters, all 

1 1 all and quiet. 

The Participle in ing is ea r 
after Subſtantives and Adjectives with 
Prepoſition of like a 1 " 
The Cuſtom of /y: ng. 

Deſirous living. 


5 And after Verbs, 101 Aged 
theſe Prepoſitions, by, from, i in, and 1 
Fou will learn to write by writing 
lale Boys are ſoon e 
N learning. 2 
{We excells in reading 1 
Horſes fit for running. 
After Verbs it alfo bee the v 
E 5 the Infinitive Mood ; HR 
Fl. Riding, . et Be, RT "I 
I bs Ton like walking, 1, E i6 Falk. 


6 + + 4 5 32 1 


When this R bas an 1 
| before it, it becomes à Noun Subſtanil 
and governs the Word following with 
but when it has 20 Article, and gote 

7: * the N oun e * a Prepoſ 


* 
- 2 

8 
2 4 


Ex6LISH Ropianars” 


ſruteplert as, 


ineſs is be attained by by 150 i | — 


Evil, and by the doing of Good. _ 
this Example he avoiding, and 
ing” are Nouns. + 
Pineſs is to be attained by avoiding E. 
vil, and doing Go 
avoiding and doing are Participles. 
iciples are changed iĩnio Adjectives, 
they are joined to Subſtantives with- | 
wing any Reſpect to Time; . 1 
mg Eagle. n= EF 
teping Tortoiſe. 
med Man. 
ved Image. 


a a Wir. wits 1 
E * 3 Ln. 
8 A * p Py: 10 4 + 
, N A Wt LY 
* * „ il 5 LW 41 
ey allo DEC me 2 wes W jen th = 
[ Hr” STEIN wit 34 14 
b fx" 4; 4a hx *3# it * 
. * <> 6 , 10 . 
4 2 „„ 4 _ 0 7 
* An , Ba $f 
1 * 
+, H F 
＋ * 


t the Degrees of Compariſon; as, ZOOM 


wd, more learned, ot or mane 3 5 7570 _ 


% Man. a0 po LW 


. 0 "5" i 18 
* * 8 
KS _ RL 
„ + _—__ 
7 e 
1 : ; 2 e ZI F 8 0 
1 £ : . 
| 15 2 #44 8 3 
* 4) * * * * i vu j 4 
* ” br, 1 2 - 
: I | 


85 


113 «a 1 7 


N 


i« here neceſſary to obſerve, that many Ems) 7 
ave fallen i ramen groſs Miſtake, by uſing the, Puig, 7 88 
datly for the Noun ; and the Noun for 1 Participle, . . 
Dilinction is plain and eaſy; whenever the Article” | . 
s the Participle it becomes a Nous, and the Pre 


» 4 


f mult follow: but when the Fun rde has no Article: EE 22 7 13 


4 Sing, it never admits the Prepofition of to follow: It; * 


ita in ite Participial Sate. See this men s 'Y . 


imop of Oxford 6 a Page wy” ; 


3 e 
70 5 
2 * "4 ; $5.6 4 
5 "And 2 1 
: \ Y & . io 
. } F 
* . SEP cf * > * FA 7 IS 
/ * Y 4 — 5 1 
” * 2 " d 
- 0M 2 38 " 
of I. 1 - * 9 
hs 1 4B * 0 2 


8 RES 
- 4 OS "2. 17 
. * bl 2 * T 
| * 42 i 
- = If 0 1 
a vs; Vo. A, Y — 
* * Jy 
"vg — 
9 Þ 
+ 
2 
55 


: Ep Ec: puny <E 

— >. 7 he x7 
US > NE ESE; 
=—— & 


3 k 1 
d * 12 
— 9 


NL 


* 


— 
N 8 = 
85 "+ | 


I 
EE 


© 
= ba 4 
* . * 
— OS —_—_ 


ME And: alfo' 1 a . are con un 
TY a Prepojition,, which the Verb/ h 
are gerived from cannot, Ai in 


55 bias, OE 
nbecommg, 51% unbecome... 


0, ern, 55 to ht 


- 


"teh ED 3 no N N 4 
Adverbs are placed neareſt the Wa 


are nexeril 


[if * 


= char are moſt affected by them; as, 
. 25 N hriſtians ought to. Hive agreeably wn 
Las of Chriſt. 

non, er was @ very ancient and ver) Gl 


lent Poet. - 
e are placed baſis Adjefine 
Tut moſt uſually, after. Verbs; as, 
ts Lliad is a very excellent Poem 
ians 2 ght to prey 1 and jn 
= 72 oh be pale, the Adverdi 
F Zgenerally-placed betwixt var tne e Prindpala i 
14/4 F etb; 5 Fes | 
by te as, well and very eee 
: | n . I. e. two. Adyeeis 
2 in Engliſh are to an 
wation; LY „ 


c W 
5 1 ' 277 As n 
* a 1 „ 19427 G i 
ZW oor - . — : 
* 0 8 * 24 * oy * 
4, „ , 7 2 8 BE 5 # N 
7 2 * 9 5 5 e . s 5 
7 : * 15 ; 8 "IA N 2 N A 7 7 7 
* 3 


TFuen ken Ropinzürs =e: 135 „ 


# they not. perceive, 1. 6. r a 
2 8 e ee 
of Conj rden. i 
ome Conjun&ions have a Gove! ume 
oods. 
ome require the Indicative, ſome the © 
anctive; and others have no Sten 1 
Lhe Moods at all. I 3 
he Conjunction , though, unleſs, f -x-. = 
whether and or, require a Sehne, = 
| ſometimes an Indicative Mood; , 1 Th 
hon re/tore her not. Gen 20, 7 3 * 0 2 "The 
thou doſt well. Gen. 4. 7. _.-- —_ 
ough he live a "thouſand Years: reite "I 2 
ng) thou "would needs begone. Gen _—_ 
leſs es waſh his Plehn in water. . 
aſs thou hadft ſpoken. 2 Sam. 2. 27. - 
pt thou bleſs me. Gen. 32. 26. 
xcept thou Hadſt baſted, 1 Sam. 2 5. 14 5 
'bether thou be my very Son Etau or note 0 
Gen. 2 7. 3 
bether 55 OE ſeen or Ktiown af 3 


When theſe Conjunton i re 
1 2 


3 


8 


rn 
8 
=P ” = 3 5 i 


44 1 
od 
ol 
"ks 
Mi 
# 3 
" — 
Pp 
e 
WA 
1 
x 
hs 0 by, 
Y 
Py 
q 


j 
1 
* 
._— 
% v 
17 
3 
9. 
WF 
= 4 
* 93 
er! 
ae 
” 4 
4 1 
. y 
.. : 
OTH by 
e 
e 
1 
4 1 
* of 
74 
4 
4 
i 


— 


y 7 
f 
1 
199 
it 
: 
HW." 
2 


In 
} 

1 

U 

j 
n 
rh 


4 7 ff 
* N - 
3 * 

F o W 

Ou Bet th 1 


Een Ne „„ 
che 825 junftive Mood the Verb 98 


2 doubtful Manner, but when to the! 
cative it expreſſes a fixed and detem 
Senſe. 

The Conjunction ! hat, with may, ni 
' ſhould following, expreſſing the Mot 


* 7 =\ 


— 
— ——_—_— * 


| | oug 


her 
ther 
hethc 


r 
—B S = >: 
N 


39 


by 

——_— — _— 
— — — 
» : 


| houg, 
1 or End requires the Subjunctive Mood 
= Sit thou at the 1 able, that thoy blac 
= „„ | with 
a Tou wenteſt out that thou might ide he- 
1 Thou art ſent hither that thou ſhould be- 
1 The Conjunctions, let, and that ith 
à Verb of the Imperative Mood, or N- 


ther. 
10 
l; ly 


r 


- Tenſe implying a Command, requin 
Subjpivr Mod; as, 
Love not ſleep, leſt thou come to o pore 
+ Prov. 20. 13. 


Take heed, that thou ſpeak not to Ja 


the 
Gen. 31. 24. d 

The Conjunction 365 governs te 
tive who but no other Word, in the och 
Kae Caſe „ as, 85 pf, tiv 
\. Beelzebub, than whom, _ atly 

Satan except, none higher 1. Milton, 

The Conjunctions which anſwer to e 
1 "cher 3 in differen Members "A 2 ns Pre 
Are 0 25 following ; 3 2 e ( 


1 5 4 1 < Saks 4 _- 
* TT ITY "ed N Sn A R * 5 
r A Cota oe eo ee rs 0 . 2 
Le AV +. 72 * "7 8 - x" 
: 1 R 2 L p « : \ L 2 4 CF EY : 
* >, Las 4 9 . 3 7275 1 %. 22 8 A 7 6 Kg 
3 1 5 . re. — 4 : 5 
in * ” u Po. 0 - re 1 2 £ +61; & 
5 „ 4 [ p . » 9 - 4 ” 9 9 4 1 1 » . * * 
F, ” TE, 1 * g K. 1 7 WG.» ; v 85 „ 
4 . AY” . 5 e 3 s . 
V e ON . 1 ; } 
1 4 * 4 Es 


| Excz1an „ RvpmuanTs | 5 Tr 1 
yet, or or neverthe- nd 


bh) 2 * 3 
FILE as, or 10. [lets 5 
her . b ” OD <i> - 7 ** 2 
ber wt 0 2 wo 
152 all ſhall be ended, get will” = 
| not I. oo +, >> 
black as a Coal. MM „ 
vith the Servant, 2 with © Maſter. - 
ther the one, or the other.. 
ther the one, nor the other. | 
ther the one, or the other. 
Nr is frequently uſed in Poetry tor by 
ther, and or for either; as. MM 
r (neither) love nor fear the Man. 
0 af ning Pa ons hear, and fink and _ 
the rich Harmony: or (äber ſwells, or 
et. +, WM 
Camberg = 
Other ConjunRions. expreſſing a Thing 
ſttiwely and we ae the In- _— 
ave Mood. RE 


_ - or E. 1 
Prepoſitions always met an 2 1 1 
e (aſe; a, * 


1 
p $ i 
3 f 1 
Fl : — * 42 2 
: 5 my" 8975 1 
* > 0 . * 4 RR 
— 9 1] 
o . , 7 * , 3 3 
\ : « . 0 0 . 5 a | ! l 1 
/ k . . 1 8 1 
- N 1 
x ' . 8 N 4 
: « k * * 4 ” N 2 18 
* 2 41 4 _ 4 9 9 * 7 jt 
* 


= Age. With oe 95 - "Th tho 
= The Prepoſition and the Relative 


7 governs are'often parted ; the Re 
_ ſtanding in the former, and the Preps 


= y in the latter Part of the Sentence; 
3 Hei is a Perſon whom [ ain much pl 
= with, 
"This is a Truth, - ba You « on not u 
'be informed ofo "ic 
"Whom do you ſpeak s? * » 
But this Manuer of Expreſſion 
not ta be imitated, as the Prepoſitio 
ways ſtands moſt graeefully before 
 \Relarize; 6, 
ge is a Perſon with! whim Twi 
i hs © pleaſed. 8 
This is a Truth, of which you e don not 
* F > "to be informed, _ 
To whom are you ſpealding? - 
A Prepoſition in Compoſition freq 
17 gives a new Seßſe to the Verb 
Which! it is compounded; £ 
-W return, to withhold, to under t 
The Prepoſition placed after the 
> Gnd not properly making a Part of i 
- Feds the Signification of the Ford) 
5 _ a it a new Senſe; ; * 


3 . > s 3 5 
” - , I . 1 
— wy * 


| Ex6L1SH Ruphürnrz * 23. 
ow downs. to paſs on, to go e 


"3 


to caſt p. 
a Prepoſition ſet after a Verb bath: 


ature of an Adverb, ſo the A „ 
here, where, with a Prepoſition ſub- 
J have the Nature of Pronouns; asg 
f, thereof, whereupon. 


Of Interjections. i "4 


erjections have no Government or- _ 
nand over Words; 3 the Nominative - N - 
of Nouns, and the Indicative Moods” 15 
e Verbs ſtanding with them in the FFP 
Sentence, being not at all influenced... | 20 Is 5 pl | ; þ 
emed by them” © 0 RR Hd 8 


— 
i. 


— 


. 


= 


FED: = 
= = 


—ä— — = 


; _ ————— ——_ l . 
* R 2 1 — — 2 5 = 
— — — — 


— 


— 


ca Syntax or caffe. 1 


tical Conſtruftion. is when a 0 rd TE 
ords are left out which are : necel 4 of 95 


8 pleat the Sentence; 15 a, „ - Wo 
10 I ing S at fa 4 5 i. e. 5 * Li, of. | 5 25 2 Wo 4 Fic 
hs. JJ DO 
e Nominative Cale. to the Verbs. 10 1 * 1 
underſtood ; as, 5 XL 2} % 
t came, ſaw. and conquered; i 

æſar ſaw, and Cæſar conquer red 4 
erh alſo is frequently underil ke 


n 


2 4 5 — — 4 TN. TT 
** 2 * 2 26:4 5 2 
bo PF l . * bu 4 mY - 
* > % 7 
N 2 * * 
3 & * F 
+" 


Ld Ker 
>. * 


(> 
* 


55 2 8 4 # 
ts; MM 4”. 
* , * N N 
Gy, "2 Cor a 7 s 
A 8 OE 
4 
1 


bete su nur Dbikxrs : 


© Give G y to God ; Alles ance iu 
King, ; and Honour, to Ty Sree 
give Allegiance: to the Kirg; and 
- Honour, to your Parent, *; 4: 
The Subſtantive i is often naderſon 
. the Adjective; „ 
5 The Righteous;. he Wicked; ice, «Po 
"EY III is an eaſy hard, or difficult; i.e, 1] 
2 The Relative is underſtood to the | 
75 5 Zeecedent <- . 
"7 he Book: Tread, i. et 1 7 a 
2 And the.  Antetedent to the Relative; 
i . 4 Kenne of Covetouſneſs, which ee 
| 5 ee is Idolatr y 
wo © What includes both dhe Relative 
"Ye Antecedent; as, 
This was what < the Thing whith ) be 
. ſigned. | 
= 5 The Noun governing the Geuitire 0 0 
3 it, is ſometimes e 
St. Paul's s; i. e. Church. 
St. James's; i. e. Palace. 
When the Noun is Abrede before 
. | Genitive Caſe, i it is Ons underſtood 
ger T1t--"ag 
The Palace i is the King? 5; i. e. Hei 
Falace- „ 


* 


el. eee is 85 5 
8, Pi | #l's Church, - ry. 


tive Caſe, thi ait rr ö 
fter this, © an that; 48, | 


Palace) is the King's 

Church) is Sf. Paul's 5 Church. Og 

| che Words of a C ueſtion that 7 ol I | 
the [nterrogatiye; are. underſtood in 
Anſwer; as, „ 
0 howas the firſt Ro T 

ulgs Cæſar bs e. was the. 


= 
= 


(ho is the beſt Scholar in the 8 „ 


py - 


orge 1 e is the be(t. St 

he Sign 70 is under . ood. before che 
mtrve Mood, , after t fe. Verbs, bid, 
need, male, ce, < 

let, aud babe, not ers 

lbs; „ 975 2 

bim go i. Ps to goo... 

dare not ſtay i i. e. to ſlay. 

need not want 1. e. to, 

le him oy A 1. Soc ö 

joe "bi is un 


— 
— 
— —— — ir ln es. a> 
——_— OSS < 
- , - . 


— 


— — 2 ws ns * L 4 
2 — 7 * 


1 = 

2 — q 9 = 
= Een Ea —— 

— . —— ———— 
— — 4 * = 


. en es ns es 


#4 


5 5 e 
+44 . * 
— T2 ". N 75 g 
Fo i w_ \ 
4 p * » * . 
5 : . 
* * + - 
* * i 
1 5 
* 3 " N 
bY. .& E. , 
* 4 * * * 
py 1 2 BET 
2 ” * . 2 
* ! 7 1 4 i 
„ 8 
* 5 * * 
5 0 
. * 


9 1. 
The e TRAY is 
fined; as, . e 
igen, f i. . 
you wont” be. agen * 
he Conj unctions if, and though 


ia * 


dvs the Principal or help to Verb; 4 


f ; underſtood. heb the Nominative Case 


AL earn hie ever fo well i. 


he done this, i. e. i be Ht done 
E Prepolitions fo, and for, are 
5 1 bur chi efly Before the 


4 A 


fy 


24 185 2 Pen. Site g n | | 


me 


teh me) 1 Hoſe,” * 
1. 45 n 
© "The Prepoſttion in, © Tok hs Gf 
 Herſtood betore Nouns * } 2 


— 


— > . 
AS, ee e 


Day, i.e eren 
mitted; . 
riful) and 7 hope Fer ul! 
ent and due... 
\Somerimes the Mu, M 
"tence is ommirted ; 83 


N 1 15 Te hag ö * * 17 I 
* 4 A 1 3 

* | EY 

0 


kreis Runners 


Ba is mindful, iris, onto uh, 
0 in ey 0 Aer TO * e 1 gent ; 


1 


& 


— ory Ribs 5 | 15 
5 ing "a to the Examples: $4 Þ i 


Foregoing Grammar, Rules. 
«1 TheNominative Caſe and the Verb. 


A 

| 1 

- Pp: 

« 4 Fang 


£04 
4 


* 


he Verb agrees with the Nomina- 


Cale, Gr; . 
wple 1. John reads, bs {hou playeſt. 


Reads is a Verb irregular of that Class 


ch ſhorten or alter the Diphthong, 


ſe 71. Preſent read, paſt reid, parti · 24 1 
e reid, Indicative Mood preſent Lone -J 3 


wud, thou readeſt, he readet h, read. 


The Verb reads is the 3d Perſon 1 
lar, preſent Lenſe Indicagwe, and I 9 9 
teeth with the Nominatiye (Ie 7 Dy nh, 5 ; 1 10 
lich is of the 3d Perſon. Rule Page e, Ml 
[Nouns and Pronouns are of the third, 
erſon, except . I, thou, we, ye or you." "7s - 
Playeſt is a Verb . regular. Rule 


ie 69. All Verbs art regular wien 
le paſt Time and the perfect Participle 
e formed by adding . to the Verb“ as 


lay, 11 ed. Indicative Mood Pen: . 


ene J Play, 8 TOY. be. #3 aye! 


— _— 
© dab ATE ana Se Zh ihe * TS 
A FRAR" "A 8 ON WW” 0 I EE x 44S 
3 - * ; wit ns; * N . # >: 7 8 * "1 4 K. 6 v 
A : "LY 1 . 4 . LS | 15 1 * 
VPP 13 3 = >. 
a Wo OY ITY 5 3 
» [97 A i — 1 4 05 s 
£ * L — W ” I . 5 GS. N Ws * 7 N 
% % + + $9 © 
2 748 Fuel 18K 4: * 
& 5 2 FL | 1 #3 
l 405 4 . 


wih 
Ird ve. 
2 
ample 
„ Ret 
and 
fe tb 
n, tho! 
amp 
diffe: 
is a h 
fe 43. 
ular, 
Plur 
he 2d 
agr 
and 
xam 
the ] 
dle t 


"x &e. playelt is he 24 | Perle 1 f 
ar, preſent Tenſe Indicative and . 
with the Nominative Caſe thou whit 
of the 2d Perſon. Rule as above Page 
- Example 2. A good Boy ſtudies, Ae 
Boys traant.:- 

= Stidierhs a Verb Neuter 510 fu 
= een Indicative Mood ipreſem Tel 
I /udy, thou ſtudieſt, he ſcudleth or ſul 
Studies is the 3d Perſon ſmgul 
. preſent Tenſe Indicative, and agrees 
. the Phraſe a good Rr. 
FTryuant is a Verb Neuter regular. 1 
ant, truanted. Indicative Mood preſ 
Tenſe, Itruant, thou truanteſt, he tru 
eth or truants ; wwe, ye or you, they tru 
 ©Truant is the 3d Perſon plural, prelt 
= - Indicetive, and agrees with the: Phra 
_ . Boys, | 

n n 32 20 keep a r Gall 
OO over the Puſſions enables Man to be M 
3 © kl of himſelf. „ 6 Wt 
_ Enables is a Verb Agive regular, 1 
1 "ible; enabled. Indicative Mood preſe 
=. Senſe, enable, thou enableſt, he enabia 
or enables. &c. Enables is the 3d Perl 
gular, protons . atzen 7 


Rale 
Pula; 


- 21 . 
. if _ * 6 ® 
| + 
5 . 


i een La ot $i 7 5 
——_— 2 2 ö E To Le <a PY 1 * 9 X 7 x 4 N * nr Y * 7 
rr n e 8 7 TT 4 
r + % 50 . d n 4 : N 8 2 * 
3 . / 25 * . * * p 
*: 1 * 
x F 


1er the P aſfuons. - 
0 


ample 1. John, thou, and I read and 


1, thou, and J. 


differently treated by the Maſter. 
is a helping Verb. Am, was, been. 


Plural, we, he, or you, they are. Are 


agrees with the two Phra hy 
and bad Boys ITY 


the Paſſions, cur 


tive, and agrees w 


the Appetites, and bridle the Tor 
Rule 3. If theſe Nominative 10 
ular be of NENT N Ge. 


2 Tawo or more Nominative Caſes ge. | 


. Read and ſtudy declined as before. 
1 and ſtudx are of the plural Number 
wfe there are three Nominative, Cates v7 


xample 2. A good Boy and a bad Boy $ 


e 43. Indicative Mood preſent Tenſe 
ular, I am, theu art, or you are, he 


be 3d Perſon plural, preſent Indicative 


xample 3. To kee 7 a Proper Gong 5 
the Appetites, ane 

ule the Tongue, enable a Man to be per- 
lf Maſter of himſelf. Enable declined 
fore, is the 2d Plural, preſent In- 
th the Sentences, . Ml 

Keep a proper Gaurd over, the Ts 


" Fxcir 11 Won __ 5 140 —_— 
leich the Sentenes, D #eep 4 paper _ 


* £ \ 5 om * 
N >= "74 "07 9 , * 0 2 * we 
a> . N 8 * 7 W * N £54 v7 TR 2 ita adi. * 4 ® PR 1 . 
* " oy "4 7 G ET ES E197 2 be an oi a 
oo A AE 4 Ye, 1 FT Fa 1 OC OE”. SS. 5.4 „ 9 8 
i *. 4 . n * Y x z 1 » pc * ey 3 1 Ik * 
. 4 : / 


WY 70 TOY "7 5 br TN n "TY N | 
1. wW bangle . Then ** I. dy, ul 
; 4 * pa our Reward. Study; a: Verb dec 
10 / : 5 before, is the 11}. Perſon plural, 
agrees in Perſon; with the | Perk 
more worthy than the the ad Perſon 
And we: the Pronoud declined Pay 
refers to its own Nominative 'fingu] 
more worthy than the 2d Perſon thu 
Example 2. John and you fudy and 
have your Reward. Study 2d Perſon 
ral preſent Indicative, . agrees in Nut 
with the two Nominative Caſes Joh 
+ you, but in Perſon with you, the an 
/ - worthy than John the zd. 


j! 5 0 * And you the Pronoun declined 2y | 
W refers to its own Nominative you oft 
' Perſon more worthy than John the 
| Rule 4 A Noun of Number or Multitud 
9 Þ Example J. The Fary i 18, or are i 7 
nuelled. Is inpannelled or are inparm 
"A Verb Paſlive formed from the paſt 


9 4 
In if 
i 1 
4 
Wt 3 . 
1 1 . ; 5 n 
5 


Fett Parriciple and the helping Verb 
©, 9 Note, Page 42. Indicative Mood pre 
Tele, Ian impannelleg, thou artin 
4 5 £ = 4 IE / ed „he i 14 empannelled; 5 due, Je, or 
3 1 are Ie e I 3 


+. 
, 5 . f 2 5 . 
v7 * N * 
8 5.9 
SENT, 
4% 1 : 
p bs 


: 4 
+ ** 33 

. 1 7 , 

r 5 N 0 
r 5 * „ 4 
# % X 
5 . 

* 


* > 


* r 3 A 
a ea * l - * PAD; 5 
* N 5p. ON Ws ; 
os M7 FEI $ 
1 FR £ * « -» 
a | , Ah I . 
Ag - { p C * OY A 
a 9 3 
£ 4 — 


krone 1 By 


he Wi Perſon Plural, and agree n 
onn of Number Fury: which re q 
erſe E ſingular Or plural Verb. | % 42 
m_ lanple 2. The Mob ir, or are tio- 2 
. indicative Mood gd Perſon fingi- 
ind ave: Indicative Mood 34 Perſon MM 
i, agree with the Nominati ve Caſe 1 
„a Noun of Multitude, hic 1 
ts either a fingular or plural Verk. 3 2 I 
ule 5. The Nominative Caſe beingube | 
ape: 1 Monnibaf A Carthagenian 9 1 1 *l 
wered Scipio. Hannibal is a Noun; * 
lantive proper. Rule, 3 9. _þ 
n Subſtantive proper, is a Name 
er io any particular — or Place. 
uanibal is the Nominative Caſe ly; | 
in eh before the Verb cangueredld. 
ale 6. If a Queſtiun be alked; Recs. 4 
m. i. Was Hannibal 1 RR 
he Nominative ' Cafe Hannibal 
* the Very was becauſe aQuell 
ted, 7 
hample 2 . Did 8 the. 
quer Hannibal? 
cipio the younger the Ne 
laced Aer the helping 
e a Queſtion'i is . 


— 
£ 


ag © 4 — FF 


* I's N 3 3 — ſ— te mer wor a 
. ot yd —?— 4g — — = ſs . 3 NI 
7 * = \ 2 - — A pars 2. _ % 2 
N * hy AX” a E * 7 * : = 
— * mn * — er __ 
8 4 3 7 b 


. 
3 


ä 
1 


* — —_— 


12 * +; 4 2 | 255 4. i : 1 5 Fs * ; 3 f 1 . 85 if £ 
* - 3 


. keene. 


 Rute 7. The Nominatve Caſe is 

| Waced after the Verb Kc. 8 
Example 1. Go you to Jour Soak or 
Wu is a Pronoun Subſtantive dec ical 
eg 19, the Nominative Caſe: pliceWMhinati' 
ter the Verb go in the Imperative Mo bec 
Rule 8. If the Verb de Neuter I Exan 
5 | Nominative Gee Mats bo | Man. 
Example 1. F 110 0 the Kin d, P. 
M King a Noun Subſtantive common, ii of 
. . 8 Page 15. Nominative Caſe ing bet 
* der after the Verb Meuter appeared. Wrunp 
E: * ene 2. On his right Baus fiow em 
Alleen. | it . | ned 2 
3h Fe "Queen a . Subſtantive common eingu 
1 cClined as Prince with the Article the, . bec 
Nominative Caſe fingular ſet after ule 1 
verb Neuter food. & of tl 
"i . Example 3. N ade Her ſat the rr | boy 
0 aPro 


ive C 
e him 
oun 
trample 
Non 


Ye Sy 
Adjec 


j = Er he Prince 2 No oun "-Subſtagiire c 
T : f me 1 decline d Page 1 6. N omi nati ve ( 
PRE. ar ſet after che Verb Neuter ſat. 
ale 9. The ee e is f 

File el. Kc. n 
22 an Ad kin, its , 


3 * "od 
* ; 8 * ety 
« * W * * 7 *; 
5 ; — * * o "21 
» 8 * 
1 4 


1 Subſtantive ! is ofrent 
Wjedtive, Little, N 
y or Matter being untevſtood, fe. 
cal Syntax Page 144 Nule is the. 
tinative Caſe ſer after rhe Verb igni - 
| becauſe it goeth before the Verb. 
Fxample 2. There came a Man. 
4 Noun Subſtantive common de- 
, Page 16. Nominative Caſe ſingu- 
6 after the Verb came, becauſe there 
before the Verb. | : 
xample 3. Then came a Woman 
1 2 Noun Subſtantive 5 | 


ned as above, Page 16, Nominative. » 


eſngular Number ſet after the Verb 


c becanſe then goeth before the Vethe' =_ 


Inle 1o. Sometimes che Non ä 
gal the, &c. 5 e 3 13 ICIS Fen. 
ample 1. Him declare 1 whe yon. 65 8 


[2 Pronoun Subſtantive; Page 19, Nen 3 = 
ine Caſe after the Verb declare, 2 Ro 


e him the Accuſative Caſe, of 1 


Can 3 = 
Moun he cometh before the Verb. 1 8 =o pf 70 2 
ample 2. Her commend I unto them." „ 


K Net after che 


5 . 
7 


* 24 Rr RT . R N 
N 4 o 3 ” 2 Sens * * 3 
N * 4 N " 9 4 18883 er 
N + * * * * * + 
1 £ : ee 
of FOLLY E * & 
s — — 


| A 4 b ; 3 4 : 


; . 5 154 "Hera Rovi ens - 
. he Sub antive and:the 19 
Aue 11. a Adjective Aj 
| Change either in Gender or Number, 
Y / 24 Example 1. A good Boy. 
. Good an Adjective having neither 6 
der, N umber, or Caſe. See Rule. 
Engliſh Adiectives, &c. 
"A Good is irregular in its Compariſon 
1 296; better, beſt. See Rule Page 24, 
0 Some ou. Adjeftives &c. 
1 9 the Adjective agrees with the) 
# Fe.  Mantive B and goes before it, but 
Article 4 nf. before the Agjedlin 
"il wat if W 
6 do's 2.  Diligent Boys. 

" Difzent. an Adje@ive admitting 
0 Rule Page 22, agrees with, 
goes before its Subſtantive Bor in 
Plural Number. 

Z** Rule, 12. The Pronoun Adjedtinest 

and that, t.. 
. 85 Example 1. Take away theſe Bok 
* . oo; heſe a Pronoun Adjedtive the pl 
* of thin, which is declined to exp 
= 3 "ong Rule Page 20. This, that 
3 < #her, Cc. agrees with the Subſtan 
— Boote i in Number. 

+ Example 2. Shew up theſe Ls 


br VN 15 thy Ps * 1 * P 
s e A. 
ee, 4 ronoun A yo ecti 
”. Is 8 1 2 1 
2 oO 
- _ n % 


EN 2 
* n 
* Be 
* 1 


n x5 of n * 

+ þ . * e Th * . 

* l 8 9 S * [PRE MES. a "4 * n * 
WW.” 8 N N 7% 5 R 8 Fs FE ” * * 
* 5 "7D Ro why oe EE » n 8 n [ 

24 \ A ” * 1 * 1 + 

; Ce NRC i een. an 8 25 | FA F 

5 A . 2 22 * s 


E 3 Re DIM mY 


bet. Rule, Page 20, agrees vith 4. 
ſantire Excerciſes in Number. 
e 13 Each, every and either agrees | 


. 


0 el 
er 4 

dung, CFE. | 6, _ 
"33. * . * * T0 A 
p l 3 by L * 16 5 A0 

4 a » <4 1 

© = W b 77 

4 75 15 

719 


Example 1. Zach Moy? e 
his an Adjective and agrees with * 
Subſtantive Man, in the ſingular N 


cannot ſay each Men. 
Example 2. Every one for himfalf..- 


very is an Adjedive, and agrees Copa © - 1 


ſtanding for one Perſon in the ſingu- 
and cauſes the reciprocal Pronqun 
j/if to be of the ſingular Number alſo. 
e Page 127, Rule, Self, ſelves, and 
m, &'c. But this Adjective every may _ py ] i g 
joined to plural Subſtantives 4 
ne, every twelve Days. See Note P 122 
Example 3. Either Bey! knows how: 0 


1 N 4 


quit himſelf properly. _ 
Ether an Adjective agrees. with hes 


ſtantive Boy in the fngular only, <a A 0 
aſe the rociprocal Pronoun himſe to 


ingular alſo. See Page "21, | ule | 


% Sc. We cannot ot fay either Boys. "= | "0 | 3» 


Kale 14. If ſomerhing depend opal He " 
| — 


* 0; r * x 
# * 1 
« * 2 . F . * 5 
# T Fes wy 27 of 3 
: , 3 . 
* > 2 * F % y >> 
4 2 > * 
f "TT N 2 83 
F 7 +t Ls "> 
* 4 * * . — 
1 . ** * $48.54 — * < 
— * * 
- A Potty 5 
5 
* — \ 9 9 1 Va 1. 11 7 
1 


en . A Man þ fngul ; Tos in 510 l 
The Adjective fingular. ſtands afte 
| Subſtamtive Man, becauſe i in his May 


pends upon it, aud, is goxerned by 
Dag”) | | 


Rule 15 If two or more. Adj jeftives& N 


me. 
Wk is 


; Example. A Prof, pelt charming ben the A 
- ful, and romantic. eden 
” The Noun Subſtantive Propet sta, an 


4 becauſe the three Adjectives cha ei aft 
RG beat ul and romantic depend ph 

8 agree With it. 5 
d 16 E the Adjedive becmphateati 
E- Fxam ple. Eine George the third. 
3 2 Ihe Adjective bird in This Place bay 
3 Fe is let atter che Subſtan 
7 George, . 
- Rule 17. In Poetry the 8 


2 ene 1. Powers Amine. 


x. aer its Se J al 


be 8. The Untecedent 124 


lie. The Boot which 7 Book, | 
Int is a Noun. Subſtantive declined - 
* Article the. Page 16 It is the - 
xcedent or goeth before the Relatiye 
x, and is underſtood. or may be r re- 
ed after it. 
ule 19. The Relative i is a Word ti . 
es &c. 5 | : 5 | wr Re N 
ample. The Gentleman e a 
niited here Yeſterday. 5 
Who, Pronoun Relative declined wit : 
pound whoſoever Page 21. Who is 
Relative in the Nominative Caſe, and 
m to its Antecedent Gentleman going 
i ge x. e 
nee 20. The Antecedent is fo 
tin ; alking the 
e Leſterday? 
di in the Anſwer, As Gentleman... 
e 21. The Relative who, which, 
hi l, c- 
gn ample Is 


he 


— 


8 > _ LN „ 
J — Ss _— pl 7 Wo; 
— _ — ; 65 — - 2 J "cu & 
— . W 2 "4 Fi —_ b 2 
—— p _— y =, G * " 
— = 8 —— K a l 5 * — 822 
— ey 8 K * * o A 1 ' 6 
4 n —= 4 < l $2 - 


8 


* 4 Example 2. The Girl who applies 


35 . 5 a Gender ſingular Number, and ag 


4 with the Antecedent Woman. 
5 retuſed. 


Fs aways to be, Neuter, and reel“ vith 
Antecedent Stone. 


bought for me 


1 Neuter Gender finguler Number ag 


The Relative 1 is Nh of the f 
wich the Antecedent Man. 
Example 2. The Woman who eu 1 
Day Y. 1 5 n ; \ 


The Relative who is word of the e 
mine Gender ſingular N umber, and a 8 


Exam 3. The Stone which che Bal 


The Relative 10 b is 3 28 it 00 


Example 4. The Book that my I 
The Relative that, Wilen is ber 


Wich! its Antecedent 3 


Aule 22. The Kelative who! is 11 


princes Ke..“. 
Example 5 5 The Boy who een 
- Who is Maſculine and agrees with 5 


Who is Feminine and agrees with 6 


. 2 Thus whois either Maſculine or Femial 


- Rule 23. The Relative: _ call 
poppy © bc. e ee 


ampl 
ff the 
hach 1 
Antec 
zut 2 
ote. 
e24 
xamp 
rch: 
he Ri 
es W 
ons. 


Treti Nester _ 
mple. The Lead wür was aug _ 
f the Earth. 4 „ 
lich is here a N eater and agrees ; with == 
can atecedent Lead. 5 ROM 
it which was formerly Maſculine; - 1 
* ote Page 123 Our Father which &c. ' nl 
e 24. The Relarive that is uſed Ke. 13 "li 
xample 1. Thoſe Boys that robbed i 
rchard muſt be beaten, _ Fu 
he Relative that here relates to, ae; A L. i 
es With the Antecedent Boys, bing” mn 
xample 2. 1 heſe are the Apples that 85 1 
ſtolen by the 275 who raves rhe | I I 1 
hard. | | 2 — 2 15 
be Relative that here cl wy a. = 
ees with the Antecedent Bs vey - A 
wa „ 
le 25. The Relarive alſo agrecth lc. _—_ 
. 1 
be Relative 2% agreeth with the NL 1 1 
dent of the ft Perſon I, and cauſes nl 
Verb read, which follows it, to . 1 


the firſt Perſon „ 755 1 © 
Example 2. Thou 90 DIO "ol 1 A 9 
he Relative 205 agreeth. with . "i 
tecedenr of the W engen an, = 


OBOE + GY . 
Ge: EOS 
EEE u 2 


. 
— - 


** 


N * - 9 * rn]. 
* — Ce Sed 1ie Ta eg 4 IE" RS 22 R , 2 ” o 
* 7 R 8 . 5 = * * 3 . 98 * 1 4; wt 7 / th. * * oP : Sat 1 . N R *. . "TY 
«7 * * ” 7 PAY 3 4 2 3 SPIT „ £ . * 22 4 1 — . re N el 2 N I 
> F 4 7 4 4 © 4 4 7 Py * 2 * WP. JEET 1 
* R 2 * 188 , 3 N { > 7 NV « 4 „ "RS. T5 4 LIES * „ . 9 a 
EY EOF, 233 \ wn OO IC 
: P * * - 33 975 2 : F. * * 2 _ CBE IT 
* A os * * * 8 z ® 7 3 2 , 
8 8 . = 4 o FER 7 


: . 1 the verb writeſt to bed 


| = 'R Rule 27. One Subſtantive'agreeth & 


* : 5 
3 Ps 7 
* . 
— 2 4 5 
* 


5 55 agrees in Caſe with. River I 


N Ki EE | 6 


Second Perſon alſoo. 
Example 3. He who cometb, 
The Relative 200 is here of the tl 
Pere and agrees with the Ante e 
he of the ſame Per ſon, cauſing the V 
. cometh to be of the third Perſon alſo; 
Rule 26. Sometimes a Sentence ſtands 
Example. Tou riſe early in the lm 
which is a commendable Thing. 
"Which is the Relative and the $ 
tence *Tou riſe early in the Morning a Wome 


P 2 AFP 5 


for the Antecedent. STS 


| Subſtantive and the Subſtantive [he ti 


"Example 1. The City London. 

1 L ondon. 15 a Noun Subſtantive pro 

"agreeth in Caſe. with EW. 

| Sing the fame Thing. 755 
Example 2. The River T bans. 

9 hames is a Noun Subſtantive prop 


the ſame Thing 3 
| Rule 28. In whe Caſe ihe Abticli/may! . 
Example: 1 « Tully the On. 
The: TY Article the i is * . 


i the two Subſlauives Twit 
 fonifying the fame Thin „ 
Erample 2. Vigil the r 
ge defnitive Artieſe the is {7 ds. 
a the two Subſtantives Virgil and Poet 
thing the ſame Thing. "2 n 
le 29. Tus Subſtanfives linked ER 2. 
er ke. 1 SS 4.50 | 1 5 -2F 

| Expiaple: 1. Corn. It a 
e two Subſtantives Vorn and * 
g linked together agree in Caſe, and 
former Subſtantive Corn . the 4 ; 
ce of an Adjeftives ne 3, nt IT _ 


* 


* 


Example 2. Grat. land. YN es, 5 2 


. rwo Subltantves Graſs and l I bt 
vs linked together agree in Caſe, 3 = {3 1 


former Subſtantive Graſs: ſupphes 4 


Place of an AdjeFtive.. "OF 3 1 
| Example 3 Sea- froaliow. Ye = _— 
e two Subſtantives Ses and Stn allow. | 
in i linked together, agree in Cafe, and 
former Subſtantive Sr fapplics th = 
of an Adjeftive- OO \ 8 5. 


, \ 2 N — 


WEE > 8 «Ss #4 d * - 1. ol 


COVERNMENT. 


- 
* 


—— — 


Sd». 
* 


. 
— 
P 
i — „ a 
— — — 7 


EE 


3 


— 2 
b- < La S- - 
——  — — 
— 2 


en Re. 


Ae OOTY x 1 Mp x VF ROS * * 
W 77 x; & * 85 N * 1 If N bees: 255 : 
\ + LOW.” ER | 
* 
"think IH « Roshan. E 
N 
* 


Een God's Anger i 1s Sloy | nple 
God a Noun Subſtantive prope who 
| clined without. an Article, as Man, e Rel 
16. God's is the Genitive Cate fu io the 
and governed by the Subſtantive / ar o 
which follows it. there 
Sole 31. But when the Genitive Cal een th 
Example. The Anger of God is l verb 
7 God is the ee a Caſe and fol in en. 
dhe Subſtantive Anger, which gore e 
Rule 32. The Genitive Caſe ig ar Pr 
ing N the N 
K Example 25 "an Image of Guld hecau 
Of Gold the Genitive Caſe, ſigni derwe 
the Matter of which the dmage 14. | 
made, is turned into the 0 ja zampl 
be and agrees with the. Sub we 
5 golden Image. hom is 
Example 2. A Statue of Bra u. 
0. Braſs the Genitive Caſe, ſignifſi ned 
dhe Matter of which the Statue was n natis 
is turned into the Adjective brazen, Mum 
agrees with the Subſtamive 8 Statue he « 
| brazen Statue. = | [bom i 
| E * 18 0 
Ot Pronouns, | an 
Rule 33, When there comeib 20 * ſine , 
_ native kee. 


Sts 


—— 


— 
— — 8 S 
—— — * n 8 == . 
* * * n- — . : 
_— * — * „ " 4 e; * 1 bk. 2 1 i* 
__ . 8 , N W 


8 * 
* 


ern Nope 7 fl | 5 


ample He is not bappy who tnoweth, 


e who doeth good. 


Relative 20% is the Nominative : 
the Verb #noweth,” which is an 


uar of the Claſs in en, Page 73. be- 


there is no other Nominative Caſe 
en the Relative and the Verb. And 
Verb irregular doeth of the ſame 


in en. Preſent do, Paſt did, Parti- 
dine for doen, is the third 'Perſon 
kr Preſent Indicative, and agreeth 


the Nominative Caſe who the Rel 
becauſe there is no other N diner 3 


between them. 


34. But when a W Caſe e . 
ap" 1. We comment hate thole 15 


we fear. 


5 is a Pronoun Relativ dect x6 
Accuſative Caſe plural, and __ 

ed by the Verb fear, becauſe ine 

Inative Caſe we cometh between them 


rample. . A good Man doeth 28851 to 
. 


he can. . : Va <8 * 


bom is here alſo the. Acoafative: Caſe _— 
s governed by the Prepoſition to, tie 
native Caſe he | coming 5 1 N the 


ie and the Verb. 
X 2 


* . 
: ; - 2 '» 
— {M3 - 
1 823 * 
+. 0 p 


m2ü—U—̃æͥ —— — 
I * 3 


— 


. 1 f ö 
L 1 «S468 F 0 8 — 
T2 2 , Y WS 1 * . 8 p n " GET RP > 6 - 2 2 won 
— — — 2 Sw —_ — EEE — - : 
"Tz a. — = * = oy —— ; yg =P F : ; 5 : . — I 2 : — 
N 5 th al 8 9 — — 3 = I HS p : <E 4 4 2 F « 26 2 Te 2: : * : = — >= — 
y > am 7 "— ex» SiS! Cy Ms ww bad 22 2 1 x SS, == = he — - —— ,,, _ _ Gs — 2 — 22 
BY” r wes 2 as 4 AB a 5 SY N : 2 =D 4 TIL 8 Iii 8 K + E — - AgY — 8 . — | = —_ 
ECL 00” 2 2 r e 2 2 «A OS OS Ta rl AC IT” o - 8 3 * — 2 2 A < > 2. Bra Go AE, po \ 
Sr EE , e Ce — SE r 24” A — > A $4 — IC W.- = 3X. <= SS IEF: DAME <5 = 75 
r e . - __ png he re — : TE — ——_ E 
— P nt 2S » 5 ue 09d 2 ai, ON — — . EEE | 
42 SEAS wm — = Y A rr 24 * . - en - D 
5 — . ͤ . — — — — — be — . 
Py — ——_ * — _ 1 — x 
—̃ _— 


4 3 : de * = * 3 N 
"a, EW 3 3 2 > \ Ir — 

LS” v „ l L 
„ $ ang * 
b B 
— : — Fs 3 


— a 


— — — 
= — — 
. <= 
1 
— — 


LIED 5 — = 
_— = b 3 = _ 
— 2 - yo — — 


= 
— 


— i ö — — — 
2 DIET — = 2 = 


C ˙ c 
_—_ YE — 2 5 — r 


On 


Relative whon the Accuſative 
* Cingular ſtands before He Verb 7 | 
governs 465 1 „„ 
Example 2. What : are you doing 
The Interrogative what ſtands de 
the Verb are daing which goverus i. 
Example 3. a ubm will he go? 
| ; ve auhom is et, 
the Prepoſitions ta which goyerns it, 
. Rule 36. The Queſtion. and Apſw 
ps. 8 ample 1. N | #.ought Wenn war 
5 A. ond; EC I Ee eE 


- Whom is here the 1 


1 ſame Caſe. 
xample Bo. 


line. 


kam 


00 -and ming r 20s is 2 
b ſaws Cafe, 


; nl 3- What are they. 
hool? 


* 


gd Perſon plura 


— —— 
I —— 


CS 


” SEES no OS : 7—: 2 
— — —— EI — — 


4 
4 


\ 


mative 


+ 


re 
is - 
- 
1 


4 ; 
Pronqun 
one. when 77 


* 
9 
„ 
7 
0 
Lg 
- 
* 
* 
. 
r Qr 4 * drr 
W 


quick 
ealled A- 


oy 
age 


F 


»- 5 * ; 2 
; p r _ 
„ * 2 1 * .» 
g 7 
$ + ; 
* g 


— 
1 


g p 


a, 


j 


? 


op the Meohy. 


& 8 
— We, 


n deelined Pa 


4 
WE) 
F 


= 


„ 3 i» y ; 
23 

» et 1 + 

5 * 45 he, 
4 y * 
» * 5 
N 8 51 
* — 5 
0 WTF" : 


ou 
Neuere be 


d 
ell it were 


dereſis which will be noticed in 


1 
* 


* 


1 
% 
* 
i 


„ 485 an 
d it were 


* 


4 


* 


0 


Pron 


Example as the Nom 


ect of Diſeou 


* 


do. See 
155 


jan 
. they 


le 37. The Neuter 
were 


is 
) 


b 


e and 7s, * 


ids in thi 


7 


ha Neuter 


\ 


ye a8 ey 


o 


þ its var 
ple . If th; 


ng 
lame 


* 


F 
Pl 


I Flace. 
Example 2, H 


nds &c. : 


Fill 


Aan 


e or SU 


yes 
eh, 
Ive 
1 
ng 
bg 
it. 
0: 
OT 


et 
it. 
7er 


* * 5 
Jon 


it with 


PA 
"44 
C I 4 
aw. 16 
oy } 
1 


4 


* 
4 . 
- 


u 
% 


Friend? 


The Neuter Pr 


e State or Cond 


Us 


L A 
r ys : 
9 5 6 - < 
n 3 Me 

4 , 
= 


x: 
WR | 


*% 


* 2 FANS 
2 * 4223 „ 88 
a IF * 14 7 
. — * 
. a . 


. * * 4 J + I :, 
- * 1 . * a "bs 2 
= rs 
: 2 
2 * "I : — 
. ; 8 * 


* 
5 
III 


ot I that d 


933 


here e 


ſ the Perſo 


it 


z 


N * 1 . 4 h 
i 7 
8 Ip 
- < x 41% 7 ey 
WA % : 
” ew” ' 
: £ ws 4 A 
= SLE 4 5 8 
{4 { 2 22 [2 
* < my q 
= 27 5 a 7 
* - 1 bo: N 
* * 12 Pi 
- 2 29 I. 
6 . 
” X *>-#..'G * * 5 ö 
9 E L 
« _ oy * W $ i 1 
5 . 9» 17 5 % 4 n 
. þ 
= '< 4 
7 * ＋ 8 8 . 
— 2 , 4 
. N 1 
5 y 1 „ 
4 . 4 1 ! 
0 . 
p 2 4 , 
*. 
\ 


hs 
ror A. 
Event. 


* 
£ 


aun 


tion © 


1 


x 


2 


——— [ft was t 


% 


The Neuter P 


2 of the 


* 


Liam 3. It was 


wles expreſſes the Fe 
the Cay 


f 
' 


in 


pet 


IGLISH Rhdmaries: 

gimp t. He pleaſ ech himſelf. Nis 2 
— rhe Reciprocal of.the ſingular Nt 10 an 
ber joined to the Pronoun him now ei co. 
ally uſed for hisfelf Page 21. has I 10 N 
"tion to, or reflects the Senſe back uM ore 
the Perion He going beſore the Verb, imp 
Example 2. They ape 4 vel jal ( 
themſelves. Fo 6 wit 
Selves the Reciprocal of the 1 ol duti 
ber joined to the Pronoun them now e boſe t. 
erally. uſed for their, Page 21, has I of 
lation to, or reflects the Senſe back U re P- 
the Ptonoun they going before the Ve  refe 
Example 3. Even 1 bes love thetr ed an 
| Offpring. * . the! 

Oꝛon a Reciprocal = dukes, Numb 
| Joined to the plural Pronoun their, Mule 4 
Relation to, or reſlects the Senſe back Mixes! 
on Brutes, the Th DEE? mentioned bel ral 
dhe verb he 81 
Rule 39. ww hen this and that, Prep 
their plurals c. (ref 
Example 1. Philip and Ae ma 
reat Commanders, tho? in different We 6; 
this (Alexander) conquered his Enen x: 
in the open Field ;'that (Philip) by ot be Sy 
| gem and Cunning. 4 ab 7 x Pr 
"i by. 


Ex6L1$H RUDIMENTS | 1679 mt 
s and that refer to the two Words 
ip and Alexander going before; bie 
ers to Alexander the laſt mentioned and 
Nord; and that refers ro Philih 
Word frſ} mentioned and fartheſt off. 
zample 2. Parents and Children have 

al Obligations; he ought to be- 
ewith Tenderneſs and Affection; theſe 
dutiful Refpe& and Obedience. 
[byſe the plural of hat. and theſe the 

nl of this, Page 20, refer to the two _ 
rs Parents and Children going before 
refers to Parents the Word firſtmen- 


== 


= = 
. _ — 
— = — 2 mi 


= = = 


A 3 = 


I 


— 


- F py y \ 
o 7 * 1 4 bw 
* 5 N 4 4 
: j q 4 


ed and fartheſt off; theſe refers to Chi. 
[the Word laſt mentioned and neareſt. mi 


Of Adjectiv es. 
ule 40. Moſt Adjectives govern Sub; 
Example 1. Careful abν,EWi fe. 
he Subſtantive Life is governed by © 
Frepoſition about, after the Adjec; =» 
areful. AY 3; 
je makes lives in rhe plural Page ro, 
lie fingular end in fe,” M“ ³ͤ⁸31“L =» _ 

Example 2. Fit for Buſineſs.  -., - ml 
ic Subſtanzive Bufine/s is governed "lil 
ie Prepoſition for, after the  Adjec: - 


: 1 ” * a 5 Py 
. 5 * * * 
* D E ” * 0 
* : * F x 8 Lb - 0 os ” 
; 2 — - 5 — —— 33 = : = = 
: — £ WE er —— . —_ - -2 £0 — - s - * = ry 
ESE St EEE ne. or — —— — Sew ä I — 
4 - * p 9 — - 5 * 2 * _ — — - ä 
r p. + -=_—_— A — = = 2 — : 8 1 — — 
ou 2 = es * n * £4 — — . — a —_ SEE 
N * * = 4 — . — — — 2=f—d — - 5 — 
. ZI — — ———— — — — — . = —.— — 
- — — —— — — r = NA — ———— — — 3 og — Ti = — = _ ens 
EEE p 2 N — —_—_— — TE r = P — — = — — 20 — > Jnr 2 
2 * De — en] PIT ES — — - 5 ——= - : == : ; 
ICs — cf oY. : "ES SEAT — —.— —.— — — —ę—„—öꝑ — —_— = —_— —  - 
— — . 2 id G — 2 — Cal me” . T2 — — — — ping — ICRC \ = == l A — 
— — = — — — pes — ne 88 — 3 — — — a — — — — 
- Se rae 3 Y = r = — 5 — — =o | 
5 . SS 5 TESTED ITED CT EIT an rn 5, === — 
2 . * = — — — — or — — 


2 —— 
— — — — 
. 
* —— 
CY þt Ca a 
= » = 


—— 1 

o — — — 
9 — 3 2 

22 - 


OF » 


148 


n R N o * 
N F . Y 8 * * : 8 : "I 4.98, * 
FF, > FO 24s — 2 r 
% * 3 7 $ ol — 7 
FM FR : : 


768 Eronite Nobntbet | 
Example 3. Free fron Misform ' TX 
The Subſtantive Misformunes, wb 

* the plural Number àud deeſtned wiſh 19. 
dut an Article, is governed by the Mii: 4: 
Poſition m after the Adj ſive fret. b 
xample 4. Equal in Age. amt 
e Subſtantive 4 is goremei : Þ 
the Prepoſition in after the Adj . 
N as, i the A 
Example 5. een of Pl. d by . 
The Subſtantive Praiſe is governoliÞnp! 
"a: Prepoſition of, after the dos etter 
ure. KEE * a 
Example 6. Apterable to me. e 
The Pronouti Sudſtantire me dec“, an 
\ Pore 19. is governed by the Prepoli_hl 7, a 
ro after the, Adjedtive ogrerable, Wi" 
Rule 41. Partitive, Imerrogh np]: 
| Numerals, :&e, | | | holen. 
Example r. None Y ang ur are Vl: us, a 
ont Faults, 8 Cle, E 
-4 Da Pronoun Subſtantive from 1 a, an 
Ha . lined Pape 19. -Us 15 che Genitive e 
8 plural and geverned by the PrepoſitionWpaniſo 
. the Aetuſative and govetned by 
8 * and wy 3 oy F42. 1 


Fxclrsn Rbizwxs»C 


ple 2. Which of, or among them? R 
bem a pronoun Subſtantive from He, 
9, Them is the Genitive after 9 
be Accuſative after among, an an 
( by the Interregative which. 
xample 3- One of, or among _- ® 
ju a Pronoun Subſtantive from Thou, 
19. Tou is the Genitive aft er of, 
he Accuſative after among, and r. 
by the Numeral AdjeCtiye one. 
umple 4. The younger of) the, Boys, is 
tetter Scholar. 
oy, a Subſtantive, dectined. with the 
cle the, Page 16. is the Genitive Caſe 
a, and is governed by the Prepoſi- 
17 and the eee Ad) ee 
Ver, _— 
umple 5. The leaſt of Foils areadp 5. 
vuls, a Sb declined wit LON fi 8 
de, Page 15. is the Genie Gale» 
, and governed by the Superlanve Wh 
live leaſt. which is irregularzins 42 . 
pariſons, Rule, A 242, Ws few _—_ 
42. But G 4 jedtives&c 
| Frample 1. Bigger, Ay 4 Half, 5 : 


* 


3 


8 ney - * y — -— td BF; ? 4 * - - 2 = £ - a 5 8 
2 — - bd 1 <— — © — — — . -—_ -_ — CR —_ 4 — — —— — — - 
„ 3 I. n bt r NW 8 2 — — — . T 2 * . = —— — _— „ 
1 2 *. 2 R r. 1 4 , — - - - — 2 — Bs” = _—_— _— . - Þ- - 3 = FS —— =: = — ET = = — f 
a 4 * . R 7 N ES * D * r W 2 r r Ma oy — — =: —Mw > - — a get — E = = mo 
: 4 F j "a ir 2 25 5 0 8 : x £ © ; 8 5 * = he E = E — 
I 22 = — — 1 — Se os 2 " of - - COR IDE — = — . — — — — — 22 
= "- IS K Ro —— & 5 2 — —— = 2 3 
. nr > — . ry 2 „* 2 — — _ 2 —— 4 wt 4 1 A — 1 2 Te ad _ 2 2 — — — — a 
_ — — — — — = = . Co — — — — — 4 —— — — — = = ER 
4 * 5 = — — - === TEES ==E 
— * — — —— — I. — b =, Os — 


re 3 
TSS SES 
a” I 


— 
= 


Lat 


"Yo nd over — 


—— 2 
4 = 2 38 
= — A — ITS FUG += » — = — — — 
dos hx > i — ESC . ——— = 7 —_— ——— — IE. c 2 —— — _ > — 
Tu RE EC — — — 7 — A 2 = 1» = — —— 23 2 
— bs 8 __ — K — 3 - . — 
* 2 — . . 2 2 1 22 r re Car. * 8 —— — So — 
: a 2, — 2 by — * by Y - — r 7 4 8 n r — . _ 
- — * — - —__ CRT. - q = Se — — - =D . ver by s 
\ 0 _ - - - * TR N — oy 
ah FR -_ — 2 * 


— — 2 
— — . — 2 
r 
— =_ 


— 
ns 
> 


5 5 5 band laſt, becauſe the 9 — 


Ys Sing and is e, wt the wy 


ES * Exesren A Hesteerd 3 
Hal in the plural Halves, Rule, 
10. If the ſingular end in / c i 


ct by the Prepoſition y and the 
Parative Adjective bigger. 


Tran 
live 
[ Ive, 
WNW 
le 40 


Example 2. Dearer than Life. amp| 
Life in the plural Lives, Rule. PogMulii: 

| declined without an Article, Page ber 
the Accuſative Caſe and governed bl and 
Prepoſitjon than, and the  Comporativ ont a 
jective dearer, tre, 
Rule 43, When the Peopofiics 1 by 
Example 1. Much better. poſit 
The" Comparative Adjective better ule 4 


ee in both Compariſens Some 
> ” Page 24. ſtands /of 
caufe the Prepofition by is underſtoo 
fore much, nuch better, i. e. den 


wel. 


Exar 
ards 
ll, a 
follo 
Exar 
lards. 
the At 


ee | Examp ie 2. Far gr reuter. 
The Comp Krattre Adjective gf 


5 Venter by far. 

0 b 44. Alpers ek a Verde 
Example 1. Unwilling 70 die. 
Jo die is the Iufinitixe Mood of the 


by milling. 


i » 1 - < Wy: — 4+" 5 3 
o& 8 9 A e . AD YE * PF * > > 
SE * Se « By QI 
bs LS. ts 9 r 
o _ 


Excta SH 1 Red: ants: 


bet 2. Unworthy to ah” REM 
e is the Infinitive Mood of ite. "WM 
live, and is gorerned by the Adjece | 2 
uort hy. 
ue 45. Adjectives of Likeneſs &e. 
mple. That Boy is like his derber, 
alt his Father. | 
ther a Subſtantive the  Neculitive 
; and governed by the Adjective life 
out a Prepoſition; and Father a Sub- - ma 
tire, the Accuſative Caſe, and gov- 38 A I 
u by the SO unlike WHINDE a 
potion. : 
ule 46. AdjeQives lig ifying ge. = 
Example 1. Three Yards long. 
ards a Noun Subſtantive, Accufative 
l, and governed oy” the — 
following} it. 
Example 2. Two T ands re 9 
lande Accuſative plural, and ge 
the Adjective broad, rag R 
Example 3. Four Inches thick. —_ 
Inches a Noun Subſtantive bee ; 3 "Ib 
and governed oy the Ad wee thiet 9 5 3 = 
OovIng it, 1 
Example 4. Ten Feet hi TT 
et a Noun Subſtantive een T8 
al from Foot, and 1 by” the 
or "gh following * Ex- 


* 


22 eo _ 2 uy = _—— 
Ed * XI 

— = = — AK Erz — X —_— 

EEE TSF ̃ ery =, =" 2 

= = = r 8 8 


— — — = rr LS 
——— _ —— — E—— — — . = => 
— — —————ů— —ͤ— * — * —— — 
= — Ez — = 2 — = = V7 : 
ONS == — ——_— £4 = y 


<= 
EX 
— 
r — 
227 ˙² ᷣ— 


F wow — _ 
2 — — —_—— - 4, S -—_ 
— — * 


- — 3 = — - 
A == — = =———_—__ 

— "ol 2 2 — 

. —— x27 Ep 


Unis 

| is ſe 
apl. 
Ber th 
after 
Rule « 
Exam! 
4 ſtud 
Hm 
Ab Ti 
Exam 
e idle. 
Them 
rs the 
Rule 
Exam 
f lov 
Rate 
repoſt 
re, w 
ues, 
Exat 
Gold 
Nu 
ſed 01 
le Ac 
repo 
le, * 


Example = Twelve Feet deep, 
Feet Accuſative plural and over 
5 the Adjective _ following it 


Of Verbs... 


Bule 47. - The Verb am Kc. 
Example t I am he whofaiditf 
1 The Pronoun I is the Nominative 
—_— AE the Verb am, and the Prono 
4 ee Nominative Caſe after it. Pay 

Example 2. It was ſhe, who did 

: Fi > he Pronoun it is the Nominatiye 

"before the Verb was the paſt imp 
Tenſe of am, Page 43. and the'Prg 
= ſhe is the Nominative Caſe after it. 
Raule 48. But when it ſignifieth & 
1 ne 1. This Horſe is my Fat 
| „ . Fathers a Noun Subſtantive. dec 
* with an- Article, the Genitive Caſe ol 
_ and is governed by che adi 
nitying s 
ff © 5 Example 2 That Book WAs ; hay Brel 
= Brether's:Genitive Caſe of Brother 
is governed by the Verb Was ul 
1 Poſe ion or Property. 

3 L Kule 49. In the lnfinitive Mood, . 
eee 1. A . bien to i pi 


_ < 
o 421 
” * 4 "AS 
by £ Fr” * 
* ha 2 
4 "Ss . » 
1 — — — p 
4 * 4 . 
_.. "4s * 271 
E. 8 N ” * C 
*1% "hd 8 by I 1 , 4 
g Rs. > 5 
1 
. 4 „ * 
EW... 7 
£ * * 5 ? 8 ; 898855 
"ad Ly » 
* n 


1 
135 


m_ 


Unis the . Caſe 'of Be P 19 
| is {cr after the Infinitive Mood t be. 
pple 2. 1 look upon that to be her. 
Fr the Accuſative Caſe of ſhe, oy % 
fer the Infinitive to be. 
Rule 50. All Verbs Tranſitive . e 
Lample 1. The Maſter reſpedteth, him 
01 tudterh. 
Him Accufitivy Caſe, and' follows the 
id Tranſitive reſpecteth. 1 
Example 2. But e them who 
e idle. 
Them Accuſative plural of be anit bel. 
s the Verb Tranſitive puniſbeth. 
Rule 51. Verbs Tranſitive alſo &e. | 
Hample 1 A wiſe man values Pleaſure 
7 ny Rate. Fe 
Rate a Subſtantive. governed; by: thi" 
repoſition at, after the Accuſfative Pleas © 
0 which follows the Verb Tranfitive | 
es, * e. . 
Example 2. 1 oretay Virwe to Gutd} © . 
Cid is a Subſtantive wanting the plo- i 
| Number, Page 11, Some Nouns are I 
ſed only in the Singular, &c.?* Geld oj 2 BR 
e Accuſative Caſe, and governed by the - 7 3 HY 
fepofition 20, after the Subſtantive; . 1 |: ' 
* dan the Tranſitive 2 1 


YO 
F _ _T _—PeCSWCCnT x xz T0 — = — _ — 
r 2 — . 8 7 — STING 


— . En RT rnnngr— < — 
. FRESH —— — — ES 
9 II 
— S 
— oo 7 ng — — 
— OS = EE as = — 
CREE: Re: 2 22 = go — 
. .. — 


- —— = — FT — — EE EEE” SBS "4 

= = == 3 === = : > dr = — = — 

Jr KT T —. — Ü—— = 
— — — => — 5 —— — — —— 
. ——)h ——o——v— — = _ ES . 
— — — —— MÜ222— — — — ere — — — . = 
— — — — — > — —— —-—„— 

— 2 - = 2 _ xy y _- — _ 

— — 3 — 

4 — - b - 


_ = x 

—— 
— 3 — 
MAP" 


pg ——__—_— 


F was IO 
. = : 
£ - 5 I 8 
ID he — — KNIT, 
_— — wy | wo — 


— 
— —— 


FEES. ̃ — 


1 — 
222 


— — 


* 
— IS IED IDS Sp 
*4 — 4 — — — 
= ES 
— 


— — 
— ge 
P. — — 


Je Xe Bonn — - Vs — 
— 
— Lie ion, DAMES”. —„-— — 
—— 
SY Cx v 
7 JEST fin — 
£m er * 


= > Ye” r 


1 4 I 5 k 8 4 
— = 8 3 — = — — — — — — —— — 2 — 2 — = 
ns co SE mae, 3 N 1 2 2 — — — = 
8 — n EN 362 
X 8 — — — Bp 
ad X 
* r 


Gf 


| wo of La 
" Tdleneſs i is a Subſtantive wanting le 5 


8 plural Number, Rule as above, It is | ance 
erned by the Prepoſition of, after uam 
Accuſative him, which follows the V ndred 


he | 
heftive 
Leng 
| | Cale 


 Tranſttive: accuſe. _ | 
5 Rule 52. The Prepetiions to, or fr 
Example 1. My Father gave ne 
8 tome Shilling. 
The Pre poſition to is underſtood bel 
ths Pronoun me after the Verb gave 
Irregular in en, Page 74 


e 2. Thomas returned John, i k heckt 

10 John his Book. euſat 

”- The Prepoſition 7 is tinderfivcd bel is 
tbe Noun ohn after the Verb returnt Ex 
Example 3. My Mother bought Drea 
i. e. ne an Inkhorn. 5 dine. 
; FE: The. Pr epoſit ion for. i is . underſtood ' pb 


fore gzge Pronoun me after the Verb bon 
an Wire gular i in ght, Page 72, Ihe p 
= - Thom and Participle &c.”  - Ne. 

Example 4 The Pedlar fold it þ 
' 1 hes M58 for Sixpencde. 

| He Trepoſition to is aadedions befo 
1 8 Pronoun her after the Verb fola;” 5) 
"pang by Contraction, Pages 48 | 
_ es of this Chaſe __ ae” | 


"hw 


le « 53. Time how long, and e 
lance c. 
Example I.  Methuſalab ned nine 
ndred ſixty and nine Tears. 
be plural Subſtantive Tears and its il 
fines nine Hundred fixty and nine, _— 
Length of Time, are of rhe Aecuſa- 1 
Cale and governed by the Verb lived. 
Ezample 2. London is diſtant from Tork 
Hundred Miles. 
ic plural Subſtantive Miles, and 
hectires wo and Hundred, are of. he 
wſative "Caſe, and governed * be 
big diſtant. 
Example 30 1 dreamt a Dreams: 
Dream, a Noun' "Subſtantive . 
dined with the Article a, Accuſative 8 
iſe ſngular, and governed by the b | 
rant, a Word expreſſing the ſ ame Noe 
vl, 5 . 85 13 
Example 4. He fervbd 1 r 
Service a N oun Subſtantive commion, 
dined with Article a, Accuſativę Haſe 
ular, and governed by the Verb fer. 
4a Word expreſling the fame Notion: 
154. Almoſt all other Verbs, 8c: 
Example 11 Whatever happens e 
, they take in # gobd Fart. -- "5, 2 


e | 


—— - —_— — _ 
= r 4 . —  — — © 
— 


* 
— — + FM, OS 
g E WEEK Fo 2 n 
—— <a = —_=——_—_—_ <= = — — — 
— — Sm — — — — — — — — 
— — — I — — - ZEST — is — — — — 
* _——— = wn 2 * 2 2 y = — > * 3 => 
— — — —— 2 @ > PR 4 rae Fl = 
E Ser - 2 SSSR ERS — Br 


4 
23 — 
—- 


r 
n 
- 2 

= 


E 2 — - fl ee} 
* c 2 B 4 2 
* Cr be HH. „ av ye Ty 4.597 5 8 . 
8 2 — ogy 3 N | . — 2 
— . T — nn D <. & — —— 


1 


——— 


+ ke * 2 n 90S OT, ˙ . 
* ; f. A R . 
5 7 4 . by * os ; F r 


Bienen Hebie Io 


E. 

. ack: Naw Subſtantive | common, ee 5. 
5 10. *A Noun Subſtantive common, j the u 
Name common &c“ Accuſative Caſei I ane 
a Page 11. „The plural i in ſome Wo iith th 
ends in 2 &c.“ governed by the Prepoſi are 

to after the Verb Happens. Part, ler tk 
Subſtantive common, Accuſatire eerſto⸗ 

TS {fingular, and governed by the Prepoſii , an 
nin after the Verb tale. Rule, 
* Example 2. He, who is accuſed ta 8e 
Frault, is not always in Fault. re 6 
Fault a Noun Subſtantive common eat, 

. erned by the Prepoſition of, and in, A= ri 

. dhe Verbs zs accuſed, and irt. N 
 YExample 3. He is blamed by many, WW,” 
3 any an Adjective agreeing with ate 


1 Subſtantive Perſons underſtood, Paget, 
Rule, The Subſtantive is ofren unde 
ſtood to the Adjective Many i. e. ? 


= is governed by the ien by 
after the Verb ig blamed. Wb pail 
Example. 4. Puniſhments are prepare hot, 


pobttie 
it, u 
56. 
xamr 
Nn, W 


9 * 
9 


for the Wicked, 
Wicked. an adiective, agreeing wil 
Pes underſtood as above, is goverit 
by the Prepoſnion Ver, ater; the Verl 

one ate INE! 
kun 


7 * 


Duette Rcbistswrs ht 


ole 5 k 4 Sun ſhineth on the juſt 'Þ 
"the un . 
and i, AdjeAives, agreeing 5 
ith the Subſtantives Per/ons, under- _ 


are governed by the Prepolition 
Ger the Verb ſvineth, which Verb BM 
derſtood in the latter Part of the Sex 
t, and ſhineth on the unf. Page 177 
Rule, «Sometimes the latter Mem- _— 
a Sentence is omitted. 421 
ve 6. Tares grow wil hi the Wheat. 
heat, a Noun Subſtantive common,” 
b the plural Number, Page, 11. 
ne Nouns are uſed only in the ſingu- 
&,” governed by the n 
after the Verb grow. —_ 
uple 7. Men are caught oy: Pleafere _- . 
Wiles with a Hook. © — 
baſure, a Subſtantive gagular, govs 
| by the Prepoſition by, after ie 
paſfrye are caught. 
hot, a Subſtantive, governed by che 
volition with, after the Verb are = 
, underſtood as in Example 5. 
55. One Verb governs another, oY 
panple, The Boy, who dgęſires to 
, Sax excell him, who e 2 
2 | 


ew” * mer : as i 
7 2 7 9 4 * ** F 7 * : . 1 n . * ati LY. 
T AR l F * - * 74 5 N a Fa. 4 * . 3 
% = . NN . 8 5 3 * ” , ; . * N TY We. CES N he oF 5 n * ? 77 
5 7 : 3 — 4 « - 7 « a . +} 5 r 2 85 k PITS. < td, N 
D . r . 175% \; \ 5 „ „ 2 1 * N 
* : 0 N 5 3 L Fx gh. z 8 0 3 P N * . 
— " * * * 1 , ER | + 4 . 25 1 6 Fs * * . 3 2 
#5 . yy — * * * Lo 4 * $ 7 3 He : 
? 8 x 3 3 
m_—_ 4 7 * : *. 3 - N 


. 
. 1 3 


2 * 1 Engin lis. | 
DT 14. a Verb of the Tufinirive | 


+ 
aol l 


228 7 governed by the Verb defrres; ar uſed 
, ſtudy a Verb alſo: of the Infinitive M pyie 2 
governed by the Verb negled... = uſed 

Rule 56. The lnfinirive Mood i 180 i 59 
uſed &. . 


"ME Example 1. To confeſs; the Truth, & 
The Infinitive Verb to.confeſs, ſup 
the Place of the Subjundtive with th 

Jo confeſs, i. e. that I may confeſs. 


le N. 
pinatl? 


1 


Example 2. To begin, the Infinitive, Wl © 
plies the Place of the Suljunctive andi 
i. e that I may begin. 7 
Example 3 To conclude, the Infinitire . ry 
plies che Place of the Subjun@tiveand! , ; | 

i. e. that I may conclude. | a7 
Rule 57. Ihe Tofinitiye Mood i 1 wi 


0M perly, . 
Example 1. To miſtake i is e , 
_ . The Infinitive Mood, to mi/tate, | 
5 here as the Nominative Caſe to the Ver 
1 =o Example 2. Boys love to lar 
1 The In finitive Mood to play, ftands! 
= a te: Nene Caſe after the 
1 Of Imperſonal Fabia: 4 
1 Rate FY A Verb i is EIN: it inc 


8 
” \ * 
3 
p 
. 


lamp 
gent. 
Em 
Ad. 
Lie t 
IJ Ex] 


ule 6 
th, 


—— 
—— —— 
ARES — © 


g NN + . , ICDs 0 7 1 
* 1 4 25 * 6 * Aw 1 S > 
2 b + | 
J JW. N hi ap .F 
mw 3 ; WE fs n 
' p iy a ö 3 y 8 . 
1 Pr 4 9 » 5 ; * _ 
* q p # . : 4 ' 8. N 
* q * — 7 : 


le: It boppenetb. Aa Verb — : _ ; 
25 in the third Perſon only. -- "Lf 
wple 2. It concerneth, a Verb [mper- 


—— 


22 ” Its. 
* : 7 nn X 
— — —— 
— — — 
2 1 
2 


FI == 
— — A bt 


uſed in the third Perſon only. © 
Die 59. When the Newer are na 
ce, | 
Example 1. 15 en > 
e Nenter Pronoun it ſtands for the 
native Caſe Wind. — I, i. e. N 
i blorws. 
Example 2. t neee 7 
te Neuter Pronoun it ſtands for the 0 
native Caſe Cloud. . i. © e £2 
d thunders, ' * © DEAE 3 
Examp le. * rains. 3 
Fſtands henna tor the Nominative Caſe. 
.lt. i. e. the Cloud rains. 5 
0 A Verb lmperſonal hath no Kc. "4.4 
ample 1. I. concerneth OE to be 
ment. my 
"wat 2. It blows ſtrong, 1. . the | 
Lhe two Examples under iis: Rule are —_— 
7 explained in the Nate Page, ben _— 
Of Participles. 02-2 | 
ule 61. Participles in ing govern hs | 
* 1. Hatin, Sin, n * who Ly 
CRT . 2a 


— 


— ———ů 


— — — - — — 
— Se 


— a6 
— 


— 


— — I + Bop — — 


gr en AA rr mc cry} —wa 
— —— . —— he — 


SM ns EE. 
* 1 


mn & =. 
2 5 
" 
"PIX s $ 
—.— 


> WIS Z 
— 
Derr — = 
— gs A * — — 
— — - 
* — x 4 8 * 
— * 


SEEDS ——— 
— — —. — 
YET, —— EDS CINE SE BJ 
ry a — - 
1 — — 5 
* LO - _— = — - — — — 


| | Subſtantive Sin, aud the Pronoun 


; injures his Heir. 


a Verb Tranſitive ta follow. requires 
Subſtantive, Pleaſure to follow i it in 
Accuſative Caſe. 


5 bereft yourlelf. 


_ The Verb Tranſiti ve fo obſerve require 

Pronoun Subſtantive vin to follow! 
- the Accuſative Caſ. 

Rule 62. The Participle wii a Now! 


ing flalen, c. 


' the Verb Irregular 7 Neal, Page 75, 
put ab/olutely uh the Subſtantive Ste 


verb Tranſitive to. . requires 


follow it in the Aceuſative Caſe. 
Example 2. A Man Hllnving Ple 


7 Wh | 


Following, a Poriciple in ing 


Example 3. uy obſerving 1 yon 
_ Obſerving, a Panticinls in ing, f 


Example 1. It is too late, the Sterd 


Being ſtolen, Parete Paſſive, fi 


in the Nominative Caſe, and comm. 
from the reſt of the Sentence. 
Rte 2. ou goiley Feries, himſelf 


ng Fudge | 
1 N e Pronouns of the Nanu 


* 4 T3 9 7 2 ernennen 1 
92 OT 0077 Rn 
9 < * 0 * 1 
5 8 : * 5 y x - - * X 9 9 4 4 | 
0 a if * 3 7 6 * „ : 
+4 6 « . * 
4 * * 74 7 
"774 EL 
227 * : * 1 
8 2 - iN i 
K* f M 
; * * 1 
2 7 s \ 1 i 
8 i 
* 


tile for 260% rr is put 2 SG 
uh with the Participle being from te 

wb an, and comma ' d from the reſt of 5 
Fenrence. ny 

Eranple 3. If airs be ever ſo. great 
Voice in the School, the "_ —_— 
rom Ire quiet. of 7 
The Participle entering is pur abſolute- = 
with the Subſtantive Maſter, in the 
minative Caſe, . comma'd from the reſt . 
the dentencde. | 

le 63. But this Condrodiena may be dec 
unple 1. It is too late, when. the N 
fan, to lock the Door. 

The Particle when being added to he- 
minative Caſe Steed, the Participle = A 
, is changed into che Verb 1 


, 3 5 
2 1 , 2 4 "a 9 n ——— 
— = 3 — — — — Zh 
— — — — — — — — - — — — — — — — = 
— ED. — I —— Tz — —— —— — 
— — — — « — — — — — — _ 2 —— — — * — 7 Py 8 — — — 
rr A K 5 „ ö 22 8 I = 8 25 * oy an nab of 
—— 2 — —— prey r pa n w yt l 6 2 * 


— — 


= — — — 
_ _— 


— — 


Se — | = ———— - 4 oa 2 — 
n 2 — = E - bc" — xz P_— ng > 2 - 
4 - * = -- : * . — - — = - — 
2333 IS — —. ̃ — . . —— Þuﬀucu=—cuqcqc—qcurceacquqnnunuercner-, —— 
- - _ - manns _ . : CS 


6 


— — hs ——— . £ 
Hi HK, 2 — 222 — ESE 
P 2 

* — q 


3 2. 2 guilty Perſon, if — = 
j be Fudge, - 
The Conrad if being added io the 
mmative Caſe hemſelf, the Participle 
my is changed into the Verb b. 
Lxarple 3. If there be ever fo great | 
agus in the Schibol; Afr the Moſer | 
erg, Cc. 5 ; 


kg K article aue deus ede the : 3. 


_— CD TT NE OT CES 
1 — — - 
© 6 _ 
. FF 
DAFT Op Ao — = 
— — — — 


A - 
f p —— — 
. ——— OR 
— — Ee. et gs. 
oO hy if _ * I f % 
_ _ 
S < ws - 6 . Y 2 wo Jo 
= p — 


A * - 


N 9 * 6 , . c 4 

Y 5 A K ” FEY Saf „ # 

Ko 1 F 77 $44 * 1 n n rr ADV W * 

Y % » 5 - , 8 4 9 9 2 

9 * ta \ SE 94 * K * 5 75 * * 2 
4 ** I # Gt * YI - Wi 
_ " £ - . rf , 1 42 — * * oy 

"% 


2 een, 


Beasts Caſe Maſter, the Parti 
| tering is changed into the Verb ent 
Rule 64. The Participle in ing, & 
„Example 1. The Cuſtom of if hing 
The Participle in ang, lying is uſed 

a a Subſtantive with the repo ion of: 
The Noun Cuſtom. 7 1 | 
1 Example 2. Deſirous of living, 
1 The Parüciple living is uſed lik 
= Subſtantive with the \Prepoſition of, af 


the Adjective defirous. . © Nig 
8 Rule 65. _ after the Verbs, ad! 1 15 
jectives & c. 75 
Example 1. You will learn to write Ne 
e often — de v 
Mriting. Participle aQive, 2 unt 2 
verb Irregular in en, Page 73. vir, ;;: 
4 5 With the Prepoſition by, after the V, u 


to vorite. 
Example 2. Idle Boys : are ſoon d 
eue from learning. 
Learning, a Participle active, fromt 
ay "Verb to learn, uſed after the Prepoſiti 
4 3 ben and the Verb paſſive are diſcoure 
Example 3. He excells in reading. 
Reading, a Participle active, from 74 
2 erg e by Contration * 


a at 
"5% 1 1 


* 


RuDIMENTS * 


83 


ExoLIsH 


* 
1 


Hample 4. Horſes fit for running. 


b Irregular caſting away en, Page 77, 


Example 1. I like riding. 
ding, Pariiciple active from ride, 
tb Irregular in en Page 73. | 


vw Verb 5 
Example 2. Vou like Cas © 


bod, after the Verb you lle. 
V has an Article befor it. Kc. 


Example 1. A Aying Eagle. 


ide, rode, ridden. It ſupplies tage 
ce of the Infinitive Mood to ride, af- 


kule 67. When this Participle, viz in 


„Others of this Claſs Sc.“ uſed 
the Prepoſition in, after the Ver 


ming, Participle active from run, 


„The paſt Time, &c.” uſed with: 
Prepoſition for, after the Adjective it. 
£66, After Verbs it alſo ſupplies &c. 


Walting, Participle active, from | | 4 5 
it, ſupplies the Place of the Infinitive 


B. The Examples under this Rule 
Elufficiently explained under the Rule 
el, Page 137. and the Note ſubjoineds 
e 68. Participles are changed into &c, _ 4 


the Participle ing, from the Irregu- 


4 £ i 
* 1 N 
4 F 4 72 
f 


1 * ho »4 
* * 7 3 
# 1 , , 8 1 
: " : * a „ ge N * 3 
0 8 * s + * , . > - * i . x __— 
. "Tet 5 LP 2 4 - . , * 2 5 158 . 8 5 2 2 * 1 
8 8 bes , n 4 8 A : © % 
— 5 2 2 12 N 8 #5 4 *. * 0 8 P * * rs . _ Wa . 2 1 oF 2 
hy _ $ I. * . . - — 5 — — — - — 8 — < I — = << ” — _ 4 
. AT _ ea G aT—o 5 L GY — — — 2 n = = - — — — RES ä — : — 3 = 
2 * 22 I 2 — - 3 2 — — — — - — — 2 — * — a ne — —— by _— — 2 — — — — — Cues — 
— — r — F FS-- — 2 — — Dies r — — == og : . ray 
. hn, ET PIR es”; 1 * ——ů— — I ou ax . 5 7 SEE => == . > TE = — —= —— = 
: ">. 1 . * — as — — - i = TI — f —— — — — _ - x — 2 —— 
+ 8 Says I © W's. — nt” Rod 2 er — _—— ee. — 2 > — —— Men Dn. — : P = — 
* — — * 
* —— ww $I. n r es > = fe ———_ er ng Deer 2 — . : * — 2 g 
g 2 2 CEE muon = 7, = 4. . pm — — — - = — — — — . oy N — 8 — — — — 
2 a ol g == * —_ FE 7,1. 2 8 A mw — 8 8 FISK — r I ob LEES, . BE W E * 
l as X CU I ̃ Tr oc ci —-r—n Hr =..—=oafrr = 2 a - ———— x 3 — — = =— 
TT. — 8 —— = ER, — — HERR — CNNTyg —— 


WG 6 * 2 9 1 
* : CRT n 4 CPE * < I » " oy 
Tis 12 N ae? T * th. : 8 T 2» 5 9 A > (Ys J 5 — 
9 1ĩ] » . 7 
Y 3 * N * MN 0 8 
- 2 5 F 
” . * : 
» 1 2 . * * * 


n „ 1 
— * 0 4% 74 4 
: ? 7 „ 
1 5 . * 8 * 
* 4 2 n i n 
a * N . * . 7 
1 1 1 th iN \ 
a4 „ * 1 
1 7 * + 
*, * Ci 
1 


— — — — — - — 
pet 3 8 — 
* L % 2 
2 A — 


* 


— 


"IMC 


_— 

T_— 

rake annoyed. 
IT I 


+ dh - 7.2 
- . s=__—_—__—_ 
— — 
2 
LE -þ 


— n v 4 . « * > « d 
* 4 * "- ot > q . £ Te 
I 1 dy : Ks q „ 
f 0 * Sb * > 7 4 . 7 } J 
W * % * 7 
[ X I > : 45 4 7 4 \ 


a 1 
i f 
3 > * 725 
| p 
. 
ded, Ke. 

4 Q 

"of 

FE 
irs 
+4 
= 782 
* * 


. Ve. 1 e 8 
OY Prion NIN ©, 
lar verb Ay, Page 74. is changed yl. 
an Ad jective, becaufe it has no umme ' e, d 
Reference to Time. une 
Example 2. A creeping Tortoiſe 3 
The Participle crecping | Sac the . : 
| creep Page 75. is changed into an 44 oe 
tive, becaule it has no immediate E oat 
ence to Time. np 
Example 3. A frarned Man. 55 " 

The Paffive Participle learned from " 

== Verb to learn, is changed into an Ad = 
1 tive; becauſe, it has no reſpe& to Tin: n 
= Example 4. A carved Image. P . 
The Paſſive Participle carved, f 
the Verb 10 carve, is changed into an! 
jective, becanfe it has no reſpect to 18 / p 
85 Rule 69 They alſo become AdjeQives 3. 
Example 1. Learned, the Participk | ay 
urn an . by admins 
the rees of Comparifon by nor 
. wif; Foes 24, Rule © AdjeAires of | whe 
on more Syllables Kc. © oo 
Fxampfe 2. Loving, the aQive Pal le A, 
da wle, becomes an Adjedive by the k ive 
= Rue Page 24. "ie 
Rule 70. And alſo when they are co 0 


©; Enn 


pole. U ade en 3 are Ad- 
e becauſe the Verbs become, and ; 
re never compounded with un. 
Of Adverbs. 

. Adverbs are placed neareſt be. 
1 355 1. Chriſtians ought 0 live . 
Wy to the Laws of Chriſt. 

meably. Adverb of Quality, Page 5 
Rule “ And all other Ad verbs ending 
6g. may be compared with more, 
uf, Page 88. Rule, **Moſt Adverbs _. 
gin ly, &c.” placed next. to the 
Jt hive, which 1 is principally affeted ho 


hace 4.” Homer Was a very ancient -.-= 
1 excellent Poet. 8 — 
Adverb of Compariſon, Page 67. 
lbeareſt to the Adjectives ancient, 
pa which are _ affo&ted RT 


ie 72. Adverbs are peel fore & E ; 
3 5 en TER is. a va > — 
oe 

be Adverb very is placed- befre 1 the | 
Rive excellent. Xs Fo 
manple - 2. Chriſtiats' ought fo 

my by et YO FR 


f Ws - 


. 9 "206 | kern Newvewerd 


_ «Moſt Adverbs &c."? are placed aſt 


perly expreſſed. 


was expreſſed being a Paſſive Verb. 


5 N — - 4 N 3 * 2 
N W * N a 
7 * 5 — * R Nr =, * 1 4 
\ - FARE? ; a 
4 * * 
* 5 * 


R 1 py 
5 s * * 3 1 * 
* - * 1 N * 1 - p 
5 ; „ 0 


# 


28 1 


The Adverbs fervently and freq G 
did 7 


5 06 from Adjectires, Page 88. 


. 
amp) 
ſtore, 
prele 
ſe the | 
five 1 
Exan 
ot, 
pon f. 
ſe the 
ez an 
Lamp 
ars tW 
Live, 
pre 
[ mn 
he 
gone. 
Maul 
no! 
Ter 
l Yon 
line J 


Verb to pray. 
Rule 73. If the Verb be paſſive & 
Example 1. It was unadviſedly do 
The Adverb unadviſedly, is places 
twixt the Helping Verb was, and 
principal done, becauſe Was dens, | is 
paſſive. 
Example 2, It was > Woll, and very 


Meil, an Adverb a in its C 
pariſon, Page 88. Rule, „Some are 
regular in their Compariſon &c,” 
better, beſt. 

The Adyerb well, and very pre 
.an Adverb of the Superlative Dey 
3 88. Rule, «Moſt Adverbs endin 
9. c.“ are placed betwixt the Hel 
Verb was, aud the Principal expre| 


Rule 74. Two ae 5: i. e. 70 
verbs of Kc. 

Example. "Nor did they not perceine 
The two Adverbs of denying nor, 
not, deſtroy each her; nod . 


\ 


Euerisn Roptcenrs. 0: 

b if neither was. expreſſed, i. e. 
* perceive. _ 

. Of Cong junctions. 3 

75. The — if, r de. 
ample 1. VF thou reſtore her not. 
ſore, Verb active, 2d Perſon Sl 
preſent Subjunctive, Page 54. be- 

| the Conjunction if, requires a Sub- 

five Mood, | 
Example 2; If thou doſt well. 

W, Verb Irregular, Page 73. 2d 

on ſingular, preſent Indicative, be- 

e the Conjunction ifs fometmes' re- 

ez an Indicative. 

lample 3. 7 hough he live a Thouſand | 

as twice told. 

ine, Verb Neuter, 3d Perſon Gaga = 
| preſent Subjunctive, becauſe the 4 
r though requires: a Seen, 


Prop 2 . _ - 
— — —— — — — n - — — 
P < — . by —— 
EST ED Wo - 
— — 2 — ho —— 2 — — 


— 
— 


—_ TR * 1 
r 
Ao — — — 

2 = = 
— — ES 
— 


bample 4. 7 hough mou would needs —_—_ 
gone. 1 
22 verb nee 41% would, — 2.4 

00 Participle, hy. 85. Paſt imper- * | 

{ lenſe, Page 35. becauſe; the Con- 5 Z 

Kon though, here regie an Indicas 

Ine Mood, has. 


Aa 2 


92 1 * 138 od - OS £ - N A; "a. +00 
** Jp "7 " 4 5 4 , . 4 2 7 1 
4 3 „ 


1 3 
f 5 
5 

8 . wer % , 

4 * 8 

© Ss 4 : 5 ; 
* 2 x 48 

4 = 

< X "3 8 

- , 


1 
EE !xample 3. "Unleſs he waſb fs 
*$ Water. 5 


Wah, Verb active, 34 Perſon fu | 
| | Profent ys. unctive, becauſe the ( 
A unction unleſs, requires a Subjun f 
L- i 925 : 

xample 6. Uni ; thou had ied 
| ' Had/t [poten, 4 Irre fo 

Page 74. ſpeak, ſpake, Holy Paſt 
fett [ngicative, becauſe the Conjund 
1 Wh eme requires In adi 
Ko _ 1 a, 

Example 3. Kro chou bleſs me. 
Bleſs, Verb active, ad Perſon fingy 
preſent Tenſe, Subjuntive, becauſe 

Conjunction 2 r a \ Subjud ; 

Mood. 1 12 5 

Example 8. Eee chow badft baſ 
Had ba ſted, paſt perfect Indica 

N the Conjunction excopt, ſomet 

requires an Indicative Mood. 

I 3 9. Whether thou . my 1 

; Kan, Sc. 

Mes a Verb Newer; Page 43. 2d! 
ſon ſingular, preſent i meme 

47. becauſe the Conjundion 20064 

e, a Sul funive ws” | 


bn 
J$h04 
| pula 
med | 


Wy a 


. * . * » n 
111 ĩõĩèĩ74E᷑ m ᷣͤ TIT I TEE T 3 : * 
- * . f L 1 - 2 x * 3 p : ; 


9 2 Tr * * f — Pref 2 
8 5 ( 150 


Henin aon MENTS | 


3 FF bi 
_th ſeen, Verb 8 in FY 5 — . 
ic /e, Ja, ſcen, 3d Perſon ſingular, Fl 
lent perfect e e becauſe the = 
junction whether, ſometimes e "of 1 


F. 


a icative Mood, 

i he 76. The Coajunction that, with 
4 

un rample 1. Sit thou at the Table, | 


vt thou may write. : 
May write, Verb Irregular i in en, Page 
| write, wrote or writ, written, 2d Per- 
ingular, preſent Tenſe 3 
nerned by the Conjunction that. 
„ eample 2. Thou wenteſt out, that 
jou might idle. 
Mght idle, Verb Nenter, 2d perten 
ular, paſt imperfect Subjunctive, gr. 
ed by the Conjunction at. 
Lxmple 3. Thou art ſent hither that | 
ou ſhould learn. | 
Should learn, Verb Aae 2d Perſon 
gular, paſt imperfe& Subjunctive, gore 
med by the Conjun&ion ht. 
1. The Conjunctions Jeſt and that, &c 5 
krample 1. Love e ts thou © 
ne to Poverty, - Thou 


190 Exel sn RUDAE Nurse 
D hon come, Ver b Irregular, caſting 
way en, Page 77. come, came, come, 
Perſon ſingular, preſent Subjunctive, 9 
erned by the Conjunction 1%, after 
Imperative Verb /ove. + | 
Example 2. Take heed, that i 
'_ ſheak not o Jacob. / - LA 
' Thou ſpeak, Verb Irregular, in en, N 
74. ſpeak, ſpake, or ſpoke, ſpoken, 
Perſon ſingular, preſent Subjundive, 9 
erned by the Conjunction that, after 
> Imperative Verb tale heed. © 
Rule 78. The Conjunction han g 


| - 
jr, bel 
ather- 


le 81. 


Me, Pi 
ned! 
jed by 


Bin, 
We 19, 
Prep 


erm; do, oo ig Faint atone 
Example. Beelzebub, than whom, & 
Whom, Pronoun Relative, deci 
with its Compound whoſoever, Page 
Accuſative Caſe ſingular, governed 


Hr 
fe 19. 
eFrep 


Thee, 
Keuſar1 
Aion 
Rule 
tative 


Exam 


oY 


the Conjunction han. 

Rule 79 The Conjunctions which anſwer 
The Examples under this Rule nt 
no further Explanation, than what n 
be found under the Rule, Page 141. 
| _ Rule 80. Nor is frequently uſed & 
Example 1. I ar love, nor fear the M: 
Mor in the firſt clauſe is uſed for nei! 

Example 2. As the rich Harmony 

” "ones, or dies: = ro 80 


et RbpmennTs | 191 1 
, before the Verb foells. i | is uſed | 


tiber. 
Of Prepoſi tions. 
|: 81. Prepoſitions always require &c. 
Example 1. By me.. | 
I, Pronoun Subſtantive, 1ſt. Perſon 
ined Page 19. Accuſative Caſe, gov- 
ed by the Prepofition by. | 
Example 2, With him. | 
fin, Pronoun, 3d Perſon Maſculine, 
geg. Accuſative Caſe, governs by. 
Prepoſition with. - 
Example 3. To her. 
ler, Pronoun 3d Perſon, Feminine, 
e 19. Accuſative Cate, governed by 
x Prepoſition o. | 
Example 4. In thee. . 
ſhe, Pronoun 24 Perſon, Page 19. 
taſive Caſe, governed by the Pre- 1 
ion in. TH 
ule 82. The Prepoſition rand e 
llative &c. 
kxanmple 1. Hei is a Perſon, hom am 
Ih pleaſed with. | 
The Relative whom, Aenne Caſe. 


kpoſition with, placed in * (after Part 
ite dentence. , Wn 


ular, Page 21. is governed by the. '* 


* 
bs. 
Lxa 
be Pr 
nion « 
vines 


ample 2. This 11 Trath, wo] 
you do not like to be informed . 

| The Relative which, Page 21. R 
a8 «<Fhich and what do not alter, &c,“ 


governed by the Prepoſition of, placed 
mae /atter Part of the Sentence Ml © 
Mule 83. But this Ae of Exp EF. 
£ „„ e 
S In the Examples ander this Rule, pf 
2 repaſitiont are placed, and ſtand n p 
Sacefulſy before the Relative; as, 5 * 
E Example 1. It is better to ſay, N 3 
X bom I am much pleafed. 85 . 45 
Lam much pleaſed with. . p 


Example 2.—<Of which you do 
bike to be informed,” is betrer expre 
than, . hic you do. not like to be 
farmed eh 

| Examp 


[ 


le 3.— 10 ho are yon 60 
ing, is better expreſſed than gut 
are you ſpeaking #. 
| Rule 84. A 9 in * 


= ar again. __ 
= _-. 3 Towhboid,! 4. e. to bolt 0 ö » 


L N E 5 ee 3 3 2 1. . 


RE” 2 ; as Wes”, 
. 4 3 x 


* 
1 
rk 
— 
— 


ExcLin Rypnexxrs,. 


44 6.3% 


6 The Prepoftion placed wor Ke 5 


=. a Fog. $ © 
* = — > = © 3 ay 4 
——ñ i ns ER. ERP. - 
— 25 - 4 _ * — 
= A 4 
— = — — — 
— = 2 — 
— 
2 = #0 
2 "I; — ce 
pn a pang _— l 


A 


'Fxample 1. To throw down: 
be Prepoſition down, àffects the £ 858 
Lion of the Verb throw going before, 
vines ir a new Senſe. 1 
Example 2. To aſs" om 
e Prepoſition on, affects the Signif. 
not the Verb paſs, go going EAA aolf - 
it a new Senſme. F513 
Example 3. To 8 e 1 181 
te Prepofition forward, wa af- 
e Verb go, affects the Wie nenen, 
vires it a new Senſe IL 
Example 4. To caſt „ 11s 
he Prepoſition wp, laced after the. a; 
coſt, affects its Signification, ind 
the Verb a new. Senſe. e 
86. As a Prepoſition ſet | after, Se. 
Example 1. Hereof. © 11 8 
te Adverb here, With the Prepoſtion 
bbjoined, has he Nature of FE. Nh 
ufthis.. 4 tae To” Les 
Example 25 Ther . 
e Adverb 17 with the RI 
bbjoined, has hy Nature of the, Ir 
uo that. 3 3 e 
ple 2 35 | er 


Fg 


* 


* 


\ 


K 
1 oh 


k - 
8 Cane 8 
1 a ; 4 2 A 2 Np 244 
r CEC. — . 
—— —— — — — 2 — _ p — — onde —— 
* . x. = = 2 rr 2 . 
— 2 —— => 5 4 a x: — — — 
y 8 * . — —— — = — — 2 1 — — 
2 — — ry SI rt tes * — — — — 2 * 


2 F * 


1 . Mt NEAR 1 2 75 ben a. 
he Adverb wha e, with the 7 


pon, ſubjoined, Fa ie Nat eek W 
the Pronoun, upon which... | 1 tho 


* od * 


Of Inter ee In . for i 
ee bare no Go eſe. a. 
þ e big 


1 


- 


5 j { iptical 91 
are (ar eg Spi unde) 
4 Rules to Pbien they belong. 


8 * #. 1 b x 4 22 8 : \ x. 7s a 1 5 * 5 4 D 
— * „ come: 
el Sf 445 . > 0 "= 1 ws - 
f 0 þ 


6 
k; 


LY it TG be 7 5 
1 of a Letter ot la 


wt bor 
"is how 


WP 
£ 


* 


— 


5 Whena Ina 2 ers are oni UA 


* . 3 
5 er 


Euer ian RopmenTs ; 


ſhen a Letter or Letters ate e, 
end of a Word, it is called | 
Word alſo, ſignifying a r 
tho”, for though; thro, for thi 
or ith, n ei 3179775 Pet 
eſe. are” frequently uſed in Poetry, 
Fe highly 1 improper in role. $i 
| Of Aphæreſis „ 
of bow well an Author fay 4 np 
tis how much, that gathers Proj 7. 
Of Syncope. © | 
comes from Heav'n, like imwat 1d Li ght 
x buman Pains can ne er come by't. 
EE RE 
107 Ifhou'd Fn to fee: 98 
e Vare well; fo God be wi T0 ö 


+ % 


ANTI r Y 7 Diſt 
into long and Hort. 
LSyllables that haye a Di ohthong] in them, 


[Vowel with a long and broad Sound, or 
jb end with a Vowel are lang; as, Rain, 


ar. . call, Hat, Sale; 5 de 


* 


81 4 
* 3 
= 
. - 5 7 
1 9 
a * 4 * 
A 4 
— +. ' 
* * 


— 


5 — — 


— — — 5 
S ———————— 


2 
22 


Me 


2 a ho 


— 


; * 8 . n ä N 2 PO TY nn 9 TERA * „ . N 
> BS A K N - 3 * CF COTE IF Dan l * _ been 

* > 1 8 4 is * 5 * — - MOM un» 4 is Tow 4 7 5 K . 

1 M * * * 58 * . X — e 5 7 "gz Wh 5 , Fs A * 

» 5 LF 1 1 - 20'S - y, y 2 32 * 
| | ; | „„ 
G 4 * 1 py 
> IG „ — * * Sta * , F , * — 

a 3 >; 22 . i #55 * l . * 
7 8 8 f - & 


106 6 en Abb 


* Accent is a particular Are. of Vo! 

f upon 2 Syllable, ' whether long or ſho 

| 5 in 0-pen,' . * yall dah Arc 

„„ marked thus () . 56 

1 The Accent is more frequently laid 1 

long, than a ſhort Syllable, yet it is ſom 

laid upon the latter; and when that is th 

"=. ſhort Syllable · ecomes in ſome Me 

a long one, or has what they call a doub 

cent, the Conſonant ſounding double 

Money, borrow, though the laſt: Syllat 

8 theſe Words, be long, yet the Accent i 
Py on the firſt, which are ſhort, and they, 6 

1 Account, in ſome Meaſure become long 


Derivative Words of two Syllables an 
rally accented on the former; ah" 'artful,] 
* ful, careleſs, fearleſs. 

5 But compound Words of two Sylladl 
=”. generally accented on the laſt — 

Proôve, confine, design, £xact.... 


Words ot two Syllables, which are 
'  _- Derivative nor compound, are general 
CcCeeented on the firſt Syllable; as, Author 
= Tye, Favour, Flavour, Creature, Nature 


uns 0! 
Went 
| Colled 
| Conce 
| Cofe 
In extr? 
requen 
[Rebel 
Word 
tives, | 
Accent 
s, artf\ 
But V 
pmpou 
te Acc 
es; A 
Ne. 6 
Theſe 
fred eit 
As t 
from th 
ff three 
be if 
But 
SRP Ir Frer 
WE When Nouns or Adjettives of two Syllgg deir © 
die written in the ſame Manner as Verbs meräto 
Nocuns or Adjectives have the Accent orator 
, a the Verbs on the laf . ,, fr 
1 Whe 
5 1 a 25 2 ey Is PLD N 


they ay 


n 
BEM 7 
os 


Enes Ropers = 


huts or TAS. | Verbs. . 
accent © to accent, „ 
Ment pn 494 CY to abſent, 4 1 rok 
cee do collect. | So 

| Concert 0 ; to concert, 1 mes W 1 
I extract 746 exträct, N 
rquent. 3 10 NE See 3 
Rebel 5 een XC 


Words of hos 87a formed from Det. 
tives, by adding a Termination, keep the 
decent on the fir? Syllable of their Primitives, 
s, artfully, Jeykuly, cär elesſly, &c. 2 
But Words of three Syllables, formed from 
ompounds, ' by adding à Termination, Keef 
ke Accent on the /aft Syllable of their Primi- 
ines 3 as, e eee enen cane 
Theſ Rules hold a if; i Syllable, bs 65. 
fred either to the derivative or compoundꝰ 

As the Engliſh remove the Accent as the | 1 
rom the laſt $yllable as poſſible, moſt Words 
three or more an have the Accent on ml 
Ike fe Syllable. i % f Dew sr 
But Engliſh Words, dexiatel Eee the Lathk 
Ir French, ſometimes follow the Accent of 
their Originals; ; as, Spectator, Teſtator, Nu- 
nerator, &e, from the! Latin, tho we day, . 1 
orator and Scrũtator: dla penny Maſque 


ke, from the French. 1 
Syllabies than due, 


When Words have more 
4 are called Poly ſyllables, 


[ Eyorzey Boy: MENTS = 
/ Polyſyllables ending i in Jos ion. have their 
cent on the Vowel. imme ately before 
which is properly one Syllable, and ous 
as ſbon, as, Admiration, Condemnũtion, 
clamätion, Tranſp ation, ns 
Some ae es have two, and ſome tl 
2 t theſe are Words which do 
occur in Fe: frequently in Proſe, and | 
ſelm! in 15 5 ee incony 
— hewhbilitg; & 


5 DO ICY FEE One TRAD EPI ct P2941 "Is Oe bw G7 
EB VERSIFICATION. wy 
Hr 021 all wit 
X ERSIFICATIONis theplacing of Wo 
in ſuch Order as to produce chat 
„ which diſtinguiſhes Verſe from Wy 
Va conſiſts of a certain Number of 105 rs 


_- Jr bo one __ rg 1 3 
'2 . Mit ge cou. et E927] 
3 n Craſons,) and t eir Change, 2 
" Milton 
. no Bachak the abou: Nit conſis of ten d 
Jlables, and ſuch Verſe is called Blank Je 
becauſe the Syilables at the: End of each 1 | 
do not ſound alike. 5 
When the Words or Syllables atthe en 
o or more ane dene, een 
Some have at firſt 7 Vite, a Hai. 
ee ne age 


1 1 


Thaw zu obne 


tl reſembles Poetry, in eich, 
uneleſs Graces, which no Methods teach, 
vſich a Mafter-hand. alone can reach. 
„ Pope, 
yme is not like Blank Verſe confined — 
n Number of Syllahles in a Line, but 
from three, to ten or twelve; as, mY 
Verſes of three Sadler 8 
In Moans, | 
bu Groans. 


K 


1 La,, 
with Trans : 
Verſes of four Syllables. 


trains decays 
Umelt away. 


raviſfd Bars, 
Monarch hears. 


> 4 


Verena . 
dong could prevail, 
2 and der Hell. Pi 
e rege. 

Y Aud wirb Wer, 

| hive . 

| " {ABD CUE THEY Ad 
Verſes of fix ROW 

tie bud Trumpet ſend, 


/ 


—U O_o”; 
- 


\ 3 MER. 72 


« - - — — - * — 
- — My — — — 
1 ͤĩ ͤ—— ION 
3 


E 9 
y , + 
* 4 e 
8 22 2 6 8 
— [2.23 18; * 2 n 
3 224 * — 7h e Nt 


* oo * wo, * 4 2 LF 5 5 7 * 
a = Cs Gt * 5 5 
8 . 8 
. N. 4 1 . 
* 
d a 
he * 
* 8 


7 


* Tx6195 an Ro: * un ed 
Till the Roofs « all around, Sl ba _ 
The ola Ecchoes, rebound: END 88 ny 
OP To 8 7 bh 5 5 | Fe ta | 
Such Muſic Fc, as "tis aid, F bs tals 
2 a. never made „„ 


8 | Verſes of {cod TY 
+ 4 . Streams that euer s © © 
0 the fragrant Winds that blow. 
. . Page. 
5 335 Verſes of eight Le 
. Card. are cruel, but the brave, 
„ Love Morey and delight to ſauve. 
. LY 
cxitict 7 read. on other Men, . 
e 39885 N an 
| Prior. 
Verſes of nine Syllables, 
© Delany Fa, a Silver Standiſh . W. Nene 
> When T no more a Fer can dots: = ne 
* a Swift, 
blk Fire, Water, Waka, are Man' 
Bays wiſe Prefe for, Vander e. 


* I = 7 4 Ten Sy Hables, Blank Verſe. 
Aus at their. ſhady Lodge argv Trick 25 


| Both 2 and under 2. 1 925 11 


* x 4 7 fog l : 17 
PE BS, 18 75 


1 105 547 "74 0:4 o S * 


qa e ba 
87 x ? 2 25 ; 


2 
7 


% 


£4 E 
43 k 9477 . 


Ten Syllahles Rhyme. . 23 
thinks a  faultly 7 Piece th e, 
[that ne 'er was, nor ts, nor er will 


„ * 


Eleven Syllanles. 
me, 0 ye Muſes, was May 
Phebe was with | me wherever” { wen te 7 


5 3 
2 0 


Twelve Syllables. 


be full prove as fortunate 
men's cheiceſt Gy ts are all re 22 Var he bes. 


2 e 8 ; 1 8 Prior. 
ß Line, which conſiſts of twelde | 
, is called an Alexandrine, apd 1 is ne . 
but upon particular Occaſions. | 


-_—— ws. 
he = 


* 


= * 2 


7 1 1 2 LS: 
* 


22 


PII 
& * 
red C 


lides theſe Kinds of Verie in Rhy ; - „there 


1 
1 


here, uſed chiefly in Epigrams, and! in the I ; 
Stle, when the Words ſodd alike it e ; £: 
uber Line, and the Number of — a8 5 
metimes 1 the | | 5 
going firſt; E 

John Io great 

but John unhappilꝝ, 1 

publiſh-it to all the Nation; 

ure John and Lare e # 


VE 


82 


D & 1 
5 be. Þ* ; 5 28 


4 


Sometimes theſe alternate Verſess are q 
Len h in every Line; as 
e Pride of every Grove 1 che, 

"The Violet fuweet, and Lilly fair ; * 

5 duppld Pint, and bluſbing Roſe, 
bo 5 To dect my char ring Chl oe's Ter, 


? + Wy 2 | 2 3 C 13 To 4 * Pp 1 1 5 + 


E EY 
khongh. no o general Rule: can u be giv 
always hold good, for placing the 
properly, in the ſeveral. poctical Example 
Dory 3 yet the following C Obſervations 


%. 
* FA 


Fe: 


ceſſary 
65% "i In Verſes of three 
cent is moſt Propel ly placed uf 


* „ 
£4; 


— * > i] 


ed Söllen Means, 
- Hollow Groans, * 
May my Lays, 
Swell with Fräiſe. 


* 


The Sträing decay, 5 

03 ud melt aways SM 

With raviſh'd Ws 

The Monarch: helen... ; 
9 — at In Verſe of ve dy len 


Pins Song could: pail | 85 

Death and ee 5 

ſi iid with Wee, ee TO ky 
1 Verſe. ah; bow Syllables;. that | a. ES 
For quick Pronunciation, have the AC 5 
izeed upon the. third and { WP . 


let the loud Trumpet W 425 


= — = ==. 


- . od 


Til the Roofs, all around, 
The ſhrill echoes rebound, 1 8 
* Verſes of this. Meaſure, that . 2 1 
pronunciation have the Accent on the DE 
L fourth, and. xth ; as, „ 
Such Müſic,, as” tis F aid, = | 
before was never mademee 
z Verſes of ſeven 9 are accented. . 
l. third, | th, and ſeventh; as Ws 
Veaus take my votive Glaſs, 2 


0 


vince I am not what „„ 

6, Verſes of eight Syllables are accent | 

l. ſcond, fourth, fexth, and eighth; 1 

Cowärds are erüel, büt the, broves...: 1 
Love Mercy, and deli be tc fg... 
. Verſes of nine Sy i i Aon Ac. | 4 5 
Fe 40 Kxebz and-eig . 


— — 


» 25 4 , 9 5 
— — 5 — — WW — — — — — 7 _ =E — — ow — — — 5 5 — — — 2 
2 » * « — - - @ be 2 . — 1 - — 2 : — 
5 hs N — —— fi — (I — — ba * — wr — — — 
— _ a — - - T >_> * - TY 1 
7 =_— 8 7 =3 — 2 1 * . - . oo is So. 
- SS N © 6 — © — _ og Re CE - 5 > 
— 2 2 —— =_ _ G - — IR; : pe * 8 10 
SEE \ - - AF l G d —— \ 


- 
ke” 5 * o * 


* Þ 7 


ac nie A 1 Iver + Ständih, 
1 mote a Pen « can b andi 
1 £2 2 


e 


— 


TOY Has WE: 
= * 


3 


— Nr 


* 8 oF Time, O0 ye Miſes Was happily” ſpẽt 


057 8. Verſe ey 81000 Silke! whether 
oi have the Accent on every ſecond, 


1 fexth, eighth, e A / Alexandrin 
on the twelfth ; as, 1 


Thus at thèir mad Fr arion, bot 

Both' ritrn'd, -and' under open ok y do 

The Gd chat mäde both Sky Yo. ir, Eartl 
TE: 7 25 Heav'n. SE a. ge 

\ Whoever thinks: * fauleieſs Ploce t to doe, V and 

| Thinks what, ne's er 1 WS, nor is, gor be uacia 

bat the tail prove as ram" 46 for. 

. H, men's 5 choice Gi ah al: re Og 

25 for her, Mo [wage + | ne 

' 05% 9. Verſes of elevin Sybables k. Lan 


* cectit on the ſecond,” ith, eighth, & eliv . 
12 


When Phebe went wich me where ever! 
Tho' Engliſh Verſe e takes this 
* are N to Favs 1 199 is"abſoſbr 


1 
5 > 
1 5 N * A 15 ; * * 7 * 
— 3 'Þ BROS 1 * : . a * / —4 
„ 4 : - : £ 1 at... "47 i 
% £ * 1 * ; * e pr wy k Ih * 4 $ 3 4 * BE | : 4 
\ a . - — L SON eb l 4 , 11 
: "ds 31 * „ 9 2 ; 
2 3 * * 6 8 _ * 2% *% 2— FA # ; 
1 — * : — ” BA _ 


ob ins a: 4757 Ib 

to that Meaſure, which conſiſts of 
[able letz, and are to be accented accord 
"hae" as theſe Lines have double endings 
| deyrronli of nine Syllables, yet they f! 
7 belong to the Meaſure of eight, an 
- accented.----This Rule will be found to be 
_— whether the Meaſure r of _ 


8 


My © Ut 
whol 


T7 by: + Streſs upon every Syllable — 5 5 5 1 
„ Poetry allows great Liberty in thi«“- 
and à Variation of Accent, fo far fror 
Hag the Harmony of Verſe, ene 
race and Bean .. 
ler all, the common Rules of readiaf 
þ hold: gaod i in reading every Kind oft Py-' 
„ and a Perſon acquainted, with the trages 
maciation of -Englith Proſe, will never be „ 1 
Loſs in e Lerſe with Proprighy: aud 3 9 60 
i Bara, eſpecially, Spas its. be taught ay” © 
unce'and read Verie, as they do com- 
Pugas without affecting to give 
iched Accent to many Words, boys en 


of 


wal Streſs- and Tone of the, Walon” | 42 80 wt # 


« * 1 2 * 


5 1-508 3 


EMP HAS TI 


0 kent is 2 particular Streft of * 
kid upon a Syllable, ſo Emphaſic'ts a 1 
nn; or Sound 1 (ING e * 


t Word ii Sinton 0 inlet the: 1 
ls is laid, is called che 1 Ham, 
Able it gives e Hutt wal POE * 3 
vhole Sentence; as, 5 


eee 0 bed, L Thou are the + 5 - 


a 


8 < 2 
0 —— — all 4-1 — 2 _ 
My WS — a, ä 1 A 
= 0 259m xs. 204 T1744 * =: 


45 Word Them is ihe ne bal 
15 "quires. a ſtrong Sound of the Voice. 
4 Should ſuch a Man as I flee? He 
Wn Streſs is to be Tones pgs: a, + che En 
e. rl,, 8 
che Emphatical Ward be? of two 80 U 
that Syllable upon which the erent fall 
be pronounced. obeys than. obere 
would bay %%% A 
„Did not the Maſter, before 0 went 
bah, order Silence in the School? _ 
The. Accent naturally belongs to the 
«Syllables in Maſter, ftriily,” aud Silence, 
they being the Emphatical Words muſt be 
nounced with a ſtrong Sound. 
Jet if the Primitive Word, And its eum 
5 ſtand i in Oppoſition to each other in a Sent 
the Accent, which belongs to the laſt Syl 
| changes Place, and is Ered u} 0 | 
The Fut molt is as ; well 2s FREY 
in on, Hay: de high! 
: . 775 
Att: your. ; > 1 wad 8 5 8 more 
i due. The compound Words' un 
LY, A er, erat, have the Accent oa 
3 if they ſtand in a en ib | 
dee =» 894 
de there. may be Fe 3 Accents 
; ons Word, Io there may be tuo or thre 


be. 1 x 


9 | batical Wards i in one Sentence; bn» in < | 
'L above e from Ant 75 


Wy 
WE 4 
A 1 1 I 
$111, | 
5 14 
Men 
L 9 
in bil 
11. 
17 
33 1 
"mY 


in ak ect for Wi 11 hw - Rat: + By 8 y 3 | 
111 critics gert, 177 prove 2 75 ae! 7 „ 


— — — 2 
— — — 4 


- * 
2 W 
＋ 3p. % 
ue 
IR) Rs. 
= 


fi « laſt,” f 
be Words Wits, Portis Grier, and . 
I Emphatical, © 52 
be great and Eee Rule to fiod out . 
luca! Word in a Sentence, is to conßider 
Ab the chief Deſign of the Writer; and 
Word, which points out the pee 
in of the Sentence, is the Epiphatical Word.. : 
þlterrogative Sentences, the Word chat 
| the Queſtion is is | Eryinsd The Enphaticd | 
p i there? What are you Joie ? Whither . 
you going? Here the Emphaſis hes on 
\ Vhat, and Whither, "Words. that, alk the 
on. 
but this 1 1$ not always fo. Fay: in e 
15 theſe ; Who was the greateſt! Oraror 
o vas the beſt Poet?” Greateſt and rome 1 
Imphatical M.. * ON \ 0. 7 8 25 1 
When two or more Words are ber in pe. 3 5 = 
a in a Sentente they are all emphatical; an, 4; 6 il 
Mo unto them that call evil! good, and good- 8 _— 
|: that put Darkneſe for Light, nd 'L 
Darkneſs; that put bitter for ſweet, . 
for bitter i v. 20, In this Verſe . 
evil, Light and . 0 pot and , 
the Emphatical Words. 4 | 
| will appe ar f rom the followidy Hage: 5 3 2 + 


6h - = 
A x T8 
Ro 7 


* great egos cnn *] 125 to. * Ep 8 


3 ms.” 5 : + 
N A: 
1 q * 'Þ 
1 * 
A 4 | 4 A. 
-, 1 1 
J $1440 
4. 
46 LETT 
, 0 - 
1 
1 2 
115 
| WAY 
I 4000 
— 1 
18 1 
2 mar ? 
$4 * 
[NL 
' 1-44 
#7; 88 
4:1 8! 


. * 
8 - 
0 
P 
— 


— —— — 


— — __—_— 
— 7 — = - 
ee — en P N ** -- — 
* p Lane” > — — — 
2 N __ : — — 
Sr —— — 1 2 5 — 
2 2 — — — — _ — 


— —— — 


= — 


5 
> 


4 


. 8 © 


por 73 "is the: Senſe 6 U 
A Senreaice 5 very different, aceoidi 
* different Words on "heh the Anh 


A „ a ka; ints . 1 
8 This Queſtion may be taken a Fo Tn 
5 Ways, according to the different Words Eopuiſ 
5 which, the Emphaſis is laid, os or 

| 1. If it be laid upon the "Word you, tl | 
dee may be ne, but my _Brather will. E Point 

2. If it be laid upon walt, the: Anf jo divie 


„ he,: n, but. 1 hal ride: © 


3. If it be laid on the Words with n= 
e ma r Bs. 1 AG; engaged with n ſolo 
. 5 1 3 
I it be laid: upon ihe W ord cum For 
"Bnſecr may be, ne, I have in Tun. 

244. If be. laid upon the Word fd t 
Auer may be, no, but I will te. morrouſ or! 
wy ce it appears, bow neceſſary i it is to hic 
the Emphaſis on a right Word, to dete Mi 
rit 


25 Senſe of the Writer or Speaker. 
The four following ſhort Rules conce nog 
the Emphaſis, taken from. Dr. Watts, n 


| (aurat! 
l to the Learner. dhe * Wy 
5 72 1. Carefully avoid Upiforwity of voi 
 'neading without any Emphaſis at all. Prop 
2 Do not multiply ihe Accents, oo ” hb 
ie Tone of the ip To often. 3, 5% Wo 


Peri 


ging or chan 
2Þ ake Be o leing 6 a Streſs of Th 
22 * Words where W ought t to Wen 


„ 


N 9 * * * N x . 4 
Y. ; > SE TIE" nnen " 7 
Is * * 1 . 7 7 * 
as © > „ . 5 
5 * te * * 
; * * 5 wee IP) I 2 | 
: 7 * * 5 - 5 $ * + * 1 — : : 2 | N | 
1 2 * % E 752 ä 
. : : © Lo ow? VE, ; Bop 
þ * = N 5 3 « - : ö | ; 
eh / Py 7 5 i * * 4 
£ * # . * % LO 26 a 


renten Monsun 209 . 
ve a Care of omitting the. Jrms or or EY J 
where ehe to * OE. TH 


. * 6 CEL 


_— —————— — 
* > — * — —— — 


1 * 1 2 * 2 
— — 00 — 2 — 4 - 
— h re ben. 6 FIN 
— — — — * 5 no_ 
f = 2 Ih . 
4 — — — 2 * 


PUNCTUATION: 


I * 9 1 REY | EF. 
ACTUATION. or PoINTING;. 13 . an 
luouiſhing in Writing, by certain Marks 8 


* or Fauſes 1 in a Sentence. . 


bd 


9 


Prints or Marks Wade uſe of. in „wie. = 


wm 


RY I marked thus 


nod or full Stop. 


files theſe Points, . the Sera | 
x, or Reſts in a Sentence, there are other 

rhich beſides their Reſts, denote an 

tion of the Voice, accordi _ to the Senle 

Writer, or ee 4 N 5 5 
errogation, tags Br —- e 
ration, 75 marked ſts. 4 . a 5 75 | 
atheſis, 85 3 N f 


Foportional Quitmaley, or „Time of OO - 
, Vith reſpe& to one another, 1 deer. . ' 

e following general Rule. © — 
29 is a Pauſedouble wy : Leng os” Dh, 


# * _ 
22 on ; GEO 42 4 - : I 
LG * (os % A 1 ** f S 4 | 
7 0 8 - 4 % 1 ; 8 8 N I ' | 
. 1 * - . 3 A 57 1 


.#a\1 
. 


1 - * 
2 EE e 4; " 
: 


tze Colo J ; the Colm i double of the Sen 
5 and the Semicolen 3 is double ot the Com jan eac 
38. that, if the Comma'be a Stop 28 es 
1 we can count ane, either in quick or ſlow | Rich 
date Semicolon will be double the Leng 
denne, dus: The Color will be Jovble of Watte 
1 micolon as, one; tui, three; Nur: Ah p ued 
Period will be double & the Colon; 5 0 5 akay 


nr four, Ave, ex, ſeven, right... W's 


* 6 ; | 1 The Inte err Ration and 2 '*clymation by bantive 
e as to their Quantity or | 


: and may be equivalent, in that Reſpect e Boy 
8 a Colon, or or >; TS a8 the 3 
e FEY NT . = 
' The Parentheſi de 2 Fe f 1 as, 
ds 2 Comma, . carefu] 
A hams i alen aber ever mp r 


N making Part of a co wy 2 
28, TIO love' to play, when 
Ser gh : Theſe are the Rules ofPointiv 
_ ſerve kem well, ſtudy them carefully, 
you W Il learn to Point Correctiy. | 
A Comma is uſed” beforeRetutives aol ane 
nf joining ſimple Sentences tog 
and at the End of the Relative and Conju 
Sentence, when inſerted in the middle 
nother, as, „Diligent Boys, whe arc f 


e Praiſe, vill certainly be edified by: 
. 58 Fele becoine 1 5 
© 
2 „ 
* 7 4 = 
Wed 3 bY , ** 
. a 25 2 
Ls * *. a 
2 * . 5 * * 
* — FN * 
5 Li 2 F % N . , 
a p 25 1 Ta 0 4 * *e 5 
. 
- 4 wh 1 74 4 * > 
* 5 + 2 2 7 + * . 


3 . RK 27 /@ 
EY. W 
885 PL =" y 


4 
2 5 ON 


Fuels Rur 
| ſeveral Subſtantives c 
be nr Sub to the Ver Dy 1 | 
; erated by a Coming, as, Honour, . 
| Riches, and Power purfued, Father 0 x 
Humility, Self denial; Temperance, ant = [i 
fiction, 1. e. Honour is purtued, Riches 9 1 
| ſack, Power is Lr and Grandeur =_ 


4 


#: > 
57 


e A bel 1 


bantive, they are alſo ſeperated bra out _— 
1 %a . careful, * and 1 _ 


Gn wa: or two Aﬀettives; connec - 
7 a Conjunction, are not ſeperated by a 0 - 
. as, „Thomas and John are Ane = 

arcful, dutiful and obliging.” | „ Oy 0 


34. 


4 


be abſolute gentence, 1 Noun” or 0 
wun put abſolutely with „ . 8 2 
5 comma'd off from · che Reſt of the Sen-. i 
. See Page 135. as, It is too late, the 5 


en <a: ES rate dat — SEA 
FO RE ms — — ESO EET — ay 
r — _ © — 


_ 
— - 7 ü 

lang folen, to lock the D or. - nn 
1 1 7 . 1 

| yn *. 


CIS 
* 


ows in Appoſition, * confiking df A 
Terms, or when the latter 5 e 
&pendents, are ſeperated by a Comme., 4 3 3 
ones, e = 
Towers“ yy 


1 
745 


1 
—— 


[6 
7 9 
2 
1 * \ 
2 
* 
; * 
112 
3% - 
, 
7 4 
> 
: 5 
: g 
KY 
* 
1 
11 
1 


+ 


. 8. 
8 1 * 8 n > = 
. * eg? : „ 5 
* 7 5 
2 7 be: e 5 h 
' BIT + ” » 
. - — 8 
N ) 28 
, - eo, "4 
: . 5 $ 
* \ 
, 
L 
* „ 42 4 4 7 7 
* x 1 * 
4 74 * * i 
* „ 
/ 
- 
* o 


Za Comma is placed before, and 2 
e its Dependents, in the middle of 
tence as, % Man, Following. Pleaſures, 
his Mew.” bis foo nt 
The Name of the Boris" we addrel 
= to is diſtinguiſhed by a Com 
Great are e thy WR 0 infin 


2 3 92 ＋ 4. 2 1 : . 1 
; # 7 1 55 OY 5 Sd 4 . — 5 N „ i - | rech 181 


"Lot not my Words offend thee, ad 101 10 

p 35 Makers. be e while I r gilde 
EY Semicolon 3 is placed after a Memb Watu: 
Cay. that requires à greater Pauſe n and 
{uh Comma, yet does not of itſelf make » Hates 
Pleat Sentence, but is immediately follow ut is be 
. Hometting mene connected with it, as ſue t 


a 25 37 = £ 8 © Whe! brave know only WED to 8 1 a 
. | . che moſt refined and generous Pitch of I 9 
8 . that human Nature can arrive ati · Co 2 


have done good and kind Actions: Con 


iy ; 5 have even fought, nay eee 1 5 
*M 2 3 dy” but 4 Coward v never 0 gad E 


dannen Sern pie - 
| vice ag 


en is placed Meet 4 a Member 

de, which of itfelf would wake 2 1 
hence, Yet is followed by an _ additional _ 
* making a more full and perfect Scnſe; ; As, 


There is no greater Monſteri in Being, 8 
ger ill Man of great Parts: He lives like 5 
loin a hea with ons ide of, him dead.” 

reer, * 


Wy 


wy 


A. 


lan! is alſo WY when an Example, or 15 
e Feech introduced. | i 


| / 


- 


A Period is uſed alc Sentence! is pert 7 
inimned, and ſtands unconnected in Con? © 
Tution, with what follows; 5 as, We” | 


Wature and Reaſon direft one Thing, bac. 57 
. "way Humour another: :; To Ra . 


lt is both endlefs and intricate ; pres we. 

nne the other, our "Paſſage is einge "5g thi! 
Id what we aim at eaſily attainable. 55 2 2 CEN bi i 
| ao not doubt but ee & c. 85 ns Fee 9 EY Wi; 
KB Spe ator. | 


| Th Herr E xclamation,, a 8 1 11 0 
beſide marking the Pauſes in ee, _ 
te an Alteration or Seel the 
fire b to the Senſe. 1 


9 27 WW 2 * Q EX 8 e Na 7 a K of >| >; 0 A ” y Yo. 
7 = a * * 12 n * - ** „„ 7 722 EE RG R i g We * * ; 
* 3 : £ 23 4 4 . 4 % A % I \ is oe ra, 8 . I t Pu. rb wy ad % 
3 * 8 7 4 1 4 N n | a vt . ? 4 1 n 8 8 * 4 ; * A * * * 
* > * : - 4 4 , e 5% _— - * g — 4 
= g 1 * 9 : * 4 b K 7 4 ** 4 * + . . 
AY t . 1 9 3 7 x 1 * 6 7 9 5 
PPV a 5 8 3 7 #4 
7 : 1 


oy Et. 5 mnt Rip the 
Fi The In rrogation is uſed hep a Queſtia! 
*% cry: and requires the Voice to be omew 
"raiſed; „But how ſhall they call on Him, 
hom "this have not Pein And how 0 
. they believe in him, of whom they have 
- heard? And how thalt rpg hear vithout 
Preacher? | Fame *. e | £ 
In : | | i Pronoul 
The e is 7 5 3 a Word 
Semen expreſſing Wonder or Surprize, 


requires t the: Voice to be more exalted; as, 


<Thele are thy glorious Works, Parent 
Pap FF 
Almi hey! 'Thine this e Ties | 
Tha workdrous fair; A how wondi0 
5 „ en F 


The e 118 a. EE in tl 
i of auother, without affecting eith! 
REG the Senſe, or the Conſtruction and equi 
X 4 8 * Voice to be ſomewhat depreſſed; a8, 


5 l know that in me A Hhat ir, in n ug 
bellen no good Tan Fenn. vie 16. 


The erde Marks uſed; in Writing ate theſ 
1. Accent () placed overa Vowel to {het 


| EP 5 | ran Iu of the Wust is to de eh | 


oftrops 


* 5 3 
3 
We ©. 
FY 
. 8 2y 
833 
— * 3 
* 2 > * 
* . 
* q 
Mo PO 


 EvoyiemRvpmery 


1 Apoſtrophe, { * ) a Comma placed FR FEY : 
af! of Letters, chers chat 2 e or Let- 
re left out; as, can 17 tor cauhet; war: 
in,, . 


A Double 4 40 FIR the Conforant | 


pronounced double; as, laviſh. EY 


J Afteriſk ( # Ja Star, refers to ſane Re- 
uk in the Margin or Bottom of the Page. 
ſhen ſeveral of them are joined together 
1s „. % * * they ſhew that does; 
ing is wanting or immodeſt in the Paſſage, + 


4. Braces are uſed to join dercn 
Lines together and ſaves the Writer the 
Trouble of re ins b 18 Word 


Words; as 


den otes the Irene 
or Similitude of a Thing \ 


* 


* 
PRE » 4 We. > « 5 


Brafes are likewiſe vled\10 join ſeveral | 
3 in Poetry; as, 


w in Time, with equal Strokes 4 ron; 
kt once thebruſhingOars, and brazen-prow, C 
an "Pp the 5 * the: op” 99 


* 2 ” 
N Wy 2 : # * 
* ” if 
» * : oY * 
l 3 


* 2 4 45 F< * 2 * OE rn y b, 4 * 1 23 9 rn 
5 0 * * 9 ö > * * Te 2 EL 8 y * n 2 i . 5 „ 
3 + 9 » K * I £5 $7 4k ONE a. 2 OE EE . | 3 . 
* $ * & » % * . F : \ . * & a 4 * * * * 2 bb” 

18 ö 


x X 2 " N or e F ] are comm 
* ub to include a Reference to ſome al 
Book, or to another Part of the Book as 

For à full Explanation of this Subject 

| Robertfon's Hiſtory. Charles V. Vol 1.1 

TC“ ee this Grammar, Page 28 

[+ 6. Breve () is a crooked Mark overa Va 

el, denotes that} it muſt be ſounded: Won; 
| put, thi. TTT [ 
11. Caret 15 F places undep ce Aves ſhe 


- that fome'Letter,. Syllable, or Word is 

dur by miſtake, and muſt be n in Cx: 

* where the Caret is placed; , ig 

» DYE in Need 414 1 
oy land, of daily Aang, 98 En 

Weg 54 i 9 . bor. 


5 2. Circumflex, (* I che Janie l in 1 0 


i Ip | Corey, placed over a Vowel. to denote that 
muſt be ſounded. longs as, Euphrittes, Thy 
_ falonica, , a 
9. Diakriſis, 665 ) placed over the later 
3 ” bo, two Vowels, ſhews: theyare not a Diphthor 
28 but are io be propounced as tO Ane, 
3 | Alen Archelalis. e 
N 10. Hyphen, (-):over a Vowel. ſhews it 
: belong; ; as, hide: at the End of a Line ſhe 
that the Word is divided and Part of it begi 
by . the next Line. It alſo links two Subſtanuy | 
q 4 8 PE. ber 5 N Mansſervant. - = arg 


5 5 * 
WY : et Re, 
38 
n YL 
* % 
Ls 3 
Fe. 3 * * 
* 3 ; 1 
4-45 - — ; # 
4 OY 9 * 
N. 9 2 
n fx * AS 2% 
* 55 1 Op * 8 
ba Fae - £4 1 a x 
y * : FT, f * 7 OY he. 
. 3 29 4 > 3 1 8 i 
: 2 2 2 * * 0; 22 
22 5 "+ IS.” 


5 — 
. = — — © = — = * : = — 8 - £ — — (2 — —— — No — 
— * — > l — — — — — — — — * "TP — 2 2 -- — PEER — — — —— — — 2 ee: 5 . 2 « 
— . = X 7 0 — _ < - — — 4 * - r: — — t — — . ; r — — — Y 83 
- p; 3 — — 2 Gh-- == — — * _— 2 — 8 - — - Ig . — — — x ” 8 PC Sn — — = — 5 1 8 1 — = — 
— 5 — — — a” as — - — <2 — — —— 5 — — — — rrens: SAGE eaves = 2 5 


pro 


—— 0 4 — — ——— 


e 
1 - « 5 ; 2 


. —öÄ—  ——— 


* 4 — 152 


* 


4 


* 


ihe 
(a, 


* 


N * * 
* 
93 ** 
* * 
4 Yao 
'; To, = is 
* *. * en 
$ * : « 
s * : $ 
4 0 > 
» =- 
© p 4% 
N i 
. 3 . 
"*" - 3 

a” E * 

* -+& 7 
1 ” W 4 

, * 

C : 


* 


A 


* Other 
P 
fo 
the Bible 
722 


, 


— 


HIER 
18 ; 
EESE > b 


> *. 
n 
d * 
* 26 


y 
era ate fan 


$ 


* 
o 


I 
6 


f the'Pa 
urpot 
var 
ey? 
chiefly ir 
on, 
apte 
rk o 
ths 


\ uſed ch 


et 

; 

gurex 
aph, (J 
gin | 


a 


1 


0 
P 
N 
> 
5 
lac 


. 
1 


2 3.5 


18. 


4 


o 


fore wg 
115 | 
9 


O1 4 
A 


ble. 
ſome 
Fi 


1 


10 


age 
5 18 
125 

to 


- 


es ds a 


of a 
f 2 Paſſag 
* 4 „ 
Bod 
letimes 2 
Cor 
i 


7 
ge c 
Es or CH 


tigre Let, 


for this 
ble Obel 
tod 


(4 
15 
Pa 
330 


d 3 
* * 
- 


* 


a , 
by 


min 


The Obt 


1 


he Boito 
to for 
u 


? 


* 


don 
. 


re 
tf 
dt 
y 


fon, 
9 
17 50 
lometi 


t the 1 
ing 
L 


merh 
ra 
ſl 


6 * 


7 
ae u 
( 
ra 
Lad « 
n 


0 
5 En 
; Seat 
di 
ak ! 
5 
Eben 
Word 


di 
21 25 
i 


ex (1 
® 
11 
£ 
P. 


il 
Fin 
5 
4 
5 


Fl 
50 


or Auns Mund: in the 
Tear of the World 
Ap. Apoſtle, April 1 1333 
4 R, Anna a © Privy Seal 
Anne; of D. Duke, Dui 
gni, in de W 
Fee of the Reign |. 
46, P., G, C. Aſtro- 2 
nomical Profeſſor * viniey 
Oreſham College, | Decr-or 10h; D 
eg. Auguſt 5 af **. 
Bart. Baronet l 
3. 59 Bachalar of 
;- Divi o 
7. Bihopprp 8 


Tap?! 94 . 


6G Go. Go Corpus Criſt | 
College | Feb. Februar 


8 Cent. Gates, an Hupe | F. R. S. Fellow o 
"1 deed: | ' Royal Society: 


Gen. Genefis, Ge! 
Cent. Gentleman 


. * that 10 
Jaſus homi num 
| elus the | 22 Manuſtript 

Men . Manuſcripes *. 
. IAN. S. Memoria . 
Juris Dittor, Far Sacred 0 0 Mes 
or of Law | © -mory 
| 1 jurit utruſ- N. 3. Nota bene mark | 
Door, Doctor well 
doth the Civil | Nu or wer 
{Canon Law { ber 
J Jacobus Rex, 2. S. Old St 
fg James. * Oz. Ounce © <A 5 
uy, Julius 0 p. per by | 
June, Junius Ae cent. Pip enten, 
Ling I dy the Hundred 
et | Philomath, © Philoma- 
re,aPoundSter- | | ek, LoverGFLnerm” 


i Pound Wei ght | P. 1. 8. Profefſor . 
leuts 85 Muſic in Greſham 
a Lord Chief ö 5 DONE 3 j. Prof 1 ä 
Miene 9 Cr. 
. Lęum Doctor, Theokgie Prada. 
tor of Laws | Ke * 
Locus Sig illi, the Divinity in 
Pace of the Seal | - ham College 
4 Maſter of Arts 5 
March. 
2 e Doftor 
r of Phyfic © 


_ 


4 — 


_= - — TI — — - — — = 
s 3 - — > — 2 — — — 
— — — — — — — — — 2 — — — - — - — — 
I; * 5 = A” -< = — —_ _ = — wat) = 7 - = 2 * = 
<4 —— — * — * r —̃ SPITE EY ld > 3 2 — F 
Py het bane io any : —— my "n _ =o doug — < * — — 
6 N » 8 2 — 27 . : — - iy $a 2 
- . +3 : - - — f — CER 2 — £ l — — — 5 — 
* - ——_— 5 2. 2 * 2 . S + ho Co - i r — 
— 2 > : - : 2 >” —_—— —— — S r 
F- 9 —_ PLE * 3 7 3 - 
ry . » — 5 * 2 — 4 : . Tx <7 p_—_ 2 
2 — 222 . — — — * 
\ = 8 — DT err p q * — 


* 


> 
2 Gn Wh. 
—_ & Ch OC *4 
2. 4. — 
* — 
1 * ug - 7 > 


© > * 
* * had — 
* N o : — 
5 8 1 e 7 * 
< 4 r FAS «> > > ” 
TEE Ce oy o——__—_—_—____ —_ - 
* 2 7 » 2 2 5 — 3 
— N 4 


bd . = — we * * 
—— — 
S 


— 
2 
. 
— 


1 5 


* 1 F 
/ * e by 2 2 
# no 1 7 ; , 
1 . 8 FL” 1 
2 x e to bf vo no er IH ore IA be Bet oi 
WG ev 4 _ 
3M F £3. "7 1 
| Bhs. * + why 7 „ % 
or "+ 3 37 _ 4 
, 7 4 4 
— * ” ” 5 
Jeb : "KY 5 * 
r LORE | 
4 by A. ; k £7 7 g 
5 R i 
wr * ” 
. o + FS 7 
A S 5 <K 
o 4 * 
Th. * 
93 
W 
2 k * - or ONS Irs 2 3 NS 3 
1 
* % 55 1 — 
— 34 = 
'  "V-38F 1 q . 
bY : I 
1 | {© 5 "va 4 
a; - 
1 : : 
* + 
$ 
, "_ i WD + . 
» * 


mM Det 
Wikernts 
wibur 
dra rt 
Cod K 
„ ef 
K and 
' or of 


5 f 1 thing „„ A Y EK F S, 1 or ber. 8 
I 1 2 d. quaſi Heat! ns "| 4 von f „ 
1 it he ſhould ſay 4 1 Servt. dene 
. 215 guantum libet, as mY Sir | 
5 e tin pleaſe | 1 . Sen br, H 
EO eee 5 „ 
2. Re King , ö 8. T. or g 8. 1. 
* | A il - dacro- ſanctæ 'Th 
"Reg. Prof. Begins Pegs | n Oc 
For, Kingſs Pro- | 


* Vide, See. 5 Ve 
| Reg Regiment 158 34 : 


ailrani, a Far- * | accondingeo 


F 7 
oY 


- 


Viz. Vene that 
Wp. Worth: 
Xn. ena. 


& D, M. Verbi Dir i 
V X . F. Regie Soci⸗ 
* ltcjatit Sacius, Fellow | At. 
15 of the Royal Society Nia Chriſtmas. 
wt. Hon, Right Ho- J. len 
. 72 A 151 7 amktenbie. BS ;- 4 32 . 
eee 4 * egen, and del 
"2. or St. Saint . . 


Wy Selidus a Shilling 


Anyſingle Conti} Abba cog 
in ſome Abbreviations upon Coin 
ane and Roman Inſcriptions: Example 
Four oben 1 K. GEORCGIUs I DEL 
CATS, KATE ue Fi 1 0 


Ka 


. * * * 
U 


. 


1 J. A. 1. Er E. 1 1 
us Dei Gratia, Magna Britannia 5 1 
mie Rex, Hillei Defenfr ; Brun ws . 
bur ot Dux, Sacri Remant- Im "6g 8 
worn, ele, George dy the Graco = Hl 
hos King of Great Britain. France, and Lw& 
- Defender of the Faith, Duke of BrunG _ 
1 Lunanburg];,. Arch: Treaſurer, and - = 

ſtor of the Holy Roman Empire. . 4 


NUMBERS and FIGURES. 


MBERS are expreſſed N. ee _ 1 
Koman Capital Letters, I. XI. C. N. 1 
which are called Numerals. 2A 1 
Nuwhb-rs are lik ewiſe expreſſed by theſe alin Wh. 
hraft-rs, 1, 2, 3, 45 5» 6. 7, 8, yy which e 
| 6 Figures, and o, which is called A 

4 


Their Sign ration 4 „ 


Lobe, V. Five, X Ten, L. Fifey, — 
a, D. Five Hundred. M. 2 Fhavuſand.. DD. — 0 1 


J. One, 2. Tn, Thera. 24 Four, 5. Five, 
A os Seven, 8 icht, 9 Nine, . 2 1 4 it ont 

Numeral placed before a greater takes = Wa 
% from the greater as many as the leſs: ſtands wo 7 by 1 
* as, I. One the leſs Number placed before Fr. Y | 
* greater, takes Wu a, Ang _ Eg 
"SMT. i: | 
- leſs Numeral placed after ore 


4 1 
4 WE 
N 1 
n 
j NH 
4 n * 4 
* LA 
4 4 p 175 
Den; 
N Is it « 8d 
7 1 my 
11 4 
1 4 [1 " 
£71 0, 2 
5 1 id 
! 8 #5 * 6670 
rea 4 F di, 0.14 F\ 
<a LI Ht Wo 
9 a At | 
: : f E 1 
8 * 7 ' ! Wh 41,0 
7 4 . 5 , F. FW; ö 
* — 
; : ny 14/9895 
. 2 no? i j ö 
3 F 4 
1 
2 ＋ y * * 
2 11 if 
* py 
. 
* 


ed eee 


* 


9 
ww 
EO 
2 


De ben l 

ing 88, 1 10, Teng + 
22 al, One 007. bez 0003. Th 
Ry Figure: at every Remove: from the: 
- the Right, Aimee Lo 1 ben und 
ST. &, 099» N 

and Niniety- nine. e 


the 8 
adeſt 8 
In gland 
ible. 


e JOU! 
"ns, he 
Ryo, 
che [ 


fs . To the Fees AY 
0 7 King: or, To the 
King's - moſt Excellent 


aje ty. | + % 
Prine 


* | 2 the ſame Banne * 2 reſt of the Ri | . 

e varying the Sub/cription and Addrif 

dor en r Title and 3 2 5 n u 7. 
Ko | ln, 


7 Te .the Nobili 


* * 

Wa 2 
# «x 4. 
N 


OO 
#42 


RS” 


Ky, 
* 


e u. How: A: 1 ; Lord B. . 


3 
wy 


WELLS 

b Ladies are.; addrefſed — be * 
of their Huſbands. 1 1 
Ihe Sons of Dukes and Marqui a 

{deft Sons of Earls have, by the Courtely  - 5 
| beund, the File of Lord and Right we, LS 
ounger Sons of Earle, Viſcounts, and 5 2 
* the Title of Honourable, and are ? 


wy fo, Fee” 1 ** 4 ; 5 . 


ill the Daughters of Dukes, Ma rauilths; 1 
bare Ladies; and all the Davghter of Viſ- 
ats and Barons are Honourable. | e Hg 


* 


LJ N 
1 I i 
$2 = 


= 5 


* 


. 
l 


FS OX - 8 7 * a - 2 *. * 9 * 
vs te ee 


N 
r 


mo 
47 


N AS, 


- 
* 


253 / 
F 15 


Inte Rt. Hon. Earl B. 
Joche Rt. Hon. Lord C. 
At. Hon. Lady G. 
ſe Hon. A. B. Kad | | 
lhe Hon. F. S. 1 dan „ 
I Privy Counſellors, the Lord Mayors 'E 
n, fork, and Dublin, and the Lord Provoſt 
kr þ have the Title! of Nr. H. 25 
ons bearing ihe King's Com 
1 agel l nam, of the 
$ or any of the Royal Family on the ir 
Witary Liſt is tiled ien, N MY ky ” bc . 


Sz 


. — 


1 
* 


„ . is ane Rt Hot. 
5 e ae ese 
N Ws : 8 


170 CITE 


N = 
” 0 _— 3 5 * 


by 
4 > 
Ont : 43, p ; 0 
x * * * : pA. Ki ; ts þ 
b : & 


| uy Lond, Your ix 
| nh Kors, out Low 


Tc an Rev Doctor 

TE, Mr Dean: 
- Mx Atchdeacon, le 

E 2 1 


Pro” 2 WS i we i? +» ps 


; wa 45 I 


TRE OED 


fers of | _ 
1 leg either according - 10 cheir 
ring. to their Office. 

-ommiſſioners of th 


According to 


24438 A » oy 


_ he Re Hon, . the Lofds 
5 Seen ner. of the Ta- 
. Trade and Flagtaticg 1 


ke Rt, He 
0 the 16 


ul Ce 
Colon 
wdreſfer 
J. Infe 
heforc 


dauert. they are <0 ollextivel FN "4./">, th 
fable," and addrefſed Stirs, Your Ponbups ] 
ide Army, Noblemen. are, filed, accordit 
Fs Hank of their Noire withuthfh 


of their Rank 1 ig the Army. 


legt, Hon. Earl B. Lieut. 
0 the 16 Regt... 


LL. Colonels are ſtiled Honourables, as the: 
Colonel 4. B. But they are moſt 1 
wdreſſed by thei ir Nanſes oglxz 7 5 
„ Inferior Officers Have N e 
ore their Names; as, OI At 


Þ Lieut. E. F. Enſign C. H. 


3 Pleriipditiicia ic TY 
be Celodies, and Lords 5 
e n tle of E xcellency. 8 


+ priyy Counſellors, 5 RE 
Fangyrables, $55: 4 957 l 106 7 1555 785 
"Yom "if. 8 Ard Chapeeler 

the Rt. Hom, Sir C. D Lord Chih; Jud 
be Hon. E. F. Eſq; Lord Chief Bard 
lie Hon. E. H. Eg; ang f the Juſtices 


atlemen of inferio r Rank in the LE 
bel Kd accorgin donde Ofice- But 


Yr 5 my — 
1 K " 7 8 ” ; 
2 4 + l L544 11 
.4- = FEE 
” p 1 ade 
3 Ok 4 : 
1 b , BA 7 
** 1 ” 4 
or 2 4g * 
2 22 4 =, 1 5 
2 VS .. 
. * 4 "> 
f x : 
; a 
I * 
* 


ar 
11 . 
1 
4 
* f 
* 
N 
Ie 
1% 
ee 
1434 
ane 
19%) 
17 
11 
i 
110 
38. 1 
$7 


— —.— 
2 IF : — 4 = * 


———— 


——— 


1212 
corder of 


Governors of college 
agiſtrates in their 


ipful, or Worſhigful.”' 


1 Bodies I ey 


0 "the Hon: Court of Directors 


hon the 8 . 
Directors 


d. 


Mp Worchipful; as, IP Gent! ni 
rand Wardens of the Wor- Vour A. N 
3 of Mercers, &c. gs 


to call a Baronet and a 

nburable, and their Wives Ladies.” 3 

very Gentleman of an iadepenilent Fi 

commonly the Title of E/qz "And the 

# ſupexicriptive. 'Addreſs. to all Tradeimen 
nicks is, To Mr. 4 2. Sir. 


** ow 's LA. * 
8 R - » 2 
* 4 5 TY F x ix * — 


> £ — ST; 1 7 1 
2 1 11 "x #4: ., 
4 


— . = — —— — — — — 
” = = a — — — * 

—— — b — — — — ——— — . 0 en . — 

S —— — 


o 


SE 
ra 


R 


o 


'RUDIM 


N 


* 


CTION of 


pted to 


* 


OLLE. 


Ada 


; 
N 


LIS H 


[uns t. 
au, 
ments. 


\ 


» 2» 
4 x 
Ws 7 — 
N 
5 I N 76 


* 
w . . 
x 


e 7 III rs 
n N 
K 


4 — 
E 


3 
— 
2 
— — 
> i 
3 o 
— my 
— 
— 
* — 


A 


—— ũ— 


— — 


= 


E 
* 


2 
— 


ren — 
8 


— 
er 
2 


$ s 
. 
: . Cty P 
7 TY; Pa > 
2 a * 2 2 
ee der re Lee ee IS 
. — — 


20 at, * 
in to be 8 wich r Ace a 5 4 Ul 
After Example a 3 ETY 
= Page 1 ; ' ">, 
Boy, A Gun. 4 Poet. | A Sasse, A . 
An Egg. A Horſe. A A Queen. * A 
N Waſp. A Fig. An 8 A cas Be 5 1 f 
he, A Tout hh i 3 
vith the Article the alter E EXAmplic dle 
Prince. Page 15. al 8 - 
r Ant The Dog. The Hare: The Mole. . 
dag. The — A Eel. he Kite. 5 5 . £4 
lanb, i he. Quail. The Wolf. „ 
v vithout an Article after 8 am . 
Page 15. 
wel doe Bunge. Hindle:: 3 =, ml 
ip Lech Day. Grove. Heife ©. nl 
n. Whale. Buck. Duck. Hen: Lion. 
Whelp 5 MORE: 2 N . W's 
be whicks form the plural 2 ding et 0% N 
ch & eh im the Sin 1 ee . . 
he above Examples. hy ©, OS. 0 
wa A Box... ops "gy © With 8 *. 
. 4 Fox. The Crutch. ih. i 8 
ks which foem- the Plural a8 
f, into ves. Ses Page 10. 
* falke "Wl e. 4 


7 Koi 2 | I 


2 


— — 
a4 K 


Xl 1 
— — — — — 
— — — — — — — 
< 2 — 
3 — 2 — 559 
_ * L 
* node 
& 


* 2 
— = — . — Ws — —— 
—— — * 4 — — 
et = q "= wa 1 * 2 © 5 
2 E - -— x * _ l 
— n 0 2 - == — . 2 7 ; 
* CAE, LOTS f e SIE > — — — 1 — * — — = — 
8 — F : e 22 S = "za 

— 3 — 7 2 oF . ; —— WT yr I. 2 — — 5 
— r my : þ * FS. - 72 — q 6 CASE 2 . n 2 8 SE - I nol AE, 


ISS — 


2 Lee 
R ln 
2 
9 
2 


* . d 


2 Ts 


5; = 


oF Ser : & 

2 r ty * 2 2 i= * . En: — 
— — — —_— ans th 
VISITED — — 
ys os —_— | < L 


* 8 * e — 1 , þ a a 
F 1 % A Y a 9 rie p r ö * l 
d N 1 14 2 3 r Y 
* 2 2 , F . ö : 
. F Ke 1 5 . 
; s ; f 6 5 
4 3 1 
: * 4 - 4 85 * P 
. ; 4 # ” 5 4 * * BS 2 
— 4 . 7 7 
. 


| Nouns which Herd? thete Pikra ending 
Page 11. A Child. A Brother, An O 
Nouns which form their Plural by cha 
, into fee, Ni. 
An Army. A Fly. A 6 ACr 


( tk ko | 


II 


| Nouns which form their Plural by cha 
| both the Vowels and Conſonants of the 
lar. TX. 
3 A Gooſe. ae A Mouſe. A Foc 
| Penny: A Tooth. 
el = P RON ou oo 


Pironoumt to be declined after the Examy 
4 5 the Engliſh Rudiments. P. 1x 

. iſt Perſon, J. 2d Perſon Thu. 56 P 
: Maſculine, He. 3d. Na Femjnior 85 
: 2 Neuter, It. 


. ADJECTIVE | 
| Adjeftives to be compared by adding « 
the comparative & off for. the Superiative- 

23. Long. Short. Talk. Great. Rich. 
Lean. Mean. Adjectives ta he compare 
5 2 A SEN 
' Þ for the Superlative. P. 23. 
Common. Uncanimon.. Learned. 
37 75 Peeviſh. Plentiful. Prudent, — 21 
| ee to be compared Which age. Irregu 
th Compariſons. P. 24. | 
Good. Bad. Much. Lale. 71 x 


"2 


{ - 


Ex GLISH Ex at I * 
N E R B. 
\ 


ns to be conjugated The Helping Verb 5. 
Page „ 
INDICATIVE MOO D. 
+. 
Preſent imperfe&t Tenſe. 
king. „ Plur. 
[does, I.. We doethy 
toſe do, 2. Ye does, 
le do, Nh : They doſt. 
Paſt imperfect Tai.” 
„ 3 Plur.. 
didſt, | 6 1. We do, 
mou did, | 0 Ye does, 
te vidhhe-  * # F They aa, 


" Have. Page 32. = IN 


* _ — = —— — — —— — h — — - — N « . — — — 8 — 
2 * 4 — —— - — — — — — — — 
od SOS — Fe M 1 8 A A 8 53 — — — — 2 r 9 
22 2 2 — ——_— — 7 — 2 , : 2 
a S 1 83 Spring = . ener nts — 
= — 4 k 5 - 8 " ko 4 "Is - —_ ; = Ap 
r 1 . r —_— — — — — 3 
4 » 1 — — — — , 2 vey — — — — a. - = \ * . 
27 ®- y = \ — I - 22 8 6 — 2 2 4 — - a> WY 5 
k [ - 2 = 2 D 2 _ XL - D - __ q - Frame b E 
: Bos nd ? We x5 a — * — wo a - oats Coe per — — — — — 
2 K 00 27 + Aa Conde x” _ WY RR ond. I ne OT 
3 I q - Fa Co. AER — —— 2 a N * — 


— 
222222 
8 — 
1 2 


Preſent perfect Tenſe, 


1. 10 his, 
27 Thov haſt, 
3. Them hath, - 


— 


— 
— 
5 


b 
5 
) 
"+, 
355 tb 
4 
tin 
. : 
* 
9 n 
A 0 
E.. 
" 
M4 o A 
51090 
Ei 
. 
© 1471 
rel. 
„ = 4 
4 
111 „ 
7. k 
. 
34 8) 
4 1 
[4 J 
i s fi 
+4 * 
8 
189 
1 * 
14 1 
* 
E 
7 5 
4 T4 
777 
gf x 
& 
TY * 
» 
1 t. 
* T6: 
22 27 
1 « 
1 ot 
$4: 2 
$4.14 1 4 
4 
4 
1 
; 
Ti 
161 
"Ft J 
4 *** 
18 
7 
1 
+l 
i 4 
14 
33 
9 n 
i 
4 
1 
4 
: 5 
4 


Im 
* 
— 


— 


EE: EE 

at ZE al — 

5 rere 
NE SOD 
— = 


81 " En „ „ 0 N * 
£ 1 te n 2 A * 

OD 7 3 3 &; + 4 4 

- * * . 

4 


Enctim « Exneres. a * 


1 4 
3] 


tes. > Fler 

I. Me hadſt, WT Them hadth, 
2. Thee had, „ haded, 
3. Him hadſt; 26 | 3: Ye dove. 


Shall or wil P. 33. 


Sir 
& mays 
Ne may 
WU ma) 


Future inperf Tenſe, 


. Sing. 5 1 1 Plur. 
1. Tan or will, i. Us ſhall 
f. Thou Mall, or will, 2. Ye ſhalt Cor; 

. Gy 12 0 or vilt, 3. Them ſhalt - 


= | Future perfect Tenſe.” 


* To y g. | | | "BY 
„Me ſhalt, or wilt has, | 1. I ſhall, or wilt ha 
4, Thee ſhall, or will 2. Thou that, or 
I p 1 im n ſhalt,” or wilt 3. Them ſhall, or 
* ik. „ , 


Sir 
douldſt, 
lee {| 
rould, 
lar ho 
woulde 


, : 


Muciy 
d witl 


ths abe 


Exer un Erinchss. 
May, or Can. P. 34. 
Potential Mood. : 
Preſent imperfect T oY 


5 — — 


——ñ K —— — 
— — 2 
cms Dan's OOO CEE SY and. ICICI OI 
A my 5 val xs — nj 4. — w_—_ „ 2 * 9 
> 2 — — p > oy — 2 I * _—_— — 
2 — . —— 2 — 2 * 
l NS * 
- = - 5 "1-5 — 
— oO —— 
es — — — Fay 


_ 
— — = 
i 3 = 
- 2 I AIST 
— 


Z nn - 
＋ 


Sing. 1 „ 
& mays, or cans, | 1: Us mayth, or canth, _ 
Ne may, or can, 2, Thee may, or can, 
ou mayſt, or canſt; 3. Them mayſt, or 


canſt. 


WE 4 
* 


Puaſt imperfect Tenſe. 

Sing. 8 
nid r wouldit, . Us ſhouldft, or 
ee ſhould, or wouldit, 


ports 2. You mould, or =, 
n ſhouldeth, or | 3. Them ſhouldit,. or 
woulderh ; E wouldſt. ; 


Fincipal helping Verb have to ks con oj, Fl 
d with the Aſſiſtance of the other kely 4 i 
ds above mentioned. P. Mx „ REN 


Indicative M ood. 


Preſent import. 
lofi. | Plus. 
; | 10 1 . have, | 
| te hath, . i. Tm Has 
* bay, 3- Them had. 


— 


6 » 
4 , — 22 
Wl, 3 a 1 > - EIS — : > 
* 3. is "a b 1 Vs * . 4 9 8 0 
bo, wa ad * oy — * * 3» 1 1 - A "4 1 * 3 
* —_ - . of * * 1 G PI p- F p , 3 £ 1 5 4 Þ 
0 n 8 2K, a a '/ wa a - IS, ' , ; eg ; . : „ +4 1 
1 — . 8 ” WR I EDS * ; 4 a RAD 8 þ g * $ . * . A 4 . 3" 5 X 1. 
ts ; l * wy op = A f c 1 4 1 5 2 $ _— — +. - = . 5 
« Q 4 4 K 3 - . — 3 . 2 12 4 Sf... N 3 — \- 2 ...» * 1 
— - _ w * * S 1 # a." + > A * ar «$4 RIAL dex th IT . A + #| * * cd * Ys 
3 — — NN. — nA = » <-> — — — — — 8 8 OR" 5 - * 8 * 1 q EV) 2 1 
r ⁰—A . ⅛˙⅛9i . 70...˙1tßÜxm 7 — — —— — 2 — — o —— fl be - — aye — = _ — —_— k - n — q 
. 22 2 3 4 > 4 — - — — Sy >. — MU x $4. - — — — » — = * * 2 — — — —.—— — — — . — — — — —— — 
ers — 3 EAT os AT — at digs ID 8 — — l LS — 3 +7 s Pa 8 a d r — — IanS 6 2 . — — — — — — — 
2 DO — -_ — 8 — 2 - TIED ED OE IIIOOITES Ir - Wes yn —— Sw . 
_ 1 " — 2 — — a A . — 2 0 b = 2 4 5 2 * 3 Das IO — 8 bo > 2 
La. = F2=< 2 - ** . £7 IIS 0 1 5 - p * - - 
— — — — . 4 K — . = fa r : 
7 — 22 — — — — 
So * 
1 # 7 4 


| ck un Exencrons. 


Ti, Pieſent perfets. 
„ Sg. , A 1 es 
T. Me haſt hads, ' 1. Us haves had, ou f 
2. Thee hadſt bath, * 2. Te hads have, ſhall 
3. Him has hady ” 3. Them haved bi In be 
: al 


Va imperſe. 


Q. Thee kad, 
| * Him n hadch; 


Si 
, tI h: 
8 Os laſt the 
Sing. bo Plur. t he! 
1. Thee hadſt had, r. Us had hath, 
2. Me have have, 2. We hadeſt hate 
3: Him had Rath; ; Is Them have bac 
ae bs 1 Mur. mayſt | 
N. Ke ſhalt had, . Us 3 have, ee me 
2. Thee ſhall have, | 2. Them will . Wim ma 
3. * > 13: . wilt þa bh 


. 


Faun perfect. 
hou ſhalt or wil had have, 

ſhall or will have had, 

Win have ſhall had; 8 

Plur. 

f hall or wilt have had, 


key ſhall or will had have, 
Ie had have ſhall or will. 


Imperative Mood. 


| Phur, | 
1. Let we have, 
2. Have thou, 


Sing · 
tI have, 5 
laſt thou, 1 

t he have; | 


Preſent imperfect Tenſe, 
| Sing. | Sh 
Imayſt or canſt haſt, FA 8 
lee may or can have, 1 
n or canſt had „„ 
Piu 5; | 


may or can have; „ 
on mayſt or ent ber. SHES 
cn may or could kgs. | „ 


— 


— 


> 
— * TED — — — —— Oy as 1 . — 5 
— * — mp _— — r * wat — 2 : rn — 3 2 
* — 1 We. = - — 2 — — 2 — — — — — by — — Addr a — — _ 1 =. 
8 rede . = r yn — 5 eb 4 8 <— ©: - 1 
N 7 * , p T * 2 1 2 * ** 


r N n 
93 3 


. 8 1 


xc ISH Exyxci vs. 


OO _ 


1. 1 mayſt have n 
2. Thou may haſt had, 


37 Him may hath haves 
Plur. 1 
1. We mayſt had have, 
2. Thou may haſt had, 
3- Them may have had. 


Paſi imperfect Tenſe. | 


Sing. WP Eg: 
*. Þ mightſt, couldſt, &c. has, - 
2. Thee might, could, &c. have, 
> Him may, can, Kc. have; 
1 
. Us might or ſhouldſt had, 
2. Le may or could have, 
3- Them might or ſhould had. I 


Paſt perfect. 


Sing. 
5 Me might, couldft had, | 
2. Thee might have couldſt had, 
5 He have could might have; 
: OR 
I, v may, could, haſt, 1 
2; Te. might, could. have had, 
2. They , can had have, 


* 


* 
$ - 
r 


kuerun Erancnz 0 
Future perf. 


Sing. 

3, I ſhalt have had, 

2. Thee ſhall had haſt, 

3. Him ſhalt have hadſt * 
Plur. 

1. Us ſhall have had; 

2. Thou ſhalt haſt had, | 

Y Them thall have had:. 


Subj unctive Mood. 


P reſins imperfec̃t Tenſe. 


Sing. i 
ne hath, If us hath, 
Fthee haſt. ye have, ; 
im haves; Ilf them ha 


Paſt imperfe&t Tenſe, 


ging. P lur. f 
me michtſt have, | 1. If us mightſt bal; | 
thee might haſt, | 2. If thou might have,, 
him might bad; 13. e e Lo 


\ I * : 
4 ; 4 *; — * /k 1 V bs. 
- | 4 1 a 5 8 a v2 ; 4 
p . 7 y - . 4 e 
F - f, 2 os : * * * 
9 4s p " . - * I ” 
A * 1 - * Sy. 1 
bk \ N * x k 5 i » 8 
4 * 4 ” ? ” by * 3 
4 % . A . . ” * 6 V + . . p i 
8 oy Po * — 2 Wenn ; 1 7 - © 7 6 La, IS 2 
1 ; f , , : 3 
Wt: wg 8 K r i 1 " * ” " : 2 1 5 TIO. * q 4 
— rt” * " L . — or 1 1 3 2 
, rb a 4s > — f * — — — - . — 4 * _ > 
— — N - * — — —— — — — — — = — — 4 — 
. 2 N * - — a—————_ - — — 
8 4 - g — 4 
8 - . T - — 1 hy 
—— 4 7 — — > — = — > — 4 — 8 0638 = 1 a * y 
” i» 6 , we — <S = —— 2 «> - = 4 . 
. = — 9 th > iz 2 . CES * P = e's Jo. 1 - * > e IE — th - oro "Ex of 2 F . = 
_ — 2: E 1 — — ot r ME Ne 2 rag * > 892 — r 2 rr 2 IA . : X 
— py — > a by Sr Ee — 1 7 — * 2 — A 2 — 8 4 : g I TIE SS 5 of. * . 2 — 9 22 . . 1 1 yk; 
\ - > rm op 4 - bn - jo” — 4 = ” bo 1%; — : —_ - bo == 2 1 84 - oo . : = 
— . 8 — $a: wg = 7 a N * e 4 — _ RW AXEL ETD 4 2 L * : — a. oo” - 
- I a S 2 4 A _ 10 wrong * — ihe C — * Wh FH XY 
* FEST 5 J a 1 4 * LT, — 
p : WW... 7 7 
8 


& — . 2 
— —— ———— — ou hr 


: 1 N 4 P 
& " 4 
4 : - < 
A * # CY PR 
$7 6 3 oo SING VELO et. TO OED Toney oo oo4 OSS . "= 
4 , 
- — a X - — —— ew — —— 
— — — — -- — aww bs _ 
b 2 — - 2 3 x l 
* 1 


1 Fact Exnnercas, 
 SubjunQive Mood. 
= -.. | Sing. = 5 
| 1. If me bath _ 4 1. I us have had 


2. If thee haſt had 2. If thou hath | 
3. If him 8 8 . 1 3. If chem hath | 


* 5 Paſt perfet 
E: - | Sing, 1 
1. If he might hach FL 


2. If I might bave had, 

. l thou might have had; 
Flur. 

1. If us mi; ght have had, 

2. If thou — have had. 

3- If them might have bad: | 


Future rsa 


Ever Exmretons. 


Tufinitive Mods? 
Preſent: ig 


Paſt perfect. e 
To had have. 


W imperfecx. Py 
About to had. „ 


„ 
About to had have 


Participle. * :. 15 


* 
F 0 F FT. — 'S. 7 > 
S . SS —— 


je 3 
- 
n 
. 
12 
— * 
* 
- 
— 
: 3 5 
- * 
q 


Helping Verd Be. b. 


o 


Indic, Mood. OY od 


— — 
2 


— TT Tz 


5 W. 1 4 UP . 
1 L 6 : 8 9 88 . 
2 5, p 1 * oy Lay R 
3 " 
, hes ED ? | , ? 


2s. en Exancure. 


Preſent perfect. 
| ET F . 
1. Me hath . PE Us hath. been, Sir 
2. Thou have be, 755 Te have be, let I b 
3 Him de hath; 3- Them i is 282 Am th 
| | . let he 
Faſt — 
Sing. Plur. 
2. Tut, <2 1. We vas, 
2. Thee was, EE Ye waſt, = 
z "4 He were; 3 Them were. din 
[mays 
Paſt perfedt. how me 
Sing 1 1  Phir. lim m 
. Me had be, ge 1 J'64 Us have he, be; 
2. Thee have been, #2. Thou haſt been 
3. i ee | 23. He have been, 
Future imperfect. gu 
Sing. | Plur. | may, « 
© 5 1 ſhake os wilt been; 1. Us ſhall or wi he 
2. Thee ſhallor will be, C 2. Te ſhaltorvillt Thee m 
3. ale malt have been; 3. Them walt hae ba be, 
. tle may, 
op 55 | Fyture perfed.. z 
Sing. | VV 


* Thou ſhalt had been, ) 1. Us ſhall bavel 
2. He ſhalt hadſt been, C 2. Thou ſhalt has" 
S Them ſhallbarr! 


FE ” WE Imper; 
C - * 
* N 5 3 f BY 
; £ 0 . 
. : Fd 


— 


K 
7 
. { 
£9.70 P 
! 


| 8 e e 1 94 
 *'Excr1sm EXERCISES. 


Imperative: Mood. 
t Sing. P | - Plur. 8 
ell a Let we be, 


in thou, z, Are ye, 
let he be; ä 23. Let ey. be. 


| Potential Mood. $7 
Preſent imperfect · 


fag Pur. 
[mays or cans be, 22 We might or can be, 
Nou may or can am, & 2. Thou may or could 
lim mayſt or can been, 
be; „„ Þ a. ny or can. 
£43 — EE 


| Preſent perf. 
Sing : e 8 6455. 
may or canſt have | 1, We mayſt, or can 
1 de, 
Thee mayſt, or can 2. Ye. may, or canſt 
* 5 * 1 \ kites be, f © 
may, or can had | 3: Them may, or can 
ken; 7 mn d e r 


- # j 
o . 0 4 . 


* 7 
6 6 1 F 
3 c 
a P 


Plur. 


Sing 
1. We might, could x 1 might, c 
be, ini been, 8i 
2. Thou might, would 2. Thee mightſi, co bee 
be, be, F thee 
3. He road mond * Them might, c be a: 
82 i ſhould been. 
Paſt e gi 
. l. Me mey, can, would | Fo. Us —— um; 
hach be. [ -would have be, 
2. Thou may, can, 2: Le might, c 
* mould have been, would has been 
3. Him might, could, | 3. They might, ce 
fe have be; | 0 vould have bee 
1. T malt hath dds, 1. We ſhalt hab 
r 2. Te ſhall bath 
.* 5 been; | 3; Them ſhall ha 


pajs 


c 


ExcLiott : Exe þ7torp, 


* 


| SubjunQive Mood. 
Preſent imperfea. 


f 
- 


Sing. N | Plus, 
beet, 1. If us be, 


e aW, | 2. If ye Was, 


3. If chem been: 


he art; 
Paſt imperfect. 


Sing. Plur. 
Ine was, 8 If us wert, 
| thee waſt, ' | 24 If ye were, 


I him werez | | 3. If they Was. 


Infinitive Mood. 
1 Presets Tenſe. | 
To: been 


Paſt. kde: 
"Ti bud ove: 


| FOI 6p | 
To be about wi been 


13 E Tutu 
70 be about to bath been 


*. * 1 4 
— — 0 > x a N 
— — _—_———— - . by —— Tt b—__ — — 
8 n - a * * ” . 4 « 22 2 
— — x , 64 2 2 ” 4 2. * 8 ä 
pf 7 — — wa — 5 = CL IG Boa = - : . 2 
- r—_ J 2 — — — . —— 
4 e 2 5 4 _- * — 
* 2 , . þ I 
* — A = 7 Va a» $ p 1 = = * 
2 TAS T by the 122 _ 8 * 
1 ' ” 0 


_ —ä— . 
5 — 


1 % „ Ne ef 25 : e 
. 8 * « 
- % - 
. * . * 

: - - : # 

þ # * F - 
1 x 1 45 1 
we 5 : 4 . EA ö 


Pp A R 110 1 PLE 
Preſent. 


s 1 8 U 
4 * 
79 ' Be. 


ths 9 — 4 r 8 * COR RG me 1 Nr. * * * * Max ict Wn Ade 
— n * FN * A 
* * 4 : 
” > 4 * 
3 1 9 7 1 5 ws © - #7 , 
4; * 4 * 2 U © - 1 * * 
* * 5 5 . 
A n * p . , 
” . 
- SIS 1 oe * 2 
y 5 . 
— * £ * 
" - » - * 
F : : 1 
4 1 c 1 8 44 5 
* 5 8 - 
. . bw ” » — ; : p 
r 4 » * 9 
* U - J : 
* 1 
* 


nude 
ndite, 
nquire 
in. 
judge. 
juxple 
kick. 
kneel. 
knock, 
ment 
lngh, 
learn, 
vel. 
mnag 


"Paſt pe fea. 
Being, 


3 


| VER BS to: be conjugated 3 a 
Moods _ Tenſes afrer the IR] 


ES Ide abo 


be Mo 
aſſive 
regula 
uw an 
8. to b 
8. 1 


Þ., 49. | 
To accept, T6 nnkgs o um 


To admit. To charm. To govern. 
To admoniſh. To dandle: To gainſay. 
To alter. To deceive. To garniſh. 
I To alk. To declare. To gather. 
= i To anſwer. To effect. | To handle. 
JI o banter. To elect. To harbour 
Jo blame. To erect. 7; To heal. 
To blaſt. Toe extol. + | To hearken 
LF blend. To exchange. To hinder. 
Io call. To exclaim. To impror 
2 — To favour. 58 J To implore. 
Jo challenge To frame. oo incline 


8 549 8 


ee "IF 
as 
* — " © 
. 
4 * * N , 
5 B&D. : ; 
2 N i, #44 
% Be oo L A 
ade 4 a $0 « 
% 
4 
8 
: : _ 
Y * 
* 4 


| Exxzeisks. 2 


mlude, To meaſure. - To: quarrel. ' 8 * 


ndite, To mend. To quench. % 5 
nquire, To moiſten. To quiet. a 


In. To name. To que, 
fudge, ' To note. To rack. 

juggle, To nurſe. To — * 

tick. Io obſerve. To reſign: 

kneel. To vbtain. To ſave. 

knock. To offer. To ſecure. 
ment, To oppoſe. To ſlander. 
lingh, To pint. . To ſmooth. 

karn. To prove. To n 
keel. To plant. Io tempt. f 
mnage. To r Ws unite, 5 


Ihe above Vacks may be conjugated Fra 
be Moods and Tenſes after the enten of 
live Verb to be loved. p. 59. 
negular Verbs to be formed through all the © 
4 and Tenſes after the Example #0 give, . 
|. to be found in the Rudiments from p. 7%, 
. incluſive. 6 5K 4 & 29>. 
SYNTAX . 
92 Concord. „ 1 


The verb agrees, Sc. p: 118. i OW. | 
Rule 1. Examples. 8 
dle, but chou de play. The Lamb blem 

1 Lions didſt roars. The Boys dances _ ; 


C2 8 


* 


* 
4 * 
% * 
7 # * / 
* * I % 
* Is * 5 
bg — * 
*A f ; 
* ds 
* 


Ave Horſes hack ei 1 The Maſter a 
commandetrh, but the Boys wilt nor ob Act 
The Letters was ſent, and his Coat were orn, 
A good boys learn his Leſſon. Bad Boy tri e Mc 
and wilt not learn. A ſtrong Horſes didſti ing 
ry heavy Loads, but idle Aſſes art beaten, C 
Men haſt at juſtly; but a bad Men wilt 
fears God: | Tb read many good and 1 
Books eopduce to improve the Mind. To 
our Enemies are the Duty of a Chriſtian. 
bleſs thoſe Men who curſe us; am alſo 30 
tian 9 Ts nente Zen- Men wile hue 


chem. 


„ 


nur 20. Two or-more Nowinnuve Caſe, 
„ P. 4% Examples. 


I 3 | "The Wolf and the Yominel hate by the 8 


berd. The Horſe and the Mare was both |: 
= . Hh Pep and the Ink horn art loſt. The Ni 
dei and Blackbird digt ang fweedy.. | 

= 5 "Owl and Bat flies in the Night. Baaks add! 
ſeldom agretth n og idle Aſs 
569 N Mule wilt been beat.” A good He 


d Rider ca emed a long Je 
| ney. £ fall Oak, u ah, 2 and a 1 — Mo 
=_ tain * 2 lon Shadow, Merry W or 
; 3B} and ion Boys | + 50g. BY playeth: 
=  Ddircha Rod and the: A -rola hath c 

any Book wick müch Reading, 1 
Si Dilizence and; Re) wakes "ind 60 


ExG L48 4 Era worms. 


W a Scholar. To gud Fault with other 
0 lane ang not to endeavour to amend 
ere Vorn, argues very great Folly. To riſe early 
| the Morning. and to 'g6 to Bed early in the 
iat ng w/. conduceth, to the Health of the 


1 | | | \ 2 . = 
vlt 5 _ 
10 z If theſe Nominattve Caſes nguize, See 5 

Fo Txamples. 0 82 1 1. . 

N, - ; 7 1 . 740 . 


* my 11 read the ths Books, in 
ne they thalt become Scholar, You and your 
ther art idle, we never wilt be Scholar. Joh | 
brother, and I will play together, and they 8 
de merry. I, John and OP bd Wein 
lle Maſter will beat hem. +3 an. 8 

58 9 


le 4. A Noun of Mi ieee 0 Wd * 


The Parliament am or art 8kting- 'A Mul 
de in Error art not to be followed. The _ 
Mpany am or art leaving the Town. The Jury 

or art giviog their Verdi. The Mob v. 12262 


„d % vill be Tous. ad 1 
0 5 3 
0 104 * W 2 8 
v 5. The Nomiaative Cale 8. p. 120. Ta 
| Os OBOE: eee 


Cmquered Hannibal, Scipio the eld 8 mi- 
| ered Scipio Berk. en ene 
certlerb the Hen Ble . * 


* 
2 Br a „ | «+ „ * 8 "BE" 4 ” 2 
- me 3 a "Si n * 2 . 4 e ö ow” 
r . n ö Ro „ ; $ ; e  t RES = 
Tr ANI Ly 1p 4 e — : „ OIS F oy. "4 IR x 
a>, K - 83 8 * Fort D 7 py , N & , N 0 $2 : « 1 N 
8 * - W I - of * W * — 0 Ps ” 2 77 +4 . J © x. 7 v3 * K 7 2 
Be, 7 ; n 1 . 5 x nk. WE Se ns N 
N „ Hay: + © 2 1 G 3 1 L N 3 . 
1 * 2 > 7 * <a n % 1 
* ' A 


A l— aasee fp 


* hy 8 1 a hot kire. Shale fall p 
Alen, ſhall be exalted humble Han, 


Rule 6. If a Quekion be aſked, de. . 


53. was a 'Carthagenian? High 75 
will fall? I didfl go out? They does ſtay? 
art-not happy, who does their Duty? He ir 

* — 8 Fool who thinks not of to morrow? [1 
betimes and go to School? 12 Was not 2 g 
Hoy „ | K ATA _ 


Rule 7. The Nominitive Caſe i is ; alſo, Ge 
2 5 Examples. . 7 


wd Lor tend" d. Kt I hve: 
+ © read thy Leſſon. Thou be honoured; Him let 
5 — . Tou " your _ "_ 


| Rule 8. Tf the Verb bs: Neuter, 6 oe. 2 


TH. 5. Horſe runs ſwifely. The 22 walks flon 
= The Cock-crows early, and then the Dog bs 
I be Froft is cold. The Sun is hot. The Pes 
bf Na proudly. The Pye chatters loudly. 


c LE Rule 9. The Nominate Caſe is likewiſe, 6 | 
3 * | 1885 p · 121. Examples. 3 | 


5 r ſeldom ir. Frequently comes top 
1 1 n is it. At that Time! 


4 Bl 
2 ö 


10. 


(like 
[1 gres 


oye LISH: Bxancmnte 


ed a. great Dispute there. Came a «Perſon: o 
EE ; and ay came after them. 


; Sometime the Nominative Caſe, Ge. 
lilike bins 8 Aa hor.” 1 much blaik "bong 
greatly commend him. „„ 


- # +3 5 


- Second Concord, 
Subſtantive and Ade,” 
£11, The Adiective admitting oo Chan age, 


Ge. Examples. 


is Labour are Pleaſantz: Worldly Thing am = 
md fading. Trust Honour conſiſts in vir=" 
Alias. Evils Communication corrapts goode 
ner] A finalls, Mice delivered a greats Lion-:* 

lunnings Fox made the fil Wo; Crows beliery: 

% was beautiful a”. 2 ind had s 


4, oy rs OD RP * . ru ak , | 
; % 4 Sgt 8 4 
* * 1 8 1 — 1 


ae 5 The 8 Adjefives, G. 
9 9 Examples. e 7 


7 . That. Null. . 94e 

Fit Horſes of mihe can ironed aftes mn 
tha Herſes\of yours. That Geeſe v will 2 
ed, and this Fig, * * ä 


— 21 
i: 


: 10 Bass besen, Z 
"Roſe 13. Tech, n 5 25 ita, & 


Rach valiant SoldicesB 1 0 2 
run 3 2 Tyrants. 25 a Scourge; 


ener good Kings, 2 Bleflin gp.to. their 


dom. Either Books will :inſtruy the 
vill take Pains to read. 3 in of 
Name 

Rule 14: If ſorherhing, ieee, &c, Exam have 
Book 

He am a deſrour Man of. Learnin „ Sbeſ e dea 

a fond Human of Dreſs. The greedy Lim i . 
bis Prey, A covetous Man of Riches. A e, 


ru Mina for- what eingpt be had'are miſe 


nee We on more AdjeRive 
4 3 : TY 8 Nr Saibe 
1 „ aipeteet Fnmutuhler ee 
i. erb and pure Tui Mm, 5 

thde: * ee Sree e 00 
CY Mini El, ft 18 4 


edt 


dale 16. 11 the Adie dive emphatic, 0 
8 4k 77 33:65 Eu les. ie 
The, hg The eight Henry. 11. 
2 The © eres 


. [The e 27 ae 66. TY 


— 


be erat 51 8 

the Men Wh 
ſn often remove 55 no 2 
ame laſt wilt t been, 8 
[have is "ds. of by Ge, 9 min 1 


week wilt be amor, ug in 


* 
1 


1170 5 * 4 1 oral Fe 
bt 8 70 7 "Na 17 ; 2 e, Ir 


. The Restes who 5 tha 1 & 5 


1 
9 ; # a . ** "@ 4 Y v4 þ 1 > LS 5 2 
IF l 25 7 2 i no 5 r * . * ** 4 ws 2705 e "Rr. 


7 


| which art iale 18 0 be pd d 
vbon are diligent. wi Arb be de Ae 22 

id who purſue the Har 00 r- 
Y That Man Fon ag of Praiſe 3 5 

pl ; latisficd. , A M which, art endowed . 
Firtue is 85. 5 f 7 0 Fi 

1 00508 


7 


— — 


« 
4 £ 
4 i * 7 9 
5 F * * « © 
7 <>. — 
- Fo $ 9 
If ns 9 „„ 
q - ”; * 
AS 3." [2 ee; Y | $58 
2 2 "FH . 3 
r E q 
- — —_— 1 — 
— > « hs gt \ 
A, - — ——_ 8 
N r — 


— — 


vor N no 4 Fry Sire t 'be Theat.' .. 


* 


Er 


£ Mov do. oor works 
with for.” The Tree who are 7 
ie 3 1606 Toll about will 5 
"The. 8 aho 1 eat 
a 


- ul N Ther a 1 | 
"All al pe at now. — A 
T oy | grow we 


— 


er Oak 9 
5 Gold are ο xvhi 


Ss» W 
E 
7 


U 


1> — 


. 


1 


1 


| af a; 74 DA: N 


Net : Caſtle, for 
natural Caſcade near the Mill, — — is | 
wb e 20 


8 


Zo _ w 
SON 


a 


„ 


* 


— 


4 


* 


% * * 
Oar p » A >. 
* a. WS 
» "7 2 


= f 1? 


3 


* 7 81 110 a: 2 


| 4 
+! 
15 
' 


n F, 


—— U— — 
. 


7 3 
. 1 1 * 
A <>» 7 * p & — 8 
—— — — 222 — 
— 


e 


36, "One Sub 
ins Fenpl 5 were 
5 World: And 


3 7; 
_ — 
—U—ẽ = ones 
— 


— 


* #- i g 
oy > FF: 03 
be 3+ —_ . 
ors Hal xÞ 
: A 4 0 P 5 
r * io s The OR 
— — — — 


— 


„ „ 7 di vw e 


b ME 1 — 9 1 
Cl m rance Ly Us Tweet, * P 
ſure" bring Pain,” Piet ig the Foundation 

11% Oh 55 * 0 1 1 5 | ; f 1 ih 4 8 4 ; : bk 2 | 


TIE £1 $5 WA „„ 
„ Kule 32. The Genitive Cale, . 
B The Rod of bras mae the baer ſhare. 
8 4 an 4 vil By 

EN AST "IF RN 
9 Aa ; Wong — ** N . F 3038 


EA 3 f e 
w. e coin 


+. "ny 1 


1 


NS 


4 N 
i 2 v8 
* I 7 


4 A . bleſſed kr nt debe o i 
| good,:; He axt happil "wiſe, - whom Avis le 30 


. e coſt. 11 Ton vlg apt” callet 
= Scholar ſhould behave well. The School 
x: bl - confine Boyvain;nat12d tailed a Priſd. Th 
. whom, is poor, admire em be rich, f 
_ copfiderivg the Te 
= 45207 To [1 5 
3 . El hee! ele * 
+38 axthions _- N 2 


[ 
Pas 
1 . 
9 


% 
To * 
' 
1.24 
. « 
* 
91 * 


25 Let F 


x 21 ai 4 ſq * 
1 Body 3 de 


Ede re he who no Body commend. Ther 
E N we have no Effect, wilt not 


4. He de not happy 4o | 


God 15 1 8 (ivy eh 
lation * he. : 


FR 1 71 1 20 e 


22 


N 7 
5 n > — e Y 
» r : * „ a 
* 41 5 * -_ 9 N 
* 56 . > 7 ! 7 5 at” * 2 N 
2 5 A - * th 
3 N A 23 
- yu _— _ — — I _ 8 7 p 
7 1 A _ x "i g N 2 
1 n . © - = 
,” * 2 22 
rr — Shs af { 


valid K 1 en ew 5 Mt 
he of thoſe ist be hau haſt, 4 whe 
P Nred, and ſo 8 (Follow; the Exe 
e wöo our Saviounfetfor bis Diſeiples, an 
Irccive a Reward, why in youth. thy greater 
| Happy am that Men whom live quietly, ' 
at the Fruit of their; Labor“ Mm 1 
nleſt Man? Solomon. M was the ſtrong · 
ln? Samſon - Natnpl I dave 95 
% ith Ru Mt + 5 3K Ks eee bs 
| 8 £11 th oo 
a Pr ach 1 Abfwer er OX N 
bi 1. png 11 2 40174 4 dy 0 
Voight ad? re 

to honour ? The Kin S Are. 
. To who. "halt me apply 4 To 2 
e Mina. "3% Dog . thank Fe 


moat 4 
> | A 
K LC es 4 Hed otret be 


38 


— 
— 


"= 


— 


. EU SITTING er LEE : 


— ” of} 
at AEST 


CERES. 


+323 S ae 


ve? b a * 7 = 
EO ( wif : j 8 \ 
, * } > $4 4 . ! 
* AE ee ag . 
8 1 2 
RE 91D; , : . 15 
j ; La 
\ %. \ it” 2 2 1 ; : [4 


to Peale his by ng] Mader. 


\ 233 4 1 , Y 5 * —— 


* 


e in Weakk; and he am care 

laing. Mas anßt, 

im. — exempt np Ni 

Pr equal with: Ape. This Women is very - = 
e og l. Ni e „ 
25 Men korn nth *6 Nat e 5 


een ee Node? 


Wa 


u. Partitive Internogativg, e. Exaniples.: 


e Kei * 141 x 23k. Ip. + 'F $425 


- 
» - 


* we am rer Arenen 
en didſt you mean thay: muſt 
ne wrong, The * the: Si 


- * —— 
— ws 2 — - 
—_ EOS 
n 


we'd 
. 7 mY 5 

3 

n 


younger 
nuch 45 Tripp e . 
© _ 7 e end 1835 | 


Bat Comparative Adje TW Ke. 
85 Rxamplos. ob Se 


hn 


— dt + Soc Rey . 


- 


— 


4 
+ 


—— 


— — 
Ws RES max — Ig — A 


- 
* 


POL og WR Ee 


n 


. 2 2% 


& 4 7 * 
3 . Vs \ J 
Fn Th 45 . * is 4 
* 4 * > l 5 8 A * 
* tas * * 1 » 3 A. 0 
— k nr — — . 
£ + 2 % ” 


eee 


—— — 
— a 


Rule 4 
8 Sto! n 20s. 


. \ , 


D dees wet. _ b e 
i EF ch * . Ag 


8 art che 2 far, W che Horte who! my Fat 
dees 
terd⸗ 


n — 
School and aunwilling of e | This Me 
vawgkh y he Weg which! all 851 Gefion 
live 4 Her is very ae,, in ht 
Purchtw. r einn ud me wh Whiue 5 


eber, EYE for Pe 


c . gs 


Das 


7 > 
9 * 
» % # 8 
1 1 N 9 £ ” 
2 3 » 
= c 2 * N 4 q 
x * * - 
0 the Art 


mr * 
9 r 5M trig „ele 1 er 
40 | | ö 


80 21 Fa 1 
Many Mas erer abary 


56 Life dh mn 
Bye YO 


. 
en ** Hy X. v 4 «| bor 41h 24.3146 


| Rule 45. Framples'th this Bader oy 


78 55 34 & © 65 "i F 


jectives fign aifying, Kc. Examp 
| _ 290139240 & vues N 98 1 „ 5 k = 
Hlartforth School art bng - My four For, * 
ene Foot. This 52 gr * 


1 * 
1 anden. Which en all 


LOL 
8 . — 
. þ 3 
. „ 3 
[PER « * # 2 
25 I 4 , FE © 
1 * "Ip A 
l 7 CF ih. a 
. A * 
£0 Fi * g f * J 
* 7 $ 1 ” * 
1 : — 
fs OY * 7 . * * 


7 


* 1 5 7 * 2 N n 2 7 Y 6 : | A 
: ; j „ ks i "Fs 
„ . 
* val ic ꝗXER 
iN * 2 a 1 
. 8 Wo 
+. But 
1 . 


is Coms are *he fe vi b e 
„ Jactey. That Books was my Maſter, but 
Wii's an: me. That Crown is You, ama 
Ss . Nog: * * ls 57 ; od 7 £Þ4 


- * * . . * * » » - IT 
my s * 
ih f 5 3 S 8 n 
by 4 4 x 53 E 5 * 7 7 8 4 b * : n 2 1 4 * * 4 


th 2 * ns 1 4 po IE #22 8 


| akes theſe Won to be She 20 1 want- 
'Dors you really ſuppoſe this to be e? 1 
upon this Men fo be he who have been en- 
ng after VVV of $a 


1 . 4 * £4 


* 3 . „ 1 FEY . % 2 98 8 


„. All Verbs Trxnfiive, $6. Examples. 


| wilt regard they” whom a: are rig 5 . 
2 they whom is wicked. 
1 and me love he, and my 
hour learned 1 1 


* * — 8 . 
F Pe * 7 US ant 1 * _ — - 
" % * 7 0 S "> 
at * 232828 — — # 
e 


=: Jas. — 


* 
— — 


©. A , .4 " 
f : 2 8 * 1 5 2 * 
ry þ ” ** 5 N » > 
a by : 2 3 
" | g 65, 
g * = — * — * - 
ala mn pa. * « — 
ual - 
"NOI 1 * + * 
— 1 r 2 4 


i Wong 


5 


% 7 Ms 
4 F< E 5. + + Yes 
\ 1 


e 


god Boys lien: Mah Alen 4 great. 
Some Man prefers temporal n is 


N 
- 


2 Pa 
D. r 


u Happineſs, Am art a Fool whom prefe 8 
110 Furs * 2 bim art a Ta who " i 


: a N er : ' 
. 2 25 +1 * a ; ©; 35; Pas DE - 
: 75 o 73 3 * 
F N * . 3 4 18 . f 4 
| 'L — . „ i & 75 25 9 _ 4 4 54 
* . a os * MN I „ 7 1 8 r 2 2 
4's . — - l | 1 = * R *+ = Je FE 9 323 Toi * D 4 3 
p * 98880 « : F g N * 2 4 : 8 ” s 7 * - 
7 » p TA , x - . 
* ; 1 2 j © KY, 5-8 r 


a 


* 3p + 


* 


„5 
7 ” 
1 


* 
3 R 


hes $9) 


79 RE 


* aq 


* 


. mae ag ws 75 one be of 
: Fart buy Methnſflah hvetb 10 nine l. 
xty nine Year.. ; tfor ; 

Riege F three Mili or more; and Yo 
_ diftant from, Lenden W's of. two hinged, | 


Dream... He fa 


3 4 x 
C 42 
x os P „ . * 5 


5 | — 4 "Rule 54. Almoſt all a v 04 
ü e eee, 
5 fob wre Meese Lo 


; * orn pn. Tareggaow thei to 


J 1 th * ſhine the Water, the greedy. Dog cat 
1 El Fe e ea a 
: 4005 * e Ula 5100 L101 
8 ae. loveth is pling; . Ie 
am ndti able «heb 
Toung * 
Leden the, dance together. The Hunt 
eue th Hound ha Beet 


4, - ” #: 
- * = 
Re bs 
* 
: "» 3 : 
1 . 7 \ 3 $4.7 2» : if P L > c : j j 
op : 6" A 8 £43 , 
6 * 1 n 2 3 NE 1 1 4 ” - ” * 
{> . F L a BI ” e 1 : - N Y 
* 1 % * t a2 — * . 
Rf . 4 1 8 7 * 


; ; 4 4 * 
325 1 "ir "af i * . 


0 Cane 8 
— = bu 
— — 


o 


CORES 232 „ 
. PEO 
» 
2 
8 
*: 
5 
* 
aA 


— 
1 
- 
wI 
4 o 
* 
1 
* 
7 


10 U Fl 4 - 
wel SETS x. £ 
2 k S ©” 1 
FI * 13 * — 
1 E : * 8 8 
: | 4 7. fr 5 * 2 8 a) 
$ * * X. — d - 
8 1 F I 
\ " * * 48 « $ wo - 
140 r a # ; py * 
1 TM Nh 5 * — * 24 
4 " wth £ & TR, 
ay , 


. <4 vi 3 741 7: 


* 


e 


l you what. me thinks vou a den ile. —— 
beak the Fruth you am very good eee 3 
& Door I muſt hath, the Ken, SOA Tod 
vie ae bg ; exert 7 

Th The-Lafinkive*Mogds 601 amples. 
Fre” the San: thine brighs; n Fi Sh 
kind art ſubject to miſtakeſt. He walking is 
aint Exerciſe, but they rode is far plea ant. 
im inclind 7 2 8 e | 
ben to. Lau off his Play, 


je 53. A Verb, is called wege 
len 


3» 


TT 


£ N 3 - * — * 2 
. 1 Fs * 4 4 1 "x4 4 
4 „ 3 


lone 


n 
JENS 4 {7} 
* 


o 


young Men wks kwindle und — 
You e conterns the Chitſtian' State 
the Bi and pious Man. Len 
* I toldok whe your Affair. Tibet 
dent Maſter ſometimes d% wink at the 
I of their Scholar; but he nnn 
to een chat he Scholars does (help e 1 
le 59. When the: Nen er Pronopa, „ | 
| # © * "0. go Exaimipick'--* 1 ol 73 65 ＋ 3 5 
br \ the” Wind white" | 
Br Al vals" whit 1 Cd, 


$-4 
& 
= 
* — 
1 * : 
4 . 3 
FA » 
/ * 
* e 7 
: z 
— ©. 
52 * % * 
e 1 3 
7 - » * 
4 5 


chou ſ e edeſt and 

Tha ear; nch to'converſe with good! 
paineth mine to ſaw the wicked in (o 1 

J greatly concern I t 
oppteſſed. Mz þ 


. you Snow faſt, and be-rain hard, ye 


905 


| Rule 61. Fariiciples in ing, & 


© BY, Y* If #84; F F. e bay 44. 8 . 1 


Pur Men with too more Tage 


dem often hurtful boch of Body and 5 


S. 4 v * 


a e Ti . 


51 N i {tas F 


oftor A 75 eſt ſtrange Thing, Jaun * 
med”; tha; the ee * 2 red I 
m grows without ſow, M ."-" 
i — all Difficult "433k 


Ss . K 


be Wa 


mers; and every one, 
e bimfelves to Breda. - FE VG 
, herſelf am Judge. waſt 777 in. Fa 
bel. the Romans, A tongutered ſeveral Fil 
hight that Kim euldeg vquer tl 


u. pan enn 


le 63. 


* 


W 
Nath ou 5 


ws 


Mot Man am defi irons ith five. le 
ich have got the Habit #9 lie wilt not be cre- 
hen ſhe cok, ft the 6 He am fearful | 2 


to A oy # 72 
1 5 A 5 F.,. bp N75 - * 4 71 4 _ 53 * 
, 4.4 5 7 LF r 1 % * IE * af a=; ; 2 . 
10 85 4 F * 1 KR P 25 7 e, A 
= 2 5 Ret 
— . * 1 - 
\ * £ - . 5 A TA » 
* G 5 - -* 0 22 = 
by Ss * — . 7 _- * ; by 
F 1 J o 2 — 7 . 
Y * - 5 a} { , X 7 
x £143 3 
— * 8 
. bs ** * 1 
> - 2 7 — 
ng . 
\ wh — N 5 8 1 
* % * 4 
18 * hy * 7 ö 
w g 4 r fv " 
% Lo * > * 4 % 1 
1 2 a * 8 * 4 ; 3 1 2 2 ” oo 
2 8 WIT, 
8 A* Y 4 3 we 1 ; 
 * 2 * \ = 
1 - % : 1 


e Dxmnerens:/ 


+ And alter Verbs, Kc. Example eff 


If me. 6 &ilfol to fail, 1 think me ſhoul 8 
nevertheleſs love the Land gooder thau the 
Him am ſuch a ſurl Fellow that he affi ight 


Men to come to he. Eloquence am procured 
92 often. Boys ought not to be diſcouri 

4 Audying 95 ie Profit am 8b. 7 lib 

low wi 


Li AGES . 
.  .Þ 
* 4 DS 1 2 * * 1 
91 * Q * * 
* os Cad 0 4 L 
Az * *» 4 3 * 5 
" * » * 
4 "4 's =o 4 
” A %- 
7 Verbs, Kc. 
N 
of 9 * N * les. 
8 robe 
Y . , 
i 
A 


3 2 TW. 4 Hin likeſt 1 Sbe len 
Auncr. Boy love play . An idle Boys do n 


oe be uon. & good Boy leave off fo ply! 
23 A, anc betake-hirdult.z0- bim Book. 


E Rule'62. Whevythis Parric iclple, Kc. Examplc 


0 re bi. 


Rule 


5 


1 "i. 7 o ks. » 
8 | 8 


k mo 
i i 1 
me Ma 


i 4 4 Nothing Men learn to did nl. 1 Aa 
ig Bebels: Was: ao. by the coming, the Duk 384» 
of Cumberland. By doing of our Duty. to G 
and Man, we ſhall am reward rs wang, | 
3 1 Thing en, 9 ner = Canton c 
FF dery- | 
Rule . | Pardleiples are e, 4. M. * 71. 
V 72 amples. 3 u 
3 Abe lan ane Dog at ane le hie 
3 x ing Man. Fi 1 Cocks afford Diventian g. x, be 
. e ae, Mine love ä Bod, 


leon. The Maid: 80 to e * 
t a Milks: Pail. 1705 Be Ee 


ie le 69. They alſo wi Adeline, b. 
Zh. . Emples. | 
ren a oo 5 


urg ri am 2 very learnedft Man, and ches art 
mli/bedft- young Lady. Theſe Proſpeit ant 


pleaſingeſt than the other. That prate 


ore bis . | 
54 a . IT 5 
* tle 70. and allo whew they A Ae. = 
r ae +7! Hou e 


ing, nor an impudent Boys a. decent Things. 
ne _ hath very unfeeleth Hearts. Future 


8 D YE 'R 23 7 5 . 


Ho live 


W 


lov wilt never hald e Tongue, it run 255 


4 modeſt Boys whit never did an b | 


ds and Pubilkwent: am uo/eeth Things te 
1 An unarpect. Friend with F W | 
us ntance vifited I yeſterday... e 


a axe peed, . Exarapletr | 


3p the Se unprofitable, that ud 
J his on Plcaſurc:: Then am any; Man 
— — rate Withen 8 


F N 
% 2 . 9 5 f 8 
+ wo zwwrse rs y 
Bern 
* 


in the Winter, vor uber canſt you tell 


ves 
Woodcocks am in Summer. b 1K 


ol, 
[ be 
Rule 74. Adverbv'are placed, fee; 1 Examplli ive 


” 4 = 
«Vi 


3 good very Men e and e pr 
eth. Unp ofitable he live to himſelf which 
; not min to do ded gw dares e 


Rule 73. if the Verb be Paſſive, K. Examy 


"ye 


He droperly am employed, and certainly 
be reward for his Pains. It wi/ely am do. 
fooliſhly was f. poke.” That _ A 
8 5 


Rule 74 1 O Nez, Re. Examples 
25 have eff nothing - in her Potker. She 


ner nothing as he ſhou eſt he Nee en 
nothing in him Pocket. 5 


na 75. The ConjunAions of, Se. Exampl 
Ma Boy ſbouldeſt offend knowingly, and ca 


A - mitref the tame Fault thrice, the Maſter am Ru 

de blame J him pardm he. Though me 

; _ commit a Fault; and tho* I was in bad Compar * 
Fou am unſit to reprove I which did the far or 
Thing. » Unleſs thee keep out of = Snow, e put 
wilt — Kides in her Heels. You wouldeſt 1 


* hadſt Corus lone your . * 


" Fo 


* - 
* " 
Li — — 


* a 


"A 


Thd1I Pevabivs 1 * "I 
| wear Mreight Shdes. Expt thee 26 5 
vol, and except thee getteft. thine Leflt eee 1 

| be bedted, Went And The Würth 


ere a Clock. Gb and fred whether ut bein = 
ve a babes. Fe 7 | 


þ 46. r. 140. we Obhju itn Lat, =. 
Examples. 6 


18504 Med take Care 434? him Ban TY 
body either in he r or Fortune. My Fa- 
fend I to School h I hay berdihe A Jcho. 
hand what a Fool me are that 1 Jbouldft forget 
ne Books. Idle Boys am ſo fond in Play that 
carft never think of his Leffon nor School. 


le 7s The eas len, and that, ke. N 1 


amples. 


la he that A639 take Cafe bin Falleth. | 
ſen you fAlideſt on the Ice ſee that he does vort 
L Playeſt hen you wilt, but miädeſt that 

bt not play when F6t obight tad}, 


Rule 76. The Sager on than, ke. 


Thomas, Hal %, d zone am ab talk — 7 | | 
put down td the Towelt For ba 0 
. none amn dt 3 u Arn 


- 


* 


F 


TY Es rue un Exuncuns. | 
2 | 
3 „ 


Role 79. The Conjunctions, &. 83. 


Abe I are fatigue, as me does not Hep“ 
ive up, and yet me are ar black % a Coal iP" 
Sweat Either Thomas nor John were in (> 

Aicher William or me were concern. Wh! 
i am you nor me matters not, fer us ſhalt ule 84 
am I _certginly blame. 
wu ll: go 
my 
my 

, ke/ 

1 


| Theſe Images either bad or good, ul 
If them am rightly underſtood. E 
Without either Character or Plot, le th 


Nature unknown : and Art forgot. * 
td at DE 


Rule 81 I. Prepobrions always, wes 7 


i * came up to J, and paſſed by 5 48 him 8 
to Church. Him intend. Miſchief againſt 
us muſt therefore take Care * he. | le 


| Rule 82. The Prepoſition, and/the Ae if 


"Theſe i is che Men with who me hath Dealin 
| 75 who am you t ing, and about what? To 
art the Perſon I am talking, and of N 5 
"oſt x not like to be informed: n * 


% Hl f 
J a -# - * 
— 
- . 
- «4 4 I 
1 ; 
- * "4 N 
— : * . 
© a > 
* 

* * 


Fx 
. 


ot li Jeep Waters ola Hently the Banks by. Boy 
Coal unmer love to go the Vater into. Me deſ- 
in þ Shower when I are a Tree under. 

Wh 


halt 


:my Book and hold from I. I buy a Horſe, 
Iny Neighbour like a Knave greatly value 
„ ke fays that him art not worth _ che 


2 8 


Bule 85. The Prepoſition placed, Ke. 


lle threes the Ball over the Houle, and then 


at Boy goes e the Fire, them often thruſts 
tle Boys out. Him which on Sundays go 
af he Houſe, do not always went to Church. | 


| Rule 86. As a Prepoſition ſet, a6 3 


le never hear a Word of if, and for that had 
tf what, to make a proper Reply. 


lin ELLIPTICAL SYNTAX 
To . Elliptical Conſtruction, &c. 


b riſe at Six of the Clock, break faſted in. 
e e 


— 


— 
; — 14 
— ge 
N / 8 


— 


ExGLiSH Exgncises. a 8 an”. 8 


3. But this Manner of Expreſſion, dec. 5 


ule 64. A Prepoſition i in Compoſition, 2 ae. | 


I gone - Glo Home, but ſoon turned. Him E 


* 


nteſt into the Garden to brought it ouf. When 


£ * R * 3 * N 4 "TIF , « a. l "0 * * 
F R 1 n - N. N 4 8 9 
* +>, : * * 1 i * * LE HL * 
2 : > * : FN MLS . „ 2 ** oy CSR je 

, - — — 5 


8 5 ; * 5 
1 I "i 
4 7 

s 


+ > - 1 wy : N N Jools 
* 1 I * t ; 
: — 
+ > 4 . 1 24 
? ; | / E Ex : | 
«4, LIK 4 E . - 
SW 6 * . * 
"A E 5 * / 1 e 
L ; 9 


bes Syppex at even. ofithe Clock; and goto 
41 * of the Clock, am not us regular Bc 
* 2. The Nominative Caſe, &c. 
The Boys | layeſt they chatter an they 
up.and. 2 the Schoch; when abe Maſte 
ablent, and be & not come inn. 
5 7 The Verb alſo is frequently, Ec. 
Gize to · euery Men kis Due, give Tribute 


who Tribute is due, give Cuſtom to who Ct 
dom, and gave Fear, to whoſe Fear. 


4. The Subſtantive is often, &c.. 
May, bs ama pardThing to labour all Day, ai 
dit up al Night, none: but the unreaſinable'P 
Joni deſises that Thing e 


* The Relative i underſtood &. 
6. And the Anteeedent, & c. 


5 2 
4 3 * 
* 2 18 
* 
* 
\ K 7 
* , ; 


1 


2 Me . 
* 7 1 9 $ 
„ - * * 
* » 


4 a * * 4 f he © * * 2 , ; r 
7 FR We * 
N 8 —I 8 0 7 50 j 
ENO 1. Elen 497 
c 7 7 * 5 s ; 
4 it * 2 R 
* 


5. What . Kc. 


his is. the Ting who ua wiſhed for, i. Ra L.2 4 
g who we. longed for, namely, a Holiday. 


8, The Nous ggyerping, "a = | 
ic Bells rings at Sr. John Church at half paſt | 
but at. St. Mary Church at — SE 8 | 
„ When the Noun + is expreflec 


fe Furniture am the Horſe, Tite wire art- 
n. and the n are che Dog. 7 


But if he Noun, Ke. 


fr Ebife am my Knife, an that Thkfio 
pur Inkhorn. This Books are Johns Book, 
that Boots i is William Boots. 5 


u. All the Words of a Queſtion, hes.” 

rhe Reign, wafChriſt SornZTi — 

luguſtus Cæſar- If. whine Reign were e 

ity 2 In the Reign of Fiberins . - - ©: ] 
5 85 12: The Sign to, cc. 5 


dl anneticd ſky, nw nos: 
S 


5 2 * 
* 


10 return as her came. 


x EnGL1SH . 7 


13. The Verb i is underſtpod, dc. 


The Roſe his 8 than the Violet. Aq 
Life art gooder than Riches. Me am ſtrong i 
35 BN but 2 art a good Scholar than me. 


1 955 14. The CopjuaBtion tha, de. 

The Oracle ſay, Socrates was the wiſer of 

Man. The Londoners ſays, London am; and t 
Pariſians ſays, Paris art the larger of the ty 
City. 


"Fol The bee if and though, &c. 


1 Fight thee ever ſo well, thee may- be be: 
I Learn him ever ſo well, him muſt rake Pains, 


16. 1 he Prepoſitions to and for, kr. f 


What wilt you gave me, ab me will con 
you. your Leſſon? Me wilt gave you. what yo 
e and thank thou beſides. e "301 


17. The Prepoſition in or on, "hs 


"The firſt of January us ds a new Yea 
ö The thirtieth of January King Charles was be 
headed, and * _ oth oy 155 n 
2 ee 


Ecru Exencises. 


18. Sometimes. the firſt Member, c. : 8 


ſhe Maſter do, and ever muſt threaten the 


3 him Rider. e 


lng Goorge the third am a virtuous and 


10 ſay you. . 
0 


K "Bp n 


1 E E 8. Rid 
1 youngs Prince in thoſe Seaſon i in the "Tn 
in alls Nature ſbew themſelves in eee, 
ate Degree to Perfection, take a Walk one 
i thro? a very delightfulleſt. Garden. ' Him 


Ie of Bee. He approach that Gbjefts ubo am 
rely new to he, and obſerved/} fo Amazement, + 
Order, Care and Buſineſs of thoſe lem Com- 
bowealth. His Cells began to be form of a 
bular Figures, and one Parties of the dee 
if orig] it with Nectar, while boch wert 
. 


wlar if he am idle. The idle Horſe n = 
wilt continue to feel both the Whip and 


* 23 . 
* 


19. sometimes the latter Member, be. 3 


Prince, and ſo am his Grandfather George „ 
Queen Charlotte his Confort art an amia- 
pious, and good Princeſs, and ſo was Queen 
dine. God bleſs the King and Ven W = 


2 great Noiſe, and look about perceive a 


n 
* 


S 
< — _ — — = 
r F784 4” rr — 1 
7 e + 3% RE GRE . . Eo Ie * R ä 
2 - . =Y LSE ETD BY hs” SE 5 Fo 5 5 2 * Wet. £1 
2 K . ” wo 4, : ” "&. -< 5 A Se i; ta ” 7 [3 5 3 PR _ by . wa 
* > TH ©. * +4 ” r r 0 i £4 9 3 a 3 S* WE x - 
- P : N . . a 7 N Eee } 99 * ? 2 
7 bt, — 1 bo — 8 * OF 1 < CN © N : 7 F ._ s N 5 3 
— : 4 1 : * 3 "AF - - 3 * * LEY ant 4 95 q % - Gat Y 4 
fo „ £9 > - RG > 4 FEST Lv ) 2 _ 
U 5 8 . N — I 1 7 * * 
5. 1 > N — . * 
” 3 : 6 9 ' . +» ® 4 8 oy 
s . OW *” 7 HI * 
* 1 ” * * « 
F : P 
© $84 


"SIO 
2% <y 
2. 
*. 
4 - 


oof _ Enouion Exincions, 


employ In ſupplying they with Thyme, abe 
rn from among all the Rich of the Sp 
Lxineſs and Inactivity am baniſbing the Soccie 
every Things were in Motion, without Conf! 
und Dforder. The moſt: confiderableft give 
Orders, and were obey of them Inferiors, with 
Murmur nor Complaint, The young Pr 
were extreme Surprize, as have never ſaw 
Things equal to their Polity before: When 
Hees who were ronfider as Queen te the 
addrefs he thus. The View .you 5h bel 
* you, young Princes, muſt be entertained, 
* may be make inſtructive. Us ſuffered here 
« thing like Diſorder, or Lieentiouſneſs ame 
& . Them am moit ęffeemedeſt, whoſe by t 
% Capacity and Diligence, can did e be 
_ © for the public Weal. Our firſt Places am 
 "« ways beftow, where there am moſt Merit; 
A laſt of all, us em tal Pajas Day and Night 
84 the Benefit of Mans; ment. you and imit 
„ We. introduce 13 Order and Diſeipline 
« ity ig Man, you ſo much admirt in off 


3 ; 
4 a { AY 
1 
ä 
ROY f 
ob *. : 
# 8 i TTY a Pl 
I * 5 8 2 = 
* F I 5 7 I Sz 
1 ' y 
. * 
n " wo 
"ER. * a ; 
"A . 
f 
1 5 
f * 
6 5 
\ ee 
56 of .. 
\ 
% * 
+ i 


